5530-D (23rd Edition), Direct photometric Method 0.001

M/S. ADANI WILMAR

LTD, DHRAB EIA REPORT FOR PROPOSED EXPANSION OF SYNTHETIC ORGANIC CHEMICALS IN EXISTING

FACILITY AT VILLAGE DHRAB & MUNDRA, KUTCH DESCRIPTION OF

ENVIRONMENT

KADAM ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANTS | DECEMBER 2021 186

S. No Parameters Methodology Minimum Detection Limit

10 Phenol APHA: 5530-D (23rd Edition), Direct photometric Method 0.001 mg/l

11 Sulphates APHA:4500-E as SO4 2-(23rd Edition), Turbidimetric method 1 mg/l

12 Total

Hardness APHA: 2340-C (23rd Edition), EDTA Titrimetric method 2 mg/l

13 Ca++

Hardness APHA: 3500-Ca-B (23rd Edition) EDTA Titrimetric method 2 mg/l

14 Mg++

Hardness APHA: 3500-Mg-B (23rd Edition), By calculation 2 mg/l

15 Total

Alkalinity APHA: 2320 B (23rd Edition), Titration method 5 mg/l

16 Nitrate IS:3025 (part-34)1988 (RA 2014), 3.3 colorimetric method 0.1 mg/l

17 Fluoride APHA:4500 F-D(23rd Edition),SPANDS method 0.05 mg/l

18 Sodium APHA:3500 Na-B (23rd Edition), Flame emission Photometric

method 1 mg/l

19 Potassium APHA: 3500 K-B (23rd Edition) Flame emission Photometric

method 1 mg/l

20 Calcium APHA: 3500-Ca-B (23rd Edition) EDTA Titrimetric method 2 mg/l

21 Magnesium APHA: 3500-Mg-B (23rd Edition), Calculation method 2 mg/l

22 Salinity APHA: 2520 B (23rd Edition), Electrical Conductivity method -

23 Total

Nitrogen APHA: 4500 N Org-B, (23rd Edition), Macro Kjeldahl method 0.05 mg/l

24 Total

Phosphorous APHA: 4500 P-C (23rd Edition), Colorimetric method 0.02 mg/l

25 Dissolved Oxygen

APHA: 4500 O-C(23rd Edition), Iodometric method 0.2 mg/l

26 Ammonical Nitrogen

IS:3025(part-34), 1988 (RA 2014), Distillation & colorimetric 0.05 mg/l

27 SAR Flamephotmetric & EDTA method -

28 Heavy Metals - -

a Arsenic (as

As) APHA: 3500-As-B (23rd Edition) Silver diethyldithiocarbamate

method/APHA: 3114-B (23rd Edition) AAS 0.01 mg/l

b Cadmium (as

Cd) APHA: 3111-B(23rd Edition) AAS 0.003 mg/l

c Chromium (as

Cr) APHA: 3500-Cr-B(23rd Edition), colorimetric method 0.02 mg/l

d Copper (as

Cu) APHA: 3500-Cu-B (23rd Edition) Neocuproine method/ APHA:

3111- B (23rd Edition) AAS 0.03 mg/l

e Cyanide (as

CN) APHA: 4500 CN- D & E(23rd Edition) 0.03 mg/l

f Iron (as Fe) APHA: 3500-Fe-B (23rd Edition), Phenanthroline

method/APHA: 3111-B(23rd Edition) AAS 0.05 mg/l

g Lead (as Pb) APHA: 3111-B(23rd Edition) AAS 0.01 mg/l

h Mercury (as

Hg) IS 3025 (P-48): 1994 (RA 2014))/ APHA: 3112-B (23rd

Edition) Cold vapour AAS method 0.001 mg/l

i Manganese

(as Mn) APHA: 3500-Mn-B (23rd Edition) Persulphate method/ APHA:

3111-B(23rd Edition) AAS 0.02 mg/l

j Nickel (as Ni) APHA: 3111-B(23rd Edition) AAS 0.02 mg/l

k Zinc (as Zn) APHA: 3111-B(23rd Edition) AAS 0.03 mg/

l Boron (as B) APHA: 4500 B-C (23rd Edition), Carmine method 0.05 mg/l

29 Total Coliform APHA: 9221-B (23rd Edition), Multiple Tube Fermentation Absent

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


S. No Parameters Methodology Minimum Detection Limit

30 Fecal Coliform APHA: 9221-E (23rd Edition), Multiple Tube Fermentation Absent

Photograph 3-2: Groundwater Sampling Photographs

GW-01 - Borana Village GW – 2 - Jarpara Village

GW – 03 - At Dhrab GW – 04 - Sukhpur Habitation (Mundra)

GW – 05 - Baroi Village GW – 06 - Pratappar Village

GW – 07 - Mangra Village GW – 08 –Mota Kapaya

Village

M/S. ADANI WILMAR LTD, DHRAB EIA REPORT FOR PROPOSED EXPANSION OF SYNTHETIC ORGANIC CHEMICALS IN EXISTING FACILITY AT

VILLAGE DHRAB & MUNDRA, KUTCH DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT


Table 3-7: Groundwater analysis results

Sample ID GW 01 GW 02 GW 03 GW 04 GW 05 GW 06 GW 07 GW 08

Sampling Location Borana Jarpara Dhrab Sukhpar

Habitation(Mundra) Baroi Pratappar (1) Mangra Mota Kapaya

Date of Sample Collection 09.04.21 09.04.21 09.04.21 09.04.21 09.04.21 09.04.21 08.04.21 08.04.21

IS 10500 Standard Limits for

drinking water

S. No. Parameters Unit Borewell Borewell Borewell Borewell Borewell Borewell Borewell Borewell Desirable limit

Permissible

limit

1 pH pH scale 6.5-8.5 No Relaxation 8.24 8.14 8.05 8.15 8.06 7.32 7.59 8.07

2 Temperature o C NS NS 29.5 29.6 29.9 29 29.8 29.3 29.3 29.4

3 Turbidity NTU 1 5 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

4 TDS mg/lit 500 2000 1272 2320 3588 2280 2392 1896 8192 7952

5 Electrical

conductivity µmhos/cm NS NS 2100 3880 5920 3840 3990 2940 14800 13200

6 COD mg/lit NS NS <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5

7 BOD mg/lit NS NS <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2

8 Phenol mg/lit 0.001 0.002 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

9 Chlorides mg/lit 250 1000 550 1040 1699 1030 1150 790 4501 3865

10 Sulphates mg/lit 200 400 172 239 254 289 96 373 444 524

11 Total Hardness mg/lit 200 600 150 400 510 240 440 200 1360 1340

12 Ca++ Hardness mg/lit NS NS 60 166 216 66 178 46 530 480

13 Mg++ Hardness mg/lit NS NS 90 234 294 174 262 154 830 860

14 Total Alkalinity mg/lit 200 600 350 270 250 270 250 100 160 260

15 Nitrate mg/lit 45 NR 9.5 2.31 1.54 32.83 17.25 15.51 15.30 4.19

16 Fluoride mg/lit 1 1.5 1.48 1.30 0.55 0.57 1.25 <0.05 0.39 0.40

17 Sodium mg/lit NS NS 283.7 434 835 502.5 520 533 1656.5 1434.9

18 Potassium mg/lit NS NS 12 4.5 54 1.3 52 9 3.8 3.9

19 Calcium mg/lit 75 200 24.1 66.5 86.6 26.5 71.3 18.4 212.4 192.4

20 Magnesium mg/lit 30 100 21.9 56.9 71.4 42.3 63.7 37.4 201.7 209.0

21 Salinity mg/lit NS NS 991 1874 3062 1855 2072 1423 8110 6964

22 Total Nitrogen mg/lit 0.5 NR 2.67 1.07 0.96 7.79 4.06 3.84 3.59 1.07

23 Total Phosphorous mg/lit NS NS <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02

24 Dissolved Oxygen mg/lit NS NS 2.7 3.2 2.8 2.5 3.1 2.9 3.2 3.4

25 Ammonical Nitrogen

mg/lit NS NS <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05

26 SAR - NS NS 20.64 9.40 16.01 5.66 10.73 16.30 19.45 16.97

27 Heavy Metals

a Arsenic (as As) mg/l 0.01 0.05 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

b Cadmium (as Cd) mg/l 0.003 NR <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003

c Cromium (as Cr) mg/l 0.05 NR <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02

d Copper (as Cu) mg/l 0.05 1.5 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03

e Cyanide (as CN) mg/l 0.05 NR <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03

f Iron (as Fe) mg/l 0.3 NR <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05

g Lead (as Pb) mg/l 0.01 NR <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

M/S. ADANI WILMAR LTD, DHRAB EIA REPORT FOR PROPOSED EXPANSION OF SYNTHETIC ORGANIC CHEMICALS IN EXISTING FACILITY AT

VILLAGE DHRAB & MUNDRA, KUTCH DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT


Sample ID GW 01 GW 02 GW 03 GW 04 GW 05 GW 06 GW 07 GW 08

Sampling Location Borana Jarpara Dhrab Sukhpar

Habitation(Mundra) Baroi Pratappar (1) Mangra Mota Kapaya

Date of Sample Collection 09.04.21 09.04.21 09.04.21 09.04.21 09.04.21 09.04.21 08.04.21 08.04.21

IS 10500 Standard Limits for

drinking water

S. No. Parameters Unit Borewell Borewell Borewell Borewell Borewell Borewell Borewell Borewell Desirable limit

Permissible

limit

h Mercury (as Hg) mg/l 0.001 NR <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

i Manganese (as Mn) mg/l 0.1 0.3 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02

j Nickel (as Ni) mg/l 0.02 NR <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02

k Zinc (as Zn) mg/l 5 15 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03

28 Total Coliform MPN Shall not be

detectable in any 100ml sample

Shall not be detectable in any

100ml sample N.D(<1.8) N.D(<1.8) N.D(<1.8) N.D(<1.8) N.D(<1.8) N.D(<1.8) N.D(<1.8) N.D(<1.8)

29 Faecal Coliforms MPN Shall not be

detectable in any 100ml sample

Shall not be detectable in any

100ml sample N.D(<1.8) N.D(<1.8) N.D(<1.8) N.D(<1.8) N.D(<1.8) N.D(<1.8) N.D(<1.8) N.D(<1.8)

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


3.4.4 Interpretation of Groundwater Results

Overall TDS levels in the study area are high due to proximity to sea.

The nitrogen levels in the ground water are above limits due to possibility of agricultural discharges meeting

the ground water.

3.5 Air Environment

3.5.1 General Study Methodology

The methodology for conducting the baseline environmental survey is obtained from the guidelines given in the EIA

Manual of the MoEF. Baseline information in the study area was collected by conducting primary sampling/field

studies.

3.5.2 Study Area & Study Period

The study area covering the buffer distance of 10 km around the boundary of the project site.

3.5.3 Secondary Data Collection & Review – Long Term Meteorology

The climate information of the study area is considered based on the published long-term climatological tables (1981-

2010) by Indian Meteorological Department (IMD), at New Kandla (Station ID: 42639) located at distance ~ 55.0 km

from the project site in ENE direction. The observatory is situated in the Harbour area of New Kandla.

A comparison of site meteorology observation with the published long term climatological information has been

presented in Table 3-13.

A copy of the long-term climatological data is enclosed as Annexure 10. These tables give useful information

about a region’s weather, since they are collected over a 30-year period.

Long-term meteorological data was considered for important parameters like temperature, humidity, wind speed,

wind direction, cloud cover and rainfall. The findings are provided as below in subsequent sections.

Temperature

The mean daily maximum temperature recorded was 35.5 °C (in the month of May).

The mean daily minimum temperature recorded was 14.5°C (in the month of January).

The highest temperature recorded was 47.1°C on 18th June, 1979.

The lowest temperature recorded was 4.4°C on 10th January, 1954.

Relative Humidity

Maximum morning humidity is 83% in August.

Maximum evening humidity is 69% in August.

Minimum morning humidity is 62% in January & December.

Minimum evening humidity is 36% in February.

Rainfall

Average Rainfall

Average total rainfall in the region is 407.4 mm. July observed maximum number of rainy days i.e. 6.5.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Maximum Rainfall in a Day

Maximum rainfall in a day recorded was 235.5 mm on 14th June, 2008.

Cloud Cover

The area remains cloudy between June – September, which is the active period of the monsoon season. During this

time cloud cover is between 2.8 to 5.4 Oktas during day time and 1.9 to 4.5 Oktas during night time.

Wind

Long term wind direction data is presented in Table 3-8. Overall for the whole year, first predominant wind

direction is from South West direction (31.1 %), second predominant wind direction is from West (18.4 %) and

third predominant wind direction is from North direction (15.1 %).

Table 3-8: Predominant Wind Direction based on Long-term Data (IMD – New Kandla) - Annual

Season Month Hours Wind blowing from

1st Predominant 2nd Predominant 3rd Predominant

Winter

January I N NW NE

II N NE SW/NW

February I N NW NE/W

II N/SW S NE

Summer

March I W NW N/SW

II SW S N

April I SW W NW

II SW S W

May I SW W S

II SW W S

Monsoon

June I SW W S

II SW W S

July I SW W S

II SW W S

August I SW W S

II SW W S

September I W SW NW

II SW W S

Post Monsoon

October I N NW W

II SW S N

November I N NW NE

II N NE SW

December I N NW NE

II N NE NW

Annual I SW W N

II SW W N

I: Morning hours; II: Evening hours

Average Long Term Meteorological Conditions – Rainfall & Humidity

Average meteorological condition is presented in Table 3-9.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Table 3-9: Average Meteorological Condition based on Long-term Data

Month Mean Daily Temperature Rainfall (mm)

Monthly Total

No. of

Rainy days

Relative Humidity

(%), (Morning)

Relative Humidity

(%), (Evening) Max Min

January 26.1 14.5 0.2 0 62 40

February 28.6 16.7 0 0.1 63 36

March 32.4 20.7 0.8 0.1 68 40

April 34.7 23.9 0.1 0 73 48

May 35.5 26.7 3.1 0.2 76 56

June 35.2 28.1 64.7 1.9 78 61

July 32.9 27.3 175.7 6.5 82 68

August 31.8 26.3 99.1 5.4 83 69

September 33.3 25.9 44.9 2.1 80 60

October 34.9 24.6 14 0.6 70 46

November 31.9 20.4 3.3 0.4 64 41

December 27.6 16 1.4 0.1 62 42

Total - - 407.4 17.3 - -

Average 32.1 22.6 - - 72.0 51.0

Wind blows predominantly from N direction followed by S/SW direction. Calm condition is ~ 8.89 %. Wind rose

diagram is presented as Figure 3-2.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Figure 3-2: Wind rose Diagram for January to March

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Figure 3-3: Wind Rose Diagram for Annual

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


3.5.4 Primary Data Collection & Review – Site Specific Meteorology

Baseline meteorological data for 12 weeks from 05th January to 04th April, 2021 has been collected hourly by

installing automatic meteorological station at site Nr. Weigh Bridge. Photographs showing Meteorological Station set

up are presented in Photograph 3-3.

Photograph 3-3: Photographs of Meteorological Station Setup

Meteorological station near Weigh Bridge within plant premises

Methodology of Site – Specific Meteorological Data Collection

Methodology for site-specific meteorological data collection in the study area is presented in Table 3-10.

Table 3-10: Monitoring Methodology of meteorological data collection

Sr.

No.

Sampling

Parameters

Sample collection Total

Sampling

Period

Sampling

Frequency Methodology Sampling

equipment

Sensitivity/

Detection Limit

1. Wind Speed Anemometer cup

counter (0 to 65 m/s) 0.25 m/s

05th January to 04th April, 2021

Hourly

As per manufacturer’s

manual

(IS 8829 -1978) Instruments are

calibrated.

2. Wind Direction Wind vane (0° to

357°) 1°

3. Temperature Thermometer (-40° to 60°)

0.1°C

4. Humidity Relative Humidity meter (0-99 %)

3 %

5. Rainfall Rain gauge 0.5 mm

6. Cloud Cover -- -- 4 Hourly Visual Inspection by the observer.

3.5.5 Site-Specific Meteorological Data

The site specific meteorological average hourly data as collected during the monitoring season is presented in

Table 3-11.

Table 3-11: Site-Specific Meteorological Data

Time (Hrs.)

Wind

Direction

(from)

Temperature

(°C)

Relative

Humidity

%

Wind

Speed

(km/hr)

Wind

Speed

(m/sec)

Total

Rainfall

(mm)

Cloud

Cover

(tenths)

0:00 SW 22.8 59.0 9.1 2.5 0.0 0.1

1:00 SW 22.1 60.7 8.9 2.5 0.0 0.0

2:00 SW 21.6 61.1 8.6 2.4 0.0 0.0

3:00 SW 21.4 60.4 8.3 2.3 0.0 0.0

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Time (Hrs.)

Wind

Direction

(from)

Temperature

(°C)

Relative

Humidity

%

Wind

Speed

(km/hr)

Wind

Speed

(m/sec)

Total

Rainfall

(mm)

Cloud

Cover

(tenths)

4:00 SW 21.5 59.3 7.7 2.1 0.0 0.0

5:00 SW 21.7 58.0 7.6 2.1 0.0 0.0

6:00 SW 21.9 57.4 7.4 2.1 0.0 0.0

7:00 SW 22.5 55.4 7.1 2.0 0.0 0.0

8:00 SW 22.9 53.3 6.9 1.9 0.0 0.0

9:00 SW 24.4 50.3 7.0 1.9 0.0 0.0

10:00 SW 27.1 43.8 8.0 2.2 0.0 0.0

11:00 SW 29.3 37.2 9.2 2.5 0.1 0.0

12:00 SW 30.6 33.3 9.6 2.7 0.0 0.0

13:00 SW 31.0 32.9 10.5 2.9 0.0 0.1

14:00 N 31.5 33.2 11.3 3.1 0.0 0.1

15:00 N 31.6 33.5 11.8 3.3 0.0 0.0

16:00 N 31.4 34.2 11.9 3.3 0.0 0.0

17:00 SW 30.9 35.4 11.9 3.3 0.0 0.0

18:00 SW 30.1 37.8 11.4 3.2 0.0 0.1

19:00 SW 28.3 44.1 10.2 2.8 0.0 0.1

20:00 SW 26.7 49.2 9.6 2.7 0.0 0.1

21:00 SW 25.8 51.9 10.0 2.8 0.0 0.1

22:00 SW 25.3 52.9 9.6 2.7 0.0 0.0

23:00 SW 24.6 54.4 9.6 2.7 0.1 0.1

Average / Predominant

SW 26.1 47.9 9.3 2.6 0.0 0.0

During the monitoring period i.e. from 05th January to 04th April, 2021, first predominant wind direction is from

South West direction (22 %), second predominant wind direction is from North direction (14 %) and third

predominant wind direction is from West direction (11 %)..

Summary of the Site-specific meteorological data is presented in Table 3-12.

Table 3-12: Maximum, Minimum & Average summary of site-specific meteorological data

Parameter Unit 05th January to 04th April, 2021

Maximum Minimum Average

Temperature °C 41.3 9.5 26.1

Humidity % 99.5 8.0 47.9

Wind Speed m/s 10.6 0.0 2.6

Cloud Cover Tenth 6.5 0.0 0.0

Rainfall mm 6.0 0.0 0.0

Predominant - 1st 2nd 3rd

Wind Direction Blowing From SW N W

Site-specific meteorological data shows that:

Average temperature recorded was 26.1°C, relative humidity was 47.9% & wind speed was 2.6 m/sec;

Wind blows predominantly from SW direction followed by N direction & W direction. Calm condition is ~30.97

%. Wind rose diagram is shown as Figure 3-4.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Figure 3-4: Wind rose Diagram for 05th January to 04th April, 2021

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


3.5.6 Collation of Site Specific Data with Secondary data of IMD

Site specific meteorological data is corelated with IMD’s secondary data as presented in Table 3-13.

Table 3-13: Collation of Primary Meteorological parameters

S. No.

Parameters

IMD (Long term 1981 – 2010);

(8.30 and 17.30 hours only)

Site Specific (24 hours)

Remarks

(January to March) (05th January to 04th April,

2021)

1. Wind Speed Average Wind Speed is 2.6 m/s Average Wind Speed is 2.6 m/s Generally similar, minor divergences

noted can be ascribed to location differences,

differences in number of readings and

duration of studies (one season v/s long

term)

2. Wind Direction

Wind blows predominantly from N direction.

Calm Conditions: 8.89%

Wind blows predominantly from SW direction

Calm Conditions: 30.97%

3. Temperature Max.: 32.4°C Min.: 14.5°C

Max.: 41.3°C

Min.: 9.5°C

4. Relative Humidity Max.: 68% Min.: 40%

Max.: 99.5 % Min.: 8.0 %

3.5.7 Atmospheric Inversion Level / Mixing Height

Determination of hourly average atmospheric inversion level/mixing height from site-specific meteorological data is

given in Table 3-14.

Average inversion level during study period remains approx. 212 m.

Table 3-14: Hourly average Atmospheric inversion level/Mixing Height

Time (Hour) Atmospheric level/Mixing height (m) Time (Hour) Atmospheric level/Mixing height (m)

1 113 13 161

2 90 14 226

3 81 15 232

4 57 16 302

5 52 17 376

6 53 18 387

7 62 19 427

8 65 20 481

9 69 21 516

10 104 22 547

11 122 23 161

12 104 24 119

Average 212

3.6 Ambient Air Quality & Air Pollution

The basic objective of ambient air quality (AAQ) determination around the proposed expansion project site was to

assess the existing ambient levels of primary air pollutants in the area.

The criteria for selecting monitoring stations on the basis of available meteorological data and other related factors

was to assess the general ambient air quality status of the area and to record the prevailing concentration of

pollutants for determining critical targets for worst maximum concentrations.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


3.6.1 Secondary Ambient Air Quality data collection and review

The ambient air quality monitoring was carried out by M/s. Vimta Labs Limited (NABET/EIA/1619/RA0043 valid upto

19th May 2019) in December 2018 Report of Proposed Greenfield Copper Refinery Project (1.0 MTPA) at Adani Port

Special Economic Zone Land in Villages Siracha and Navinal, Taluka Mundra, District Kutch, Gujarat by M/s. Adani

Enterprises Ltd. (AEL) .

The ambient air quality samples are collected as per the standard norms for ambient air quality monitoring. The

parameters determined during analysis include PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NO2, CO, O3, NH3, Benzo(a) Pyrene (BaP),

Benzene (C6H6) and Heavy Metals. Baseline study period consider was Post Monsoon season (October to December,

2016).

Table 3-15: Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Table 3-16: Summary of Ambient Air Quality Results (October-December, 2016)

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


3.6.2 Primary Data Collection & Review

Primary data for 3 months are already provided in below

Primary Data Collection & Review – Site Specific Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring was conducted at Eight (8) different locations within the study area. The frequency

of monitoring was 24 hours twice a week at each station spread over one month with gaseous sample being changed

two times (at 8 hour intervals)

M/S. ADANI WILMAR LTD, DHRAB EIA REPORT FOR PROPOSED EXPANSION OF SYNTHETIC ORGANIC CHEMICALS IN EXISTING FACILITY AT VILLAGE

DHRAB & MUNDRA, KUTCH DESCRIPTION OF

ENVIRONMENT


Parameters monitored & Methodology of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

The pollutants monitored are Particulate Matter (PM10, PM2.5), Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOX), Chlorine (Cl2), Hydrochloric Acid (HCl), Volatile Organic

Carbons (VOC), Hydrocarbons (HC-as Methane), Carbon Monoxide (CO) and NMHC. AAQM monitoring was finalised as per IS 5182 methods. The sampling methodology for

ambient air quality monitoring is as given in Table 3-17.

Table 3-17: Methodology for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

S.

No.

Env.

Component

Sampling

location

Total

Sampling

Period

Sampling Frequency

Sample Collection & Analysis

Method Parameters Field Instrument

Analytical

Instrument Sensitivity

Detection

Limit

1.

Ambient Air Quality

12

(Twelve)

Locations

Summer Season 2021

24 – hour sample collection twice a week

at each station

PM10 Respirable Dust Sampler (RDS)

APM-460

Electronic

balance ± 0.01 mg 10.0 µg/m3

IS: 5182: Part 23, 2006, with cyclone

2. PM2.5 Fine Particulate sampler AAS-

127

Electronic

balance ± 0.01 mg 2.0 µg/m3

CPCB Guideline volume -1

(Gravimetric method)

3. SO2 Impinger Module with control valve & Flow Meter (attached

to RDS) Spectro-photometer ± 0.001 nm 3.75 µg/m3

IS: 5182:

Part 2 (2001)

4. NOx Impinger Module with control valve & Flow Meter (attached

to RDS) Spectro-photometer ± 0.001 nm 6 µg/m3

IS: 5182:

Part 6 (2006)

5. HCl Impinger Module with control

valve & Flow Meter Spectro-photometer - 1.0 µg/m3

IS: 5182/ (Mercuric Nitrate Method)

6. Cl2 Impinger Module with control

valve & Flow Meter Spectro-photometer ± 0.001 nm 1.0 µg/m3

IS 5182 (Part 19) 1982 (RA 2014)

7. 24 –hour sample

collection once a week at each station

VOC (as BTX)

Charcoal tube attached with sampler

Gas Chromatograph - 1 µg/m3 IS 5182 (Part 11): 2006 (RA – 2017)

8. Grab sample collection once a week at each

station

HC as Methane

Tedler Bag/Bladder & Pump Gas Chromatograph - 0.327 mg/m3

IS 5182 (Part 17) : 1979 (RA 2003)

9. NMHC Tedler Bag/Bladder & Pump Gas Chromatograph - 0.025 ppm IS 5182 (Part 17) :

1979 (RA 2003)

10. 1 hour sample

collection once a week at each station

CO Tedler Bag/Bladder & Pump Gas Chromatograph - 0.57 mg/m3 IS 5182 (Part 10): 1999 (RA 2009)

M/S. ADANI WILMAR LTD, DHRAB EIA REPORT FOR PROPOSED EXPANSION OF SYNTHETIC ORGANIC CHEMICALS IN EXISTING FACILITY AT VILLAGE

DHRAB & MUNDRA, KUTCH DESCRIPTION OF

ENVIRONMENT


S.

No.

Env.

Component

Sampling

location

Total

Sampling

Period

Sampling Frequency

Sample Collection & Analysis

Method Parameters Field Instrument

Analytical

Instrument Sensitivity

Detection

Limit

11.


at each station

HBr Impinger Module with control valve & Flow Meter (attached

to RDS) Spectrophotometer - 3 µg/m3 Iodometric Method

12. NH3 Impinger Module with control valve & Flow Meter (attached

to RDS) Spectrophotometer - 10 µg/m3

Indo Phenol Blue method

13. HF Impinger Module with control valve & Flow Meter (attached

to RDS) Spectrophotometer - 1.0 µg/m3

IS 5182 (Part -13): 1991 (RA-2014)

14.


at each station

O3 Impinger Module with control valve & Flow Meter (attached

to RDS) Spectrophotometer - 1 µg/m3

IS: 5182 (Part 9), 1971 (RA 2009)

15. Pb Respirable Dust Sampler (RDS)

APM-460 AAS/ICPMS - 1.0 ng/m3

IS 5182 (Part-22): 2004 (RA- 2014)

16. As Respirable Dust Sampler (RDS)


APHA 23rd edition (3125-B) 2017

17. Ni Respirable Dust Sampler (RDS)

APM-460 AAS/ICPMS - 20 ng/m3

APHA 23rd edition (3125-B) 2017

18. Hg Respirable Dust Sampler (RDS)


APHA (3500 Hg) 25th Edition

19. Acid Mist (as

H2SO4 )

Impinger Module with control valve & Flow Meter (attached

to RDS) By Titration - 5 µg/m3 Titrimetric Method

20. Benzo

(a) Pyrene (BaP

Respirable Dust Sampler (RDS) APM-460

Gas Chromatograph - 1.0 ng/m3 Gas Chromatography

21. 24 –hour sample

collection once a week at each station-

Benzene Charcoal tube attached with

sampler Gas Chromatograph - 1.0 µg/m3

IS 5182 (Part-11): 2006 (RA- 2017)

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT



Selection of AAQ Monitoring Locations with Rationale

The locations for Ambient Air quality monitoring were decided based on the prescribed guidelines2. Eight (8) AAQM

stations were selected on the basis of local climate conditions mainly wind direction patterns which include base

station, upwind station, downwind station and crosswind station as per wind regime. These stations were located

within rural settlements as well as in consideration of other important features of the study area. Sampling location

map is presented in Map 3-2.

Details of AAQ monitoring locations are presented in Table 3-18.

Table 3-18: Ambient Air Quality Monitoring locations

AAQM

Station

Code

Sampling

Location

name

Latitude Longitude

Distance

from

project

site (Km)

Direction

from

project site

Justification for

selection of station

AAQ1 At Site

(Dhrab) 22°49'32.556"N 69°41'55.0392 "E - Base Station At Site

AAQ2 Dhrab Village

(GLC area) 22°48'17.8956"N 69°41'55.158"E 1.4 S

1st Downwind

& 2nd Upwind

AAQ3 Nana

Kapaya 22°50'43.3068"N 69°41'23.172"E 1.95 NNW Crosswind

AAQ4 Adani

Township 22°48'3.6972"N 69°42'49.3344"E 2.25 SE 2nd Downwind

AAQ5 Jarpara 22°49'49.2636"N 69°39'8.7336"E 4.7 W Lateral

AAQ6 Mangra 22°51'54.864"N 69°43'40.9764"E 4.9 NE 2nd Downwind

AAQ7 Pragpar 22°53'45.78"N 69°42'0.7524"E 7.4 N 1st Upwind &

2nd Downwind

AAQ8 Borana 22°51'28.0548"N 69°40'19.5168"E 4.1 NW Crosswind

Photographs of Ambient Air Quality Sampling are presented as below:

Photograph 3-4: Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

AAQ1: At site AAQ2: Dhrab Village (GLC Area) AAQ3: Nana Kapaya Village

2 As per Guidelines for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring by CPCB, MoEF Published as SERIES: NAAQMS/ …/2003-04, April, 2013

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


AAQ4: Adani Township AAQ5: Jarpara Village AAQ6: Mangra Village

AAQ7: Pragpar Village AAQ8: Borana village

The AAQM Location Map of sampling locations is presented in Map 3-2.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR LTD, DHRAB EIA REPORT FOR PROPOSED EXPANSION OF SYNTHETIC ORGANIC CHEMICALS IN EXISTING FACILITY AT VILLAGE DHRAB & MUNDRA, KUTCH DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT


Table 3-19: Average data of Ambient Air Monitoring analysis Results

Station Code

Sampling Location

Average Pollutant Concentration µg/m3, except CO in mg/m3 and As, Ba(P) & Ni in ng/m3

PM10 PM2.5 SO2 NOx Cl2 HCl HBr NH3 O₃ H2S HF Pb As Ni Ba(P) NMHC HC CO Benzene VOC

(24hr.) (24hr.) (24hr.) (24hr) (24hr) (24hr) (24hr) (24hr) (8hr) (24hr) (24hr) (24hr) (24hr) (24hr) (24hr) Grab Grab (1hr) (24hr) (8 Hr)

CPCB Norms

Industrial, Residential, Rural and Other Area

100 60 80 80 NS NS NS 400 180 NS NS 1 6 20 1 NS NS 4 5 NS

Ecologically Sensitive Area (Notified by Central Govt.)

100 60 80 80 NS NS NS 400 180 NS NS 1 6 20 1 NS NS 4 5 NS

(AA01) At Site

Maximum 99 48 10.1 19.0 2.7 0.9 <1 <10 6.7 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 1109 1.00 <1 <1

Minimum 57 12 6.2 14.1 0.2 0.0 <1 <10 4.1 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 851 0.60 <1 <1

Average 87 26 8.5 16.1 1.0 0.3 <1 <10 5.6 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 977 0.84 <1 <1

98%tile 99 46 10.1 18.9 2.5 0.8 <1 <10 6.7 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 1102 1.00 <1 <1

(AA02) Dhrab Village (GLC Area)

Maximum 99 37 10.4 20.8 2.7 0.7 <1 <10 6.9 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 1159 1.08 <1 <1

Minimum 52 10 7.2 14.2 0.4 0.0 <1 <10 4.8 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 898 0.60 <1 <1

Average 77 20 8.9 18.3 1.0 0.3 <1 <10 6.0 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 1023 0.80 <1 <1

98%tile 98 36 10.3 20.6 2.5 0.7 <1 <10 6.9 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 1154 1.06 <1 <1

(AA03) Nana Kapaya Village

Maximum 98 36 10.0 19.6 2.8 1.1 <1 <10 6.7 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 1011 0.99 <1 <1

Minimum 50 12 7.6 14.6 0.2 0.0 <1 <10 5.0 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 845 0.60 <1 <1

Average 74 19 9.0 16.9 1.0 0.5 <1 <10 6.0 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 936 0.78 <1 <1

98%tile 98 35 10.0 19.4 2.5 1.1 <1 <10 6.7 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 1010 0.98 <1 <1

(AA04) Adani Township

Maximum 99 34 10.5 17.6 4.7 0.8 <1 <10 7.0 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 1050 1.02 <1 <1

Minimum 45 12 6 13 0.4 0.0 <1 <10 3.9 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 821 0.60 <1 <1

Average 73 19 8.0 15.3 1.2 0.2 <1 <10 5.3 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 926 0.74 <1 <1

98%tile 98 31 10.1 17.5 3.8 0.7 <1 <10 6.7 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 1044 1.00 <1 <1

(AA05) Jarpara Village

Maximum 99 35 9.9 22.2 4.9 1.0 <1 <10 6.6 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 1096 1.12 <1 <1

Minimum 47 11 5.7 14.8 0.2 0.0 <1 <10 3.8 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 870 0.60 <1 <1

Average 76 20 8.2 17.9 1.3 0.4 <1 <10 5.4 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 941 0.83 <1 <1

98%tile 98 35 9.8 22.1 4.8 1.0 <1 <10 6.5 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 1081 1.11 <1 <1

(AA06) Mangra Village

Maximum 99 22 10.5 20.5 2.7 1.0 <1 <10 7.0 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 1158 1.04 <1 <1

Minimum 45 10 7.0 13.5 0.4 0.0 <1 <10 4.7 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 852 0.60 <1 <1

Average 73 16 9.0 18.2 1.2 0.4 <1 <10 6.0 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 982 0.79 <1 <1

98%tile 99 21 10.5 20.5 2.6 1.0 <1 <10 7.0 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 1152 1.03 <1 <1

(AA07) Pragpar Village

Maximum 92 30 9.9 21.1 3.0 0.9 <1 <10 6.6 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 1136 1.07 <1 <1

Minimum 37 9 6.8 14.2 0.2 0.0 <1 <10 4.5 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 850 0.60 <1 <1

Average 57 19 8.7 18.3 1.1 0.2 <1 <10 5.8 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 974 0.83 <1 <1

98%tile 86 29 9.8 21.1 2.9 0.8 <1 <10 6.5 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 1123 1.06 <1 <1

(AA08) Borana

Maximum 99 27 9.4 19.5 2.1 0.8 <1 <10 6.2 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 1082 1.25 <1 <1

Minimum 36 11 6.0 10.5 0.4 0.0 <1 <10 4.0 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 905 0.60 <1 <1

Average 63 18 7.8 14.1 0.9 0.4 <1 <10 5.2 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 981 0.89 <1 <1

98%tile 97 26 9.3 18.4 1.8 0.7 <1 <10 6.2 <1 <1 <1 <1 <20 <1 <10 1075 1.23 <1 <1

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


3.6.4 Observations on Ambient Air Quality

The comparison of the results with the value range indicators NAAQ standards 2009 provided by CPCB for

industrial, residential, rural & other area indicates that;

Average concentration of PM10 was recorded in range from minimum 57 µg/m3 to maximum 87 µg/m3;

Average concentration of PM2.5 was recorded in range from minimum 16 µg/m3 to maximum 26 µg/m3;

Average concentration of SO2 was recorded in range from minimum 7.8 µg/m3 to maximum 9.0 µg/m3,

Average concentration of NOX was recorded in range from minimum 14.1 µg/m3 to maximum 18.3 µg/m3;

Average concentration of Cl2 levels were recorded in range of 0.9 µg/m3 to 1.3 µg/m3 at various locations which

is within the specified limit of CPCB.

Average concentration of CO levels were recorded in range of 0.74 mg/m3 to 0.89 mg/m3 at various locations

which is within the specified limit of CPCB.

Average concentration of HCl levels were recorded in range of 0.2 µg/m3 to 0.5 µg/m3 at various locations


Average concentration of HC levels were recorded in range of 926 µg/m3 to 1023 µg/m3 at various locations


Average concentration of O3 levels were recorded in range of 5.2 µg/m3 to 6 µg/m3 at various locations which


At all the locations, average concentration of HBr, NH3, H2S, HF, Pb, As, Ni, Ba(P), NMHC, Benzene & VOC were

found below detection limit

It is observed that average results of all the parameters at all the locations were within the specified limits of CPCB.

3.7 Traffic Survey

Traffic survey is one of the important parameter to estimate possible increase in pollution level in the vicinity of

project area due to movement of vehicles. The vehicle movement may have impact on ambient air quality and it is

considered as line source. Vehicles are of two types, passenger and commercial/goods vehicles. Passenger vehicles

include Buses, Taxies & Jeeps; whereas commercial/goods vehicles take account of tankers, trucks and containers.

Traffic survey was carried out on important roads as well as site approach roads. Traffic survey has vital role in

finding existing traffic density on the roads near to the site. In comparison with existing traffic concentration, it is

easy to estimate not only incremental numbers of various means of transportation but also pollution levels due to

proposed project.


Manual methods use field personal to count and classify traffic flowing past a fixed point. Number of enumerators

needed to count the vehicle depends upon the number of lanes in highway on which count is to be taken, type and

accuracy of information desired. IRC recommends recording of data in each direction of travel separately and

posting of observers for each direction. It is desirable to have literate enumerators with qualification preferably

middle or matriculation accuracy and maintaining precision the work is done in shifts, with adequate time given to

each surveyor for rest as well as food and water.

The data is recorded mostly in five Dash system in which vertical Strokes are entered for the first 4 vehicles which

is followed by an Oblique stroke for the Fifth so as to represent a total of 5. Once an observer is familiar with this

system, he tends to follow this is momentarily evaluation simple, hassle free with minimum of errors.

3.7.2 Secondary Data Collection & Review

No secondary data was available.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


3.7.3 Parameters/ Vehicle classification

Vehicles were classified into two type i.e. mechanized and non-mechanized vehicles. The mechanized vehicles

include two wheelers (bikes/ mopeds/ scooters), three wheelers (rickshaw/ small 3W Tempos), and four wheelers

(cars/ jeeps/ trucks/ buses/ tractors etc.). The non-mechanized vehicles include cycle/tricycle/carts.

3.7.4 Road Identification for traffic survey

For the proposed project, traffic survey was carried out on Mundra (Zero point) -Adani Port road at selected

location near main gate of the plant. Traffic survey was carried out as per IRC guidelines, on both sides (up &

down) on selected roads i. e.

Mundra (Zero Point) (Up) as well as towards

Adani Port (Down) (7 m wide).

The location coordinate is 22°49'33.9456" N and 69°33'54.8124" E. The selected road is 7-meter-wide and is

having two lanes. These are the main roads connecting to project site. There will be movement of heavy vehicles

during construction phase as well as during operational phase for transportation of materials and finished goods.

3.7.5 Traffic Survey – Methodology

Traffic survey was carried out as per IRC guidelines, on both sides (up & down) on selected important roads.

Vehicles were classified into two types: Mechanized and Non-mechanized.

The Mechanized vehicles including two wheelers (bikes/Mopeds/Scooters), three wheelers (rickshaw/small 3W

tempos), four wheelers (Cars/Jeeps/Trucks/Buses/Tractors etc.).

The Non-mechanized vehicles including Cycle/Tricycle/Carts.

Vehicles count were recorded at every 15 min interval for 24 hours. Traffic Survey data sheets are presented in

Annexure 16.

Based on traffic count on road, the capacity of road to be find out by using equivalent factor for PCU for various

category vehicles. It is compared with IRC recommended PCU/day. All calculations are based on Guidelines for

Capacity of Roads in Rural Areas (First Revision) IRC: 64-1990.

Photographs of traffic survey study are as shown in Photograph 3-5.

Photograph 3-5: Traffic Survey

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Traffic flow towards Mundra (Zero Point) (Up) & towards Adani Port (Down) (7 m wide)

3.7.6 Traffic Survey – Existing traffic density (Vehicles count)

Existing traffic count/ density as vehicles over 24 hour duration for up & down traffic flow is presented in Table

3-20.

Table 3-20: Existing Traffic survey density over 24 hour duration (total vehicles count)

S. No. Particular Vehicle Count

1 Name of the Road Mundra (Zero point) to Adani Port

2 Traffic Flow from to From Mundra to Adani Port From Adani Port to Mundra

3 Mechanized Vehicles

a Motor cycle or scooters, etc. 639 813

b Passenger Car, Pick-up Van or Auto Rickshaw 244 246

c Agricultural Tractor, Light Commercial Vehicle 419 387

d Truck or Bus 983 579

e Truck-Trailer, Agricultural Tractor-Trailer 65 68

4 Non-mechanized Vehicles

a Cycle 113 106

b Cycle-rickshaw 44 0

c Hand Cart 0 0

d Horse-drawn vehicle 0 0

e Bullock Cart 0 0

Total 2507 2199

Source: Guidelines for Capacity of Roads IRC, Table 1: Recommended PCU (Passenger Car Unit) factor for various types

of vehicles in Rural Areas

Traffic survey study data on Mundra (Zero point) to Adani Port for traffic flow towards Mundra (Zero

Point) (up) & towards Adani Port (down)

Existing Traffic count as vehicles in PCU/day for up & down traffic flow are presented respectively in Table 3-21 &

Table 3-22.

Table 3-21: Existing traffic in PCU/day on Mundra (Zero point) to Adani Port for traffic flow to Mundra

(Zero Point) (up)

Sr.

No. Types of Vehicle

No. of

Vehicles

%

Composition

Equivalent

factor**

Calculated PCU*

(PCU/day)

Mechanized Vehicles

1 Motor Cycle or Scooter 639 25 0.50 320

2 Passenger Car, Pick-up Van or Auto Rickshaw 244 10 1.00 244

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Sr.


No. of

Vehicles

%

Composition

Equivalent

factor**

Calculated PCU*

(PCU/day)

3 Agricultural Tractor, Light Commercial Vehicle 419 17 1.50 629

4 Truck or Bus 983 39 3.00 2949

5 Truck-Trailer, Agricultural Tractor-Trailer 65 3 4.50 293

Non-Mechanized Vehicles

6 Cycle 113 5 0.50 57

7 Cycle-rickshaw 44 2 2.00 88

8 Hand Cart 0 0 3.00 0

9 Horse-drawn vehicle 0 0 4.00 0

10 Bullock Cart 0 0 8.00 0

Total 2507 100 100 4578

Source: *PCU: Passenger Car Unit, ** Equivalent Factor for PCU calculations are considered from Guidelines for

Capacity of Roads IRC, Table 1: Recommended PCU (Passenger Car Unit) factor for various types of vehicles in

Rural Areas.

Table 3-22: Existing traffic in PCU/day on Mundra (Zero point) to Adani Port for traffic flow towards Adani

Port (Down)

Sr.


No. of

Vehicles

%

Composition

Equivalent

factor**

Calculated PCU*

(PCU/day)

Mechanized Vehicles


2 Passenger Car, Pick-up Van or Auto Rickshaw 246 11 1.00 246

3 Agricultural Tractor, Light Commercial Vehicle 387 18 1.50 581

4 Truck or Bus 579 26 3.00 1737


Non-Mechanized Vehicles

6 Cycle 106 1 0.50 53


8 Hand Cart 0 0 3.00 0



Total 2199 100 - 3329

Source: *PCU: Passenger Car Unit, ** Equivalent Factor for PCU calculations are considered from Guidelines for

Capacity of Roads IRC, Table 1: Recommended PCU (Passenger Car Unit) factor for various types of vehicles in

Rural Areas.

Detail of incremental traffic due to the proposed project is presented in Chapter 4.

3.8 Noise


Methodology for monitoring ambient noise levels is presented in Table 3-23.

Table 3-23: Ambient Noise Level Monitoring Methodology

Env.

Component

Sampling

location

Sampling

Frequency Methodology

Sample collection Sampling

Parameter Sampling

equipment

Detection

Limit

Ambient Noise 8

Locations

Once during the study (Hourly

reading for 24 hours at each location)

IS 9989:1981 Sound Level Meter (SLM)

0.1 dB (A)

Noise level in Decibels –

dB (A)

The standard for monitoring ambient noise level as per CPCB guidelines is as presented in Table 3-24.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Table 3-24: Ambient Noise for Different Areas/Zones

Ambient NOISE Area

Code Category

Limits in dB(A) Leq*

Day Time Night Time

THE NOISE POLLUTION (REGULATION AND CONTROL) RULES,

2000

A Industrial 75.0 70.0

B Commercial 65.0 55.0

C Residential 55.0 45.0

D Silence 50.0 40.0

Note:

Day Time: 6:00 AM to 10:00 PM; Night Time: 10:00 PM to 6:00 AM

dB(A) Leq*: denotes the time weighted average of the level of sound in decibels on scale A which is relatable to human hearing.




Locations for noise monitoring were identified by desktop study and fixed the locations during field survey within 3

km maximum from the source of noise generation and at nearby receiver’s locations i.e. habitation area,

hospital/school, etc.

3.8.4 Key Findings

The average noise levels are presented in Table 3-25.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR LTD, DHRAB EIA REPORT FOR PROPOSED EXPANSION OF SYNTHETIC ORGANIC CHEMICALS IN EXISTING FACILITY AT VILLAGE DHRAB & MUNDRA, KUTCH

DESCRIPTION OF

ENVIRONMENT


Table 3-25: Noise Level distance, direction, lat. / long & Readings

Sr.

No. Location Date Category

Distance

w.r.t

site

(km)

Direction

(from site) Lat. Long

CPCB Limits in dB (A) Average Noise levels in

dB (A)

Day Time Night Time Day Time Night Time

NL01 Near Main Gate (At Site) 26/05/21 Industrial - - 22°49'33.9528"N 69°41'54.834"E 75.0 70.0 67.9 61.2

NL02 Near South Corner

Boundary of the Site 26/05/21 Industrial - - 22°49'19.5096"N 69°41'51.3708"E 75.0 70.0 65.6 61.2

NL03 Proposed Expansion

Site 24/05/21 Industrial - - 22°49'52.5288"N 69°41'55.9068"E 75.0 70.0 65.1 62.4

NL04 Near North Boundary of

the Site 24/05/21 Industrial - - 22°49'46.26"N 69°41'54.00"E 75.0 70.0 64.7 60.7

NL05 Sukhpar Habitation

(Mundra) 29/05/21 Residential 1.0 ENE 22°49'55.758"N 69°43'2.64"E 55.0 45.0 54.2 44.7

NL06 Jhulelal Park 1

Habitation (Mundra) 30/05/21 Residential 0.75 E 22°49'33.5856"N 69°43'18.498"E 55.0 45.0 54.1 44.2

NL07 Dhrab village 30/05/21 Residential 1.8 WNW 22°49'59.3868"N 69°40'51.0996"E 55.0 45.0 54.8 44.7

NL08 Adani Township Gate 30/05/21 Residential 2.4 SSE 22°47'43.9296"N 69°42'14.1588"E 55.0 45.0 54.9 44.1

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Observations

Noise level during day time & night time, in Industrial area were observed within the permissible limits for

Industrial area (75 dBA (d) & 70 dBA (n)).

Noise level during day and night time in Residential area were observed within the permissible limits for

residential area (55 dBA (d)) & 45 dBA (n)).

Photographs of Noise Monitoring are presented in Photograph 3-6.

Photograph 3-6: Noise Monitoring Photographs

NL01-Near Main Gate (At Site) NL02-Near South Corner Boundary of the Site

NL03-Proposed Expansion Site NL04-Near North Boundary of the Site

NL05-Sukhpar Habitation (Mundra) NL06-Jhulelal Park 1 Habitation (Mundra)

NL07-Dhrab village NL08-Adani Township Gate

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


3.9 Soil


A visit was conducted to study site-specific soil quality and condition includes soil color, texture mineralogical

content, plasticity and any possible impact to the environmental setting due to project.

Objectives

To know physical and chemical properties of soils;

To identify soil pollution and suggest mitigation measures;

To give monitoring plan for improving soil quality.

3.9.2 Secondary Data Collection

Soils of Kutch district are mildly alkaline to moderately alkaline, non-saline, low to medium in organic carbon status,

low to high in phosphorus and potassium status. The soils of Mundra Taluka showed the pH, EC, OC %, available P

and K status values as 7.10 – 7.90 (7.57), 0.10 – 0.96 dS/m (0.85 dS/m), 0.19 – 0.96 % (0.85 %), 13 – 387 kg/ha

(33.76 kg/ha) and 141 – 532 kg/ha (277.05 kg/ha).

Ref.: - Chaudhary, J. P., Sipai, A. H., P. P. Chaudhary and A.H. Chauhan (2018): Major nutrient status in soils of Kutch district of

Gujarat, International Journal of Agricultural Sciences, Vol. (14/1): 60-64 pp.

3.9.3 Primary Data Collection

Soil Sample Collection Methodology

The locations for soil sample collection were selected from the surrounding areas namely ST - 1 to ST - 8. The soil

samples from 0 - 15 cm depth were collected by using post-hole auger/core cutter. The samples were homogenized

and about 1 Kg soil sample was collected in the polyethylene bag, labelled with sample ID which includes site numbers

and project name. The samples were brought to the laboratory for analysis of physical (porosity, water holding

capacity, permeability, particle size distribution) and chemical properties (cation exchange, electrical conductivity,

sodium adsorption ratio, pH, Ca, Mg, Na, K). Organic carbon, available phosphorus and potassium.

Sampling Locations

Sampling location are presented in Table 3-26.

Table 3-26: Soil Sampling Locations

S. No. Sampling

Locations

Date of

Sampling Latitude Longitude

Distance from

Project site (Km)

Direction from

project site

ST-1 Borana Village 08.04.2021 22°50'4.941"N 69°41'25.15"E 1.0 NW

ST-2 Jarpara Village

08.04.2021 22°50'16.04"N 69°38'12.87"E 6.4 WNW

ST-3 Dhrab Village 08.04.2021 22°50'38.29"N 69°41'17.85"E 1.9 NW

ST-4 Sukhpar

Habitation (Mundra)

08.04.2021 22°49'55.83"N 69°42'58.66"E 0.97 NE

ST-5 Baroi Village 08.04.2021 22°50'42.84"N 69°44'17.47"E 3.6 NNE

ST-6 Mangra Village

08.04.2021 22°51'53.46"N 69°43'46.58"E 4.6 NE

ST-7 Mota Kapaya 08.04.2021 22°52'8.223"N 69°42'18.18"E 4.42 NNE

ST-8 Pratappar

Village 08.04.2021 22°52'18.55"N 69°37'48.74"E 8.4 NW

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Photograph 3-7: Soil Sampling in the Study Area

ST1-Borana Village ST2-Jarpara Village

ST3-Dhrab Village ST4-Sukhpar Habitation (Mundra)

ST5-Baroi Village ST6-Mangra Village

ST7-Mota Kapaya Village ST8-Pratappar Village

3.9.4 Methodology of Soil Sample Analysis

Methodology of soil sample monitoring is presented in Table 3-27.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Table 3-27: Methodology of Soil Sample Monitoring

Sampling Parameters Sample collection Analytical

Equipment Methodology Remarks

Porosity

Manual sample collection using hammer and

container tube for collecting

undisturbed top soil.

- IS: 2720 Part 7

Trial pit method for topsoil sample

collection; disturbed samples

Water holding capacity Keen Apparatus HMSO, UK

Permeability - IS: 2720 Part 17

Moisture content Electronic Balance IS: 2720 Part 2

Texture - IS: 2720 Part 4

Particle size Distribution Glass wares IS: 2720 Part 4

5% Leachate to be made and analysed

as per APHA, “Standard Methods”

All method numbers are as

per APHA “Standard

Methods” (21st edition, 2005)

Cation Exchange Capacity

Centrifuge IS: 2720 Part 24 (1976)

SAR F. Photometer (Na, K)

Titration ( Ca & Mg) Calculation

pH pH Meter 4500 H+B

Electrical Conductivity Conductivity Meter As per IS 14767 -2000

Calcium Glass wares 3500 Ca B

Magnesium Glass Wares 3500 Mg B

Sodium (Na) F.Photometer 3500 Na B

Potassium F.Photometer 3500 K B

Nitrogen Glass wares IS 14684 (RA 2014)

Phosphorus Glass wares 0.5M NaHCO3 pH-

8.5; Olsen et al (1952) from Jackson (1973)

Potassium Glass wares Neutral Normal NH4AC;

Jackson (1973)

Micronutrients & heavy metals

AAS DTPA-Extractable; Lindsay and Norvell

(1978)

3.9.5 Soil Analysis Results

Soil Analysis Results are presented in Table 3-28.

Table 3-28: Soil Analysis Results

Sr. No Parameter Unit S1 -

Borana

S2 -

Jarapra

S3 – Nr.

Dhrab

S4 - Nr.

Sukhpar

(Mundra)

S5 - Nr.

Baroi

S6 –

Mangra

S7 - Nr.

Mota

Kapaya

S8 -

Pratappar

1 Porosity % 43 37 36 39 46 38 40 42

2 Water Holding

Capacity % 33.97 31.18 30.62 31.94 42.90 31.98 31.66 34.98

3 Permeability mm/hr 28.91 36.36 37.80 35.10 27.32 33.88 31.68 30.71

4 Particle Size Distribution

a Sand % 83 90 93 90 77 90 88 86

B Silt % 10 6 3 3 19 6 6 7

c Clay % 7 4 4 7 4 4 6 7

5 Texture - Loamy Sand

Sand Sand Sand Loamy Sand

Sand Loamy Sand

Loamy Sand

6 Cation

Exchange Capacity

meq/100gm 18.37 16.33 15.28 17.94 15.45 15.66 15.99 17.74

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Sr. No Parameter Unit S1 -

Borana

S2 -

Jarapra

S3 – Nr.

Dhrab

S4 - Nr.

Sukhpar

(Mundra)

S5 - Nr.

Baroi

S6 –

Mangra

S7 - Nr.

Mota

Kapaya

S8 -

Pratappar

7 Electrical

Conductivity dS/m 0.132 0.130 0.134 0.113 0.771 0.261 0.119 0.395

8 Exchangeable

Sodium % 2.16 2.19 2.34 2.17 2.40 2.22 2.19 2.33

9 pH 8.28 8.55 8.50 8.38 8.66 8.75 8.48 8.74

10 Calcium meq/100gm 1.68 1.44 1.68 1.28 1.12 1.44 1.12 1.60

11 Magnesium meq/100gm 15.71 13.93 12.07 15.71 12.04 13.12 13.85 14.58

12 Sodium meq/100gm 0.83 0.91 1.42 0.85 1.63 1.01 0.90 1.47

13 Potassium meq/100gm 0.15 0.04 0.11 0.10 0.06 0.08 0.11 0.09

14 Organic carbon % 0.56 0.66 0.46 0.48 0.54 0.65 0.51 0.45

15 Total nitrogen % 0.048 0.057 0.040 0.041 0.046 0.056 0.044 0.039

16 Available

phosphorus kg/ha 35.6 49.5 26.8 28.7 32.5 45.6 35.4 29.4

17 Available potassium

kg/ha 336.0 89.6 246.4 224.0 134.4 179.2 246.4 201.6

Soil Quality

Porosity ranged from 36 - 46%,

WHC varied from 30.62 – 42.90%,

permeability ranged from 27.32 – 37.80 mm/hr.

WHC and porosity is on account of sandy to loamy sand texture of soils and permeability was moderate due

alkaline pH of soils.

The CEC ranged from 15.28 – 18.37 meq/100 g soil, which is a moderate looking to the texture of soils.

The EC (0.113 – 0.771 dS/m) was normal (<0.80 dS/m) and ESP (2.16 to 2.40) was well within the safe limit

of <15.0.

The pH ranged from 8.28 – 8.75, indicating that soils are alkaline (pH 7.81 to <8.5) to sodic (pH >8.5).

Among water soluble cations predominance of Mg (12.04 - 15.71 meq/100 g) was seen followed by Ca (1.12 –

1.68 meq/100 g), Na (0.83 – 1.63 meq/100 g) and K (0.04 - 0.18 meq/100 g).

Fertility status of soil reveal that organic carbon was low (<0.50 % OC) to medium (0.50 – 0.75 % OC), the

available P was low (<28 kg/ha) to medium (28 – 56 kg/ha), while potassium was low (<140 kg/ha) to high

(>280 kg/ha).

Interpretation

Soils in the area are alkaline in nature. Although it is unlikely to have adverse impact on plant structure; however

still it need to be ensured that foundations to be designed considering the soil quality.

3.10 Surface Water

Surface Water Quality monitoring is carried out in the study area of 10 km based on the land use pattern and

ground truth of nearby villages. The selection of sampling locations is based on:

Surface water drainage pattern / prevalent direction of general gradient of surface water flow

Nearby vicinity of surface water bodies upstream and downstream of the site.

Selection of upstream and downstream open surface water bodies in immediate vicinity are the principal areas

where there would be an immediate impact due to any contaminated water drainage out of site premises.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


3.10.1 Methodology

Kadam Environmental Consultants has collected the surface water samples and carried out their analysis in KEC

laboratory to assess quality of Surface water within 10 km radius of the project site.

The objectives of work are as mentioned below:

Marking of tentative sampling location on Land Use map within 10 km radius of the project site.

Actual Field visit and identification, marking of actual sampling location points based on tentative location fixed

on Land Use map.

Collection of surface water samples from marked points

Analysis of the collected samples

Locating actual sampling points in land use map

Baseline Environmental conditions assessment based on analysis results obtained.




Sampling Locations

Surface water sampling locations are selected based on review of land use plan, surface drainage pattern/ground

water flow direction & nearby site habitation village /locations in 10 km radius of project.

The details of surface water sampling locations are presented in Table 3-29.

Table 3-29: Surface Water Sampling Locations

Sample

Code Location

Sampling

Date Latitude Longitude

Source

of Water

Distance

from

Project

site (Km)

Direction

from

project

site

SW 01 Bhukhi River

(Near Mundra) 12.04.2021 22°50'16.0008"N 69°42'40.9644"E River 1.78 NNE

SW 02 Phot River

(Near Dhrab) 13.04.2021 22°50'19.3632"N 69°40'43.9284"E River 2.58 NNW

SW 03 Phot River

(Upstream Side) 13.04.2021 22°48'52.8984"N 69°42'16.0092"E River 1.38 SW

SW 04 Phot River

(Downstream Side)

13.04.2021 22°48'55.4076"N 69°41'41.5716"E River 1.26 SE

SW 05 Pond Near Project

Site 12.04.2021 22°48'41.9652"N 69°41'19.2012"E Pond 1.75 SW

SW 06 Nana Kapaya (Village Pond)

12.04.2021 22°50'27.798"N 69°41'35.286"E Pond 1.80 NNW

SW 07 Baroi

(Village Pond) 11.04.2021 22°50'6.60"N 69°44'31.79"E Pond 4.50 ENE

SW 08 Marine sample

(Downstream side of the project)

12.04.2021 22°45'8.03"N 69°44'55.63"E Marine 9.45 SE

Photographs of surface water sampling locations are presented as Photograph 3-8.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Photograph 3-8: Photographs of the surface water sampling location

SW 01: Bhukhi River (Near Mundra) SW 02: Phot River (Near Dhrab)

SW 03: Phot River (Upstream Side) SW 04: Phot River (Downstream Side)

SW 05: Pond Near Project Site SW 06: Nanakapaya (Village Pond)

SW 07: Baroi village Pond SW 08: Marine Sample (Downstream side of the project)

Analysis Method Adopted

Surface water samples are collected using manual grab sampling technique.

The samples were further analysed as per the APHA Standard Methods (23rd Edition). below describes analytical

methodology for parameters to be analyzed and with minimum detection limit of the instruments available at KEC

laboratory.

Table 3-30: Analysis Methods Adopted for Surface Water Sample

S. No Parameters Methodology Minimum Detection

Limit

1 pH APHA: 4500-H+ B(23rd Edition), Electrometric method 1

2 Temperature APHA: 2550 B (23rd Edition), Standard Thermometer 0.5 Deg C

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


S. No Parameters Methodology Minimum Detection

Limit

3 Turbidity APHA: 2130 B (23rd Edition), Nephelometric Method 0.1 NTU

4 TDS APHA: 2540C (23rd Edition), Gravimetric 3 mg/l

5 Electrical conductivity APHA: 2510 B (23rd Edition), Conductivity meter 1µmoh/cm

6 COD APHA: 5220 B(23rd Edition), Open reflux method 5 mg/l

7 BOD IS: 3025 (part-44):1993 (RA 2014) Iodometric 2 mg/l

8 Chlorides APHA:4500-Cl- B (23rd Edition), Argentometric method 1.0 mg/l

9 Phenolic Compounds APHA: 5530-D (23rd Edition), Direct photometric Method 0.001 mg/l

10 Sulphates APHA:4500-E as SO4 2-(23rd Edition), Turbidimetric method 1 mg/l

11 Total Hardness APHA: 2340-C (23rd Edition), EDTA Titrimetric method 2 mg/l

12 Ca++ Hardness APHA: 3500-Ca-B (23rd Edition) EDTA Titrimetric method 2 mg/l

13 Mg++ Hardness APHA: 3500-Mg-B (23rd Edition), By calculation 2 mg/l

14 Total Alkalinity APHA: 2320 B (23rd Edition), Titration method 5 mg/l

15 Nitrate IS:3025 (part-34)1988 (RA 2014), 3.3 colorimetric method 0.2 mg/l

16 Nitrite IS:3025 (part-34)1988 (RA 2014) 0.05 mg/l

17 Fluoride APHA:4500 F-D(23rd Edition),SPANDS method 0.05 mg/l

18 Sodium APHA:3500 Na-B (23rd Edition), Flame emission Photometric

method 1 mg/l

19 Potassium APHA: 3500 K-B (23rd Edition) Flame emission Photometric

method 1 mg/l

20 Calcium APHA: 3500-Ca-B (23rd Edition) EDTA Titrimetric method 2 mg/l

21 Magnesium APHA: 3500-Mg-B (23rd Edition), Calculation method 2 mg/l

22 Salinity APHA: 2520 B (23rd Edition), Electrical Conductivity method -

23 Total Nitrogen APHA: 4500 N Org-B, (23rd Edition), Macro Kjeldahl method 0.2 mg/l

24 Total Phosphorous APHA: 4500 P-C (23rd Edition), Colorimetric method 1 mg/l

25 Dissolved Oxygen APHA: 4500 O-C(23rd Edition), Iodometric method 0.2 mg/l

26 Ammonical Nitrogen IS:3025(part-34), 1988 (RA 2014), Distillation & colorimetric 0.1 mg/l

28 SAR Flamephotmetric& EDTA method -

29 Heavy Metals - -

a Arsenic (as As) APHA: 3500-As-B (23rd Edition) Silver diethyldithiocarbamate

method/APHA: 3114-B (23rd Edition) AAS 0.002 mg/l

b Cadmium (as Cd) APHA: 3111-B(23rd Edition) AAS 0.003 mg/l

c Chromium (as Cr) APHA: 3500-Cr-B(23rd Edition), colorimetric method 0.02 mg/l

d Copper (as Cu) APHA: 3500-Cu-B (23rd Edition) Neocuproine method/ APHA:

3111- B (23rd Edition) AAS 0.03 mg/l

e Cyanide (as CN) APHA: 4500 CN- D & E(23rd Edition) 0.05 mg/l

f Iron (as Fe) APHA: 3500-Fe-B (23rd Edition), Phenanthroline

method/APHA: 3111-B(23rd Edition) AAS 0.05 mg/l

g Lead (as Pb) APHA: 3111-B(23rd Edition) AAS 0.01 mg/l

h Mercury (as Hg) IS 3025 (P-48): 1994 (RA 2014))/ APHA: 3112-B (23rd Edition)

AAS 0.001 mg/l

i Manganese (as Mn) APHA: 3500-Mn-B (23rd Edition) Persulphate method/ APHA:

3111-B(23rd Edition) AAS 0.02 mg/l

j Nickel (as Ni) APHA: 3111-B(23rd Edition) AAS 0.02 mg/l

k Zinc (as Zn) APHA: 3111-B(23rd Edition) AAS 0.03 mg/

l Boron (as B) APHA: 4500 B-C (23rd Edition), Carmine method 0.1 mg/l

30 Total Coliform APHA: 9221-B (23rd Edition), Multiple Tube Fermentation -

31 Fecal Coliform APHA: 9221-E (23rd Edition), Multiple Tube Fermentation -

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


3.10.4 Quality of Surface Water

Analytical results of the surface water /Pond /River water samples are presented in Table 3-31 & results of the

marine water samples are presented in Table 3-32.



Table 3-31: Analysis Result of Surface Water Samples

Sr.

No. Parameters Unit

Classification for Inland Surface Water (CPCB)

SW01

Bhukhi River (Nr.

Mundra)

SW02

Phot River (Nr

Dhrab)

SW03

Phot River

(Upstream Side)

SW04

Phot River

(Downstream side)

SW05

Pond near

project site

SW06

Nanakapaya

village pond

SW07

Baroi

Village pond

A B C D E River River River River Pond Pond Pond

1 pH - 6.5 to 8.5 6.5 to 8.5 6.0 to 9.0 6.5 to 8.5 6.5 to 8.5 7.02 6.79 8.44 7.04 7.70 8.40 8.4

2 D.O. mg/l 6..0 5.0 4.0 4.0 NA 5.1 4.6 4.4 4.5 5.2 5.3 5.4

3 Total Dissolved Solids mg/l 500.0 NA 1500.0 NA 2100 2992 2520 3132 2764 1980 1680 1312

4 Electrical Conductivity μmohs/cm NA NA NA 1000 2250 4830 4160 5230 4630 3320 2740 2150

5 BOD mg/l 2.0 3.0 3.0 NA NA 24 20 16 28 8 29 14

6 Color Pt.co 10 300 300 - - 25 25 10 10 10 30 10

7 Total Hardness mg/l 300 NA NA NA NA 590 440 390 500 360 190 360

8 Ca++ Hardness mg/l 200 NA NA NA NA 152 128 40 146 118 78 116

9 Mg++ Hardness mg/l 100 NA NA NA NA 438 312 350 354 242 112 244

10 Chlorides(as CL) mg/l 250 NA 600 NA 600 1339 1122 1295 1077 774 764 561

11 Sulphate mg/l 400 NA 400 NA 1000 157 186 397 229 280 123 57

12 Nitrate (as NO3) mg/l 20 NA 50 NA NA <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

13 Fluoride mg/l 1.5 1.5 1.5 - - 0.13 <0.05 0.44 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05

14 Phenolic Compound mg/l 0.002 0.005 0.005 NA NA <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

15 Ammonical Nitrogen mg/l NA NA NA 1.2 NA 2.39 1.74 <0.05 1.71 <0.05 4.55 1.34

16 Sodium Absorption Ratio NA NA NA NA 26 12.09 10.58 13.28 9.51 8.48 10.53 5.74

17 Copper mg/l 1.5 NA 1.5 NA NA <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03

18 Iron mg/l 0.3 NA 50 NA NA <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05

19 Manganese mg/l 0.5 NA NA NA NA <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02

20 Mercury mg/l 0.001 NA NA NA NA <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

21 Cadmium mg/l 0.01 NA 0.01 NA NA <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003

22 Arsenic mg/l 0.05 NA 0.2 NA NA <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

23 Cyanide mg/l 0.05 0.05 0.05 NA NA <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03

24 Lead mg/l 0.1 NA 0.1 NA NA <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

25 Zinc mg/l 15 NA 15 NA NA <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03

26 Chromium mg/l 0.05 1 0.05 NA NA <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02

27 Boron mg/l NA NA NA NA 2 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05

28 Total Coliform MPN/100ml 50 500 5000 - - N.D

(<1.8)

N.D

(<1.8)

N.D

(<1.8)

N.D

(<1.8)

N.D

(<1.8)

N.D

(<1.8)

N.D

(<1.8)

NS: Not Specified

Classification of River Waters as per their intended use is described in below table:

Sr. No. Class Intended Use

1 A Drinking water source without conventional treatment but after disinfection

2 B Outdoor bathing (organized)

3 C Drinking water source with conventional treatment followed by disinfection

4 D Propagation of wild life, fisheries

5 E Irrigation, industrial cooling etc.



Table 3-32: Analysis Results of Marine Water Samples

S.

No. Parameters Unit

Classification for Costal Water Marine (CPCB)

Sampling Locations

SW8

Marine Sample (Downstream side of

the project) SW-I SW-II SW-III SW-IV SW-V

1 pH - 6.5 to 8.5 6.5 to 8.5 6.5 to 8.5 6.0 to 9.0 6.0 to 9.0 7.88

2 Total Dissolved Oxygen mg/l 5.0 4.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0

3 Color and Odour - No Color No Odour

No Color No Odour

No Color No Odour

No Color No Odour

No Color No Odour

No Color No Odour

4 Floating Matters mg/l None None None 10 - None

5 Suspended Solids mg/l None from Sewage or Industrial

waste Origin - - - - 12

6 Turbidity NTU - 30 30 - - N.D

7 BOD mg/l - 3 - 5 - 4

8 Oil and Grease

(including Petroleum Products) mg/l 0.1 - - - - <1

9 Mercury (as Hg) mg/l 0.001 - - - - N.D

10 Lead (as Pb) mg/l 0.001 0 - - - N.D

11 Cadmium (as Cd) mg/l 0.01 - - - - 0.20

12 Dissolved Iron (as Fe) mg/l - - 0.5 - - 0.15

13 Dissolved Manganese ( as Mn) mg/l - - 0.5 - - 0.09

14 Faecal Coliform ml (MPN) - 100/100 500/100 500/100 500/100 N.D (<1.8)

15 Sludge Deposits, Solid refuse floating Solids, Oil Grease and

Scum - - - - -

None except for treated Sewage and Industrial waste Effluent

None

Classification of Coastal/Marine Waters for Designated Best Uses

Class Designated Best Use

SW-I Salt

SW-II Bathing, Contact Water Sports and Commercial Fishing

SW-III Industrial Cooling, Recreation (Non-contact) and Aesthetics

SW-IV Harbor

SW-V Navigation and Controlled Waste Disposal

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Observations of Surface Water Quality

All samples were analysed for parameters as per IS 2296-1982 with respect to Inland Classification with respect to

use of water in five classes A, B, C, D and E as per CPCB guidelines. The following inferences can be made based

on the baseline quality monitoring of surface water:

All samples of surface water collected from river (SW01 to SW04) & the samples collected from Pond (SW05 to

SW07) fall under Class E - “Can be used in Irrigation, industrial Cooling Purpose” due to higher levels of BOD

and Electrical Conductivity. It is observed that the said river / ponds dry out during summers and have waters

during winters and monsoons. During these times the pond / river waters are utilized for washing of clothes,

animal washing etc.

TDS values for SW01 to SW04 (River Water) are higher than limits prescribed for Class “E” due to saline water

intrusion and sodic soils observed in the area.

Observations of Marine Water Sample

The Quality of marine water is compares with class SW-III as per causal marine water standards. Treatment is

essential before use of marine water in industrial cooling, Recreation (Non-Contact) and Aesthetics or any other

purposes.

3.11 Ecology & Biodiversity

3.11.1 Scope, Aim & Objective

To inventories floral and faunal components of project area (project site / core zone and buffer zone).

To locate / demarcate and understand ecological setting of the project area in terms of national parks / wildlife

sanctuary / reserve forests / tiger reserve / Eco-sensitive Areas / wetlands etc. within 10 km. radius from

project site (if any).

To identify Schedule-I, rare, endemic and endangered species within the project study area and prepare

conservation plan for same.

To identify impact zone and evaluate the likely impact of the proposed project on flora, fauna and ecological

setting of the project study area.

To prepare green belt development plan / conservation plan to mitigate likely impacts and to conserve ecology

and biodiversity.

3.11.2 Study Area

Delineation of the Study Area

Project Site / Core Zone & Buffer Zone

Project site as a core zone and surrounding 10 km. radius considered as a buffer zone for study.

Ecological Sensitivity / Habitats of the study Area

Buffer zone encompasses following different ecologically important features within 10 km radius from proposed

project site boundary.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Table 3-33: Ecological Sensitive Areas within 10 km of the Project Site

S. No. Sensitive Ecological Features

Name of

feature /

Location

Distance

(km) Direction

Reason of

Significance

1 Ramsar wetland (Ramsar Convention) NA - - -

2 Wetlands as per National Wetlands

Atlas NA - - -

3 National park NA - - -

4 Wildlife sanctuary NA - - -

5 Tiger reserve NA - - -

6 Biosphere reserve NA - - -

7 Elephant reserve NA - - -

8 Important Bird Areas (IBAs)

Mangroves reserve forest attract aquatic

bird

3.70 SSW -

9 Eco-sensitive zone (EP Act) NA - - -

10 Forest (Forest Conservation Act) (including protected forests and

reserved forests)

Mundra Dhoa RF 9.05 SWW

Borana RF 3.68 NWW -

Dhrab RF 2.45 NW -

Mangroves RF 3.70 SSW

Borai RF 2.80 E

11 Wildlife corridor NA - - -

12

Areas used by protected, important or sensitive species of flora or fauna for breeding, nesting, foraging, resting,

over wintering, migration

Mundra Mangrove

Reserve Forest 3.70 SSW -

Phot (Suraai) River

0.3 SW -

Nagavanti River 6.0 W -

13 Endemic species, if any NA - - -

14 Mangroves Mundra

Mangrove Reserve Forest

3.70

4.21

SSW

SE

Sparse mangrove species which dominated by

Avicennia marina

Source: Working Plan of Kutchh, Local Enquiry and Field Investigation

Forests / National Parks / Sanctuary

There is no National Park or Wildlife Sanctuary etc. falls within buffer zone. Reserve forest areas are present the

study area.

Mangroves

Mangroves are described as a dense, thicker or woody, aquatic vegetation or forest cover occurring in tidal waters

near estuaries and along the confluence of delta in coastal areas. Mangroves include species of the genera

Rhizophora and Aviccunia.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


3.11.3 Methodology

Secondary Literature Review

Random sampling plot survey for floral inventory

Faunal habitat assessment

Random intensive survey, opportunistic observations

Diurnal bird observations and bird count

Active search for reptiles

Active search for scats and foot prints

Review of previous studies

Emphasis has been placed on presence of rare, endemic, migratory and threatened species

Efforts have been made to verify same in the field and interaction with local people.

Working plan of Kutch District was referred and Desktop literature review was conducted to identify the

representative spectrum of threatened species, population and ecological communities as listed by IUCN, ZSI and

BSI and in Indian Wildlife Protection act, 1972. The status of individual species was assessed using the revised

IUCN/ SSC category system (14th September 2012).

3.11.4 Survey Methodology to Study Terrestrial Plant Diversity

The structure and composition of vegetation was studied by quadrate method in the forest area and random

observations in the village surrounding areas. Phytosociological association of vegetation in a community was

studied. The quadrate method includes laying down of a square sample plot of suitable size for detailed analysis of

vegetation. It may be a single sample plot or may be divided into several subplots. While studying forest

community, quadrates equivalent to one tenth ha (10m x 10m) were used, for studying shrubs, the quadrates of

smaller sizes (5m x 5m) were used and for grassland and low herbaceous community, the quadrates of sizes (1m x

1m) were used. (Rau and Wooten, Environmental Impact Analysis Handbook, 1980, pp 7-44).

Co-existence and competition amongst various species were affected directly by the number of individuals in the

community. Therefore, knowing the quantitative structure of the community becomes essential. Various diversity

indices including Shannon-Wiener Diversity Index give a comparative and quantitative picture of the community

existing in the study area.

To characterize vegetation in the study area, the primary data was collected and analyzed for describing the

properties of vegetation with reference to species composition and structural attributes expressed. The diversity

measurements reflect as to how many diverse species are present, the density measurements indicate number of

individuals of a species in a sample plot. Species diversity is the best measures of community structure and it is

sensitive to various environmental stresses. Higher value of Shannon Wiener Diversity Index indicates healthy

ecosystem and the lower value shows that an ecosystem is under environmental stress.

Quantitative Analysis of Terrestrial Vegetation

It is done by using quadrate method presented in Table 3-34.

Table 3-34: Formulas for analysing phytosociological characteristics of vegetation

Density

Number of individual species A

= -------------------------------------------

Area Sampled

Relative Density

Density of species A

= ------------------------------------- x 100

Total density of all species

Frequency

Number of plots in which species A occurs

= -----------------------------------------------------

Total number of plots sampled

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Relative Frequency

Frequency value for species A

= -------------------------------------------- x 100

Total frequency values of all species

Abundance

Number of individual species A

= -------------------------------------------

Total No of plot sampled

Description of Site & Study Area

As per the primary field survey following were the highlights of the project site & the study area:

The buffer zone area is dominated by habitation and plantation which is dominated by Prosopis sp., and grass

species.

Since entire study area including project site well connected with road networks area and natural vegetation

exists at site.

The buffer zone is mainly dominated with having trees like Acacia sp., Prosopis juliflora, salvadora SP.,

Calotropis sp., Azadirachta indica, Ficus religiosa, other grasse species etc. Many of the Azadirachta indica trees

seem to have been planted by local villagers.

The vegetation mainly consists of trees, shrubs, climbers, thorny species etc. The dominant floral species are of

Phoenix sylvestris, Prosopis juliflora, Acacia Senegal, and Acacia nilotica. The shrub community is dominated by

the species of Prosopis juliflora.

The region between Mundra and Mandvi on the northern coast of the Gulf of Kutch is interacted with numerous

creeks and islets. Some are made up of sand and sand dune vegetation.

Floral Diversity of Study Area

Core Zone / Project Site

The project site is located at Village: Dhrab & Survey No. 141/P-47, Village: Mundra, Taluka: Mundra, District:

Kutch, Gujarat. The general topography of the area is already developed residential habitat. The climate of the area

is generally much humid due to closeness of the coastline and corrosive throughout the year and also the visibility

of the area is also good. The proposed project is expansion project; for which one land parcel is added.

The vegetation clearing will be restricted only to a few scrubs and trees in the premises and greenbelt plan is also

present at site and which will be managed well and additional greenbelt plan is also suggested. Greenbelt area will

be developed at the facility inside plant area. Outside of the road side plantation also were observed.

Photograph 3-9: Existing greenbelt at site

Greenbelt near premises Greebelt nearby entrance

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Greenbelt in the premises Greenbelt in the entrance

Buffer Zone

Buffer zone has been reported as general vegetation cover of the project stretch is dense vegetation dominated by

prosopis juliflora and calotropis sp. The dominant plant species were Prosopis juliflora, with very few individual of

Acacia nilotica, Azadirachta indica in the study area. Calotropis are observed growing along road sides.

The banks of the creeks and mud flats are vegetated by mangroves. Herbal species were observed rarely. Other

plant species observed and documented in the study area were Acacia auriculiformis, Acacia nilotica, Phoenix

sylvestris, Eucalyptus species, casuarina, Zizyphus nummularia etc.

Trees / Shrubs

The dominant trees growing in this area are Prosopis juliflora, Calotropis sp. casuarina, Eucalyptus species, Acacia

auriculiformis, and Acacia nilotica.

The list of floral species documented in the study area are enlisted below. In entire area 33 species of trees, 20

species of shrubs.

Table 3-35: Trees in the study area

Sr. No. Scientific Name Local Name Status

Trees

1 Acacia auriculiformis Bengali Baval C

2 Acacia catechu Khair C

3 Acacia leucophloea Aniyar, Rijiado C

4 Acacia nilotica Desi Baval C

5 Acacia senegal Gorad C

6 Acacia tortalis Israil baval C

7 Aegle marmelos Bili C

8 Ailanthas excelsa Ardusa C

9 Albizzia lebbeck Siris C

10 Anona squamosa Sitafal C

11 Anthocephalus kadamba Kadam C

12 Azadirachta indica Limdo C

13 Carica papaya Papaya C

14 Cassia fistula Garmalo C

15 Cocus nucifera Narial C

16 Delonix regia Gulmohar C

17 Emblica officinalis Amla C

18 Eucalyptus longifolia Nilgiri C

19 Ficus bengalensis Vad C

20 Ficus glomerata Umero C

21 Ficus religiosa Pipdo C

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT



22 Ficus resimosa Umberdo C

23 Mangifera indica Ambo Cu

24 Maytenus emarginata Vigo C

25 Moringa oleifera Saragvo Cu

26 Murraya koenigii Mitha Neem C

27 Phoenix sylvestris Khajuri C

28 Pithecellobium dulce Mithi Amti (Goras –Amli) C

29 Prosopis juliflora Gando Baval C

30 Tamarindus indica Amli C

31 Terminalia catappa Badam C

32 Zizyphus mauritiana Bor C

33 Casuarina equisetifolia Saru

Shrubs

1 Abutilon fruticosum Khapato

2 Abutilon indicum Khapato C

3 Avicennia marina Grey Mangroov C

4 Bongainvillea spectabilis Boganvel C

5 Calortopis gigantean Akdo C

6 Capparis decidua Kar jo zad C

7 Capparis grandis Thikari C

8 Cassia angustifolia Son Makai C

9 Cassia auriculata Aval C

10 Cirtus lemon Limbu C

11 Euphorbia caducifolia Thar C

12 Grewia villosa Luo C

13 Indigofera obligifolia Zeel C

14 Jatropha curcas Ratanjot C

15 Lantana camara Lantana C

16 Prosopis juliflora Gando baval C

17 Ricinus communis Divelo (Erandi) C

18 Salvadora persica Khari zar C

19 Sesbania sesban Ekad C

20 Zizyphus nummularia Ber C

21 Avicennia marina Cher C

Herbs

The herbaceous cover reported in this region is presented in the Table 3-36. 18 Herbs species are recorded from

the study area.

Table 3-36: List of herbaceous species


Herbs

1 Achyranthes aspera Anghedi C

2 Aerva lanata Gorakh ganjo C

3 Aerva persica Bour C

4 Argemone mexicana Darudi C

5 Blainvillea acmella Tal bhangra

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Murraya_koenigii

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT



6 Blumea lacera Piro fulavo C

7 Boerhavia diffusa Satodi C

8 Cardiospermum halicacabum Popti C

9 Cassia italica Mindhiavar C

10 Cressa cretica Bukan C

11 Catharanthus roseus Barmasi C

12 Cleome viscose Beddhro C

13 Colocasia esculenta Pattarveliya C

14 Convolvulus arvensis Neri val C

15 Corchorus depressus Mundheri C

16 Leucas aspera Kobi C

17 Tribulus terrestris Gokharu C

18 Tridax procumbens Ghamra C

Climbers / Grasses

The grasses and climbers observed along the agricultural hedges and road side hedges of the study area are

presented below. 5 species of climbers and 4 species of grass are recorded in the study area.

Table 3-37: List of Bamboo, Grasses and Climbers


Climbers

1 Coccinia grandis Ghiloda C

2 Ctenolepis cerasiformis Dad vel C

3 Cucumis callosus Kotimbiyal C

4 Dalechampia scandens Char vel C

5 Tinospora cordifolia Gulvel C

Grasses

1 Cymbopogon martini Roicha Ghas C

2 Cynodon dactylon Darb C

3 Cyperus arenarius Flatsedges C

4 Cyperus pangorei Flatsedges C

Source: District Gazetteers of Kutchh, & Field Survey by KEC Team Members

Photograph 3-10: Floral Diversity

Floral vegetation along the road side in the study area

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Phoenix palm and patches of calotropis sp. and prosopis sp. in the stuy area

Patches of Prosopis Juliflora in the study area

Patches of Prosopis sp. observed in riverien area

Mangroves

Mangrove forests are widespread along the coastal belt of Kutch District occupying an area of 778 km2 as a dense

forest; dominant species being Avicennia marina with almost pure stands at many places. In certain areas these are

associated with Aegiceras corniculatum, Avicennia officinalis, Bruguiera gymnorrhiza, Rhizophora mucronata,

Ceriops tagal etc. Other associated mangrove flora includes species such as Salicornia brachiata, Suaeda fruticosa

and Atriplex stocksii.

In the study area mundra mangrove reserve forest observed which is dominated by Avicennia marina.

Photograph 3-11: Mangroves Vegetation in Study Area

Mangroves Patch dominated by Avicennia marina

Table 3-38: Quantitative Assessment of Mangroves

Sr. No. Geographical Coordinates Quadrate No.

Species

Avecenia

Marina

SWDI

Species

Richness

(D)

Density/Ha Relative

Density/Ha Abundance

1 22°47'54.13"N 69°44'42.94"E Q1 9 0.09 1.91 1.44 8.18 0.90

2 22°47'21.55"N 69°44'27.60"E Q2 11 0.10 2.39 1.76 10.00 1.10

3 22°46'55.91"N 69°44'12.79"E Q3 12 0.10 2.63 1.92 10.91 1.20

4 22°46'29.85"N 69°43'53.93"E Q4 10 0.09 2.15 1.60 9.09 1.00

5 22°46'9.88"N 69°43'33.10"E Q5 11 0.10 2.39 1.76 10.00 1.10

6 22°45'50.50"N 69°43'7.18"E Q6 13 0.11 2.86 2.08 11.82 1.30

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Sr. No. Geographical Coordinates Quadrate No.

Species

Avecenia

Marina

SWDI

Species

Richness

(D)

Density/Ha Relative

Density/Ha Abundance

7 22°45'20.20"N 69°42'56.98"E Q7 11 0.10 2.39 1.76 10.00 1.10

8 22°45'0.19"N 69°42'40.38"E Q8 14 0.11 3.10 2.24 12.73 1.40

9 22°45'10.70"N 69°42'12.65"E Q9 10 0.09 2.15 1.60 9.09 1.00

10 22°45'11.40"N 69°42'0.68"E Q10 9 0.09 1.91 1.44 8.18 0.90

Agriculture & Horticulture

Major Crops: Major crops in the study area are Cotton (Gossypium herbaceum).

Minor crops: The minor crops of this region are Cotton (Gossypium herbaceum), Bajari (Pennisetum glaucum),

Jowar (Sorghum)

Vegetables: No vegetable grown due to the barren land.

Major horticultural crops: Phoenix sp. (Date Palm) horticulture activity is noted in the study area.

Eco sensitive areas: There is no notified/protected ecologically sensitive area including national park, sanctuary,

Elephant/Tiger reserves existing in the study area covering 10 km radius of the proposed well locations.

Rare and Endangered Flora in the study area

Among the enumerated flora in the study area, no rare and endangered flora was observed.

Endemic Plants of the study area

Among recorded plant species, during the survey period, none can be assigned the status of endemic plant of this

region.

Status of Forest and their category in the study area

Kutch district falls under Agro-ecological Zones of Northern West Zone. On the basis of forest classification by

Champion and Seth 1968, following two forest types out of 16 major types found in the District Kutch of Gujarat

State:

Northern Tropical Thorn Forest- These forests contain spare and stunted growth of species like Acacia, Prosopis

sp. and thorn bushes etc.

Littoral and Swamp Forest- The main species found in these forests is Avicenia sp.

There is no notified/protected ecologically sensitive area including national park, sanctuary, Elephant/Tiger reserves

existing in the study area.

Faunal Diversity of Study Area

All the common species of fauna were observed for flat terrain during the survey. A list of wild animal and their

conservation status as per Wildlife Protection Act, 1972 and amendments there is prepared from various secondary

sources, Qualitative and quantitative estimate of bird species, Interview with local people for presence of mammals,

Presence of mammals and other fauna by indirect evidences (pugmarks, scat, droppings etc) as well as direct and

indirect evidences seen by KEC team member.

Mammals: Most common mammals which, observed in the study area were Fox, Jackal, Mongoose, Nilgai etc.

The wild mammals documented other than domesticated ones from buffer zone of the study area is presented in

Table 3-39.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Table 3-39: List of Mammals in the Buffer Zone

Sr. No. Scientific name Common name Schedule

1 Vulpes bengalensis Indian Fox II

2 Boselaphus tragocamelus Nilgai III

3 Canis aureus Jackal II

4 Herpestes edwardsi Mongoose IV

5 Lepus nigricollis Indian hare IV

Note sighted included Based on the information provided by the villagers during the interaction with them with

the help of pictorial representation (Secondary information).

Reptiles: Amongst the reptiles Common Garden lizard, Indian Krait, Cobra and Vipers were commonly observed in

this area.

Table 3-40: List of Reptiles in Study Area

Sr. No. Scientific name Common name Schedule

1 Calotes versicolor Common Garden Lizard IV

2 Naja naja Cobra II

3 Ptyas mucosus Rat Snake II

4 Bungarus caeruleus Common Indian krait IV

5 Naja naja Indian cobra II

6 Vipera russelli/ Daboia russelii Russel’s viper II

7 Echis carinatus Sawscaled viper II

Note sighted included Based on the information provided by the villagers during the interaction with them with

the help of pictorial representation (Secondary information).

Avifauna: Gull billed terns, reef egrets, grebes, cormorant, house sparrow, grey heron, Red wattled lapwing etc are

observed in the study area during survey. Important avifauna of the study area were African open stilt, Grey heron,

Egret etc were observed. As per the interaction with local people Peacock were also observed in the study area.

Near the Hariya village pond mainly Grey heron, Egret and stilt were observed. Overall faunal species were reported

from the study area which are represents in Table 3-41.

Table 3-41: List of faunal species in study area

S. No. Scientific Name Common Name Schedule

BIRDS

1 Acrocephala Agricola Paddyfield warbler IV

2 Aquila nipalensis Steppe Eagle IV

3 Ardeola grayii Pond Heron IV

4 Bubulcus ibis Cattle Egret IV

5 Calandrella raytal Sand Lark IV

6 Centropus sinensis Crow Pheasant IV

7 Columa livia Blue rock pigeon IV

8 Copsychus saularis Magpie - Robin IV

9 Coracias benghalensis Indian Roller IV

10 Corvus macrorhynchos Jungle crow V

11 Corvus Splendens House crow V

12 Coturnix coromandelica Black breasted Quail IV

13 Coturnix spp. Common Quail or Grey Quail IV

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


S. No. Scientific Name Common Name Schedule

14 Dicrurus adsimillis Black Drongo IV

15 Egretta garzetta Little Egret IV

16 Egretta gularis Indian reef heron IV

17 Elanus caeruleus Black winged kite IV

18 Eudynamya scolopacea Koel IV

19 Francolinus pondicerianus Grey Partridge IV

20 Halcyon smyrnensis White Breasted Kingfisher IV

21 Himantopus himantopus Black Winged Stilt IV

22 Hirindo rustica Barn Swallow IV

23 Hirundo smithii Wire Tailed Swallow IV

24 Lanius vittatus Bay-backed Shrike IV

25 Merops leschenaultia Chestnut Headed Bee-eater IV

26 Merops orientalis Green Bee eater IV

27 Motacilla alba White Wagtail IV

28 Motacilla cineara Grey Wagtail IV

29 Orthotomus sutorius Common Tailorbird IV

30 Phalacrocorax niger Small Indian Cormorant IV

31 Prinia socialis Ashy Wren Warbler IV

32 Pseudibis papillosa Black Ibis IV

33 Pycnonotus cafer Red vented Bulbul IV

34 Saxicoloides fulicata Indian Robin IV

35 Sterna albifrons Little Tern IV

36 Sterna aurantia River Tern IV

37 Sterna hindo Common Tern IV

38 Streptopelia chinensis Spotted Dove IV

39 Streptopelia senegalensis Little Brown Dove IV

40 Theskiornis aethiopica White Ibis IV

41 Tringa hypoleucos Common Sandpiper IV

42 Turdodies caudatus Common Babbler IV

43 Turdodies malcolmi Large grey Babbler IV

44 Turdodies stratus Jungle Babbler IV

45 Upupa epops Hoopoe IV

46 Vanellus indicus Red wattled Lapwing IV

47 Pavo cristatus peacock I

48 Ardea cinerea Grey heron IV

49 Ardea alba Large egret IV

50 Egretta intermedia Smaller egret IV

51 Egretta garzetta Little egret IV

52 Mycteria leucocephala Painted stork IV

53 Phoenicopterus ruber Greater flamingo IV

54 Phoenicopterus minor Lesser flamingo IV

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Rare and Endangered Fauna of the study area

None of the sighted faunal species can be assigned rare and endangered species category of the study area.

Wild life (Protection) Act, 1972

Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972, amended on 17th January 2003, is an Act to provide for the protection of wild

animals, birds and plants and for matters connected therewith or ancillary or incidental thereto with a view to

ensuring the ecological and environmental security of the country.

Some of the sighted fauna was given protection by the Indian Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972 by including them in

different schedules. Among the birds in the study area, Pea fowl (Pavo cristatus), is included in schedule I of Wild

life protection Act (1972), while many other birds are included in schedule IV.

Among the reptiles, Common rat snake (Ptyas mucosus), Indian Cobra (Naja naja), are provided protection as per

Schedule-II of Wild life protection act, (1972)

Among mammals; Nilagai (Boselaphus tragocamelus) is schedule III, Common Mongoose (Herpestes edwardsi) and

Jackal (Canis aureus (Linnaeus)), Herpestes edwardsi, vulpes bengalensis are schedule –II animals of Wild Life

Protection act 1972.

Photograph 3-12: Floral Diversity

Calotes species observed in the study area Foot print indicate presence of mammal

Grasshpper sp. observed in the study area Nilgai observed in the study area

3.12 Socio – Economic


The aim / objectives of the study and how it was done (methodology) are presented in Table 3-42.

Table 3-42: Approach and Methodology for Conducting the Socio-economic study

S. No. Aim / Objective

Area

Methodology Study Area

Core Area

Only

1 To Identify and Assess

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


S. No. Aim / Objective

Area

Methodology Study Area

Core Area

Only

1.1. Social status of society in the focused area. To do this it is required to get reliable information with regards to:

1.1.1

People residing in the study area along with key demographic figures as per the secondary data (mainly

Census of India) giving information on: population, literacy, gender and occupation

√

Secondary data collection and

collation from Census of India

1.1.2 Main sub-communities dwelling in the core zone by caste

and religion √

From interviews with PRI representatives

1.1.3 People who are vulnerable classes such as: Below Poverty Line (BPL), Scheduled Castes (SC) and Scheduled Tribes

(ST) √


and census

1.2 Economic status of society in the study area. To do this it

is required to get reliable information with regards to:

1.2.1 Occupational pattern from secondary data (mainly Census of India) giving information on: main workers / marginal

workers / non-working population √

Secondary data collection and

collation from Census of India

1.2.2 Sources of revenue available to Panchayati Raj

Institutions (PRIs) √


1.2.3

Economic well-being of different classes by gaining an understanding of: prevailing daily wage rates for labor (male / female), status of land holding across different classes / landless households, major crops and farmer

support, livestock and animal husbandry

√ From interviews with PRI representatives

1.3 Status of physical and social infrastructure within the core and buffer areas. To do this, it is required to get reliable

information with regards to -

1.3.1

Physical infrastructure - reliable information on availability and adequacy with respect to: educational facilities, road infrastructure, power, water for drinking and irrigation,

sanitation, garbage / MSW, banking facilities


1.3.2

Social infrastructure – reliable information on availability and adequacy with respect to infrastructure associated

with: sports, community events and community self-help / support group


1.3.3 Cultural heritage of the area √ From published

literature and site visits

1.4 Effects of -

1.4.1

Ongoing impacts of other developments in the vicinity of the subject development on people and their lifestyle

within the core impact zones, as determined by the EIAC in interaction with FAE (WP / AP&AQ / SHW / RH & NV)

√ From focus group

discussions

1.4.2 Likely impacts of proposed operations (if a greenfield project) on people and their lifestyle within the core

impact zones mentioned above √

From focus group discussions

2.0 To Determine -

2.1 Needs of different communities based on the work done

in identification and assessment mentioned above √

From data analysis, internal / client

discussions

3.0 To Propose -

3.1 A Social Management Plan with budgets, timelines and

actionable items to achieve the expected outcomes √

From data analysis, internal / client

discussions

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT



Demographic Profile of Project District & Sub – District

Demographic profile details are presented in Table 3-43.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Table 3-43: Demographic Profile of Project District and Sub-district

Sr. No. Particulars Kutch

(District)

Mundra

(Sub- District)

1 No of Household 445,672 35,192

2 Total Population 2,092,371 153,219

3 Male Population 1,096,737 89,871

4 % of Male Population 52 59

5 Female Population 995,634 63,348

6 % of Female Population 48 41

7 Gender Ratio 908 705

8 Total Schedule caste Population 258,859 20,311

9 % Schedule caste Population 12 13

10 Total Schedule Tribe Population 24,228 1,979

11 % Schedule Tribe Population 1.16 1.29

12 Household Size 5 4

Source: Primary census abstract 2011

The project falls under Gujarat state, Kutch district. The study area consists of Mundra sub districts. The census

details are however available for 2011.

Therefore, to create a baseline of the existing Study Area villages:

From the land use map, the villages lying in the Study Area were first identified.

Then the list of sub-districts lying under Kutch district were identified through the census details of 2011.

The village data was then collected for the Study Area by referring the census data from the appropriate sub-

districts.

Brief Profile of Study Area

The study area covers 21 habitations consisting of 20 villages and 01 Census town in Mundra sub-district of Kutch

district. The list of identified villages as mentioned, are provided in Table 3-44.

Table 3-44: Villages in Study Area with Households and Population

Sr. No. District Sub- district Distance (Km) Habitation Household Population

1 Kutch Mundra 0-3 Nana Kapaya 2,276 8,883

2 Kutch Mundra 0-3 Dhrab 629 3,281

3 Kutch Mundra 0-3 Mundra (CT) 4,738 20,338

Sub Total 7,643 32,502

4 Kutch Mundra 3-5 Mangra 226 1,244

5 Kutch Mundra 3-5 Baroi 3,856 14,954

6 Kutch Mundra 3-5 Borana 79 377

7 Kutch Mundra 3-5 Jarpara 1,506 7,352

Sub Total 5,667 23,927

8 Kutch Mundra 5-7 Mota Kapaya 776 3,063

9 Kutch Mundra 5-7 Sadau 435 1,970

10 Kutch Mundra 5-7 Shekhadiya 152 971

11 Kutch Mundra 5-7 Goersama 195 989

12 Kutch Mundra 5-7 Pratappar (1) 48 268

13 Kutch Mundra 5-7 Samagoga 2,061 7,704

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Sr. No. District Sub- district Distance (Km) Habitation Household Population

Sub Total 3,667 14,965

14 Kutch Mundra 7-10 Baraya 254 930

15 Kutch Mundra 7-10 Pragpar 333 1339

16 Kutch Mundra 7-10 Toda 144 711

17 Kutch Mundra 7-10 Bhorara 223 1,003

18 Kutch Mundra 7-10 Gundala 646 2,784

19 Kutch Mundra 7-10 Navinal 602 3,100

20 Kutch Mundra 7-10 Nani Bhujpar 210 1,056

21 Kutch Mundra 7-10 Moti Bhujpar 1,979 9,278

Sub Total 4,391 20,201

Grand Total 21,368 91,595


Social Profile

Population & Gender Ratio Detail

The statistics regarding the gender ratio in the study area are presented in Table 3-45.

Table 3-45: Population and Gender ratio details

Distance

(km)

2011 Gender Ratio (Females per 1000 males)

Male Female

0 - 3 19,273 13,229 686

3 - 5 13,019 10,908 838

5 - 7 8,876 6,089 686

7 - 10 11,475 8,726 760

Total 52,643 38,952 740


The above table shows that the total population of male is 52,643 (57.47%) and female population is 38,952

(42.53%) and the gender ratio is 740 females per 1000 males in the study area. The national gender ratio in India

is 940 as per latest reports of census 2011; this indicates poor gender equality.

Social Characteristics

The study area is predominantly Hindu. Most of the people belong to the General, Schedule Cast, Schedule tribe

and other minority castes. The statistics regarding the Social Characteristics of villages in the study area are


Table 3-46: Schedule Caste and Schedule Tribe Population Distribution in Study Area

Distance (km)

2011

% Schedule caste % Schedule tribe

Total Male Female Total Male Female

0 - 3 13.78 54.19 45.81 0.60 64.80 35.20

3 - 5 9.37 52.05 47.95 1.44 53.49 46.51

5 - 7 13.88 50.46 49.54 1.29 49.74 50.26

7 - 10 18.22 53.23 46.77 1.26 49.21 50.79

Total 13.62 52.90 47.10 1.08 53.90 46.10

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT



As per census 2011 average scheduled caste population in Study area is 13.62% of the total population. Out of the

total schedule cast population, males are 52.90% and female population is 47.10%. Total scheduled tribe

population is 1.08%, male population is 53.90% and female population is 46.10%.

Literacy Rate

The statics regarding the literacy rate in the study area are presented in Table 3-47.

Table 3-47: Literacy Rate in Study Area

Distance (km) % Literacy

Total Male Female

0 - 3 71.78 78.32 62.26

3 - 5 66.39 72.66 58.91

5 - 7 65.53 73.86 57.62

7 - 10 66.05 73.67 56.02

Total 68.09 75.16 59.22


According to Census of India 2011, it is calculated that average literacy rate in the study area is 68.09%. Which is

less as compared to the State literacy rate i.e. 78.03%. Out of total literate population male literacy is 75.16% and

female literacy is 59.22% of total population.

Basic Infrastructure Facility

Education Facility

In the study area it was observed that each village has school up to primary level. For further education students

have to travel to nearby villages. The basic infrastructure of school in some places fairly well constructed. School

gets the electricity regularly and water. The education facilities that are prevailing in the study area are shown in

Table 3-48.

Table 3-48: Education Facility

Distance (km)

Government Private

Pre

- P

rim

ary

Sch

oo

l

Pri

ma

ry

Sch

oo

l

Mid

dle

Sch

oo

l

Se

co

nd

ary

Sch

oo

l

Se

nio

r

Se

co

nd

ary

Sch

oo

l

Co

lle

ge

Pre

- P

rim

ary

Sch

oo

l

Pri

ma

ry

Sch

oo

l

Mid

dle

Sch

oo

l

Se

co

nd

ary

Sch

oo

l

Se

nio

r

Se

co

nd

ary

Sch

oo

l

Co

lle

ge

0- 3 - 7 - - - - - - - - -

3 - 5 - 10 - 1 - - - 2 - - - -

5 - 7 - 11 - - - - - - - - - -

7 - 10 - 17 - 3 1 - - - - - - -

Total - 45 - 4 1 - - 2 - - - -


Medical & Health Facility

There are primary health centre and sub centres in the surveyed villages. The medical facilities available in the

study area are shown in Table 3-49.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Table 3-49: Medical Facility D

ista

nce

(k

m)

Co

mm

un

ity H

ea

lth

Ce

ntr

e

Pri

ma

ry H

ea

lth

Ce

ntr

e

Pri

ma

ry H

ea

lth

Su

b

Ce

ntr

e

Ma

tern

ity A

nd

Ch

ild

We

lfa

re C

en

tre

TB

Cli

nic

Ho

sp

ita

l A

llo

pa

thic

Ho

sp

ita

l A

ltern

ati

ve

Me

dic

ine

Dis

pe

nsa

ry

Ve

teri

na

ry H

osp

ita

l

Mo

bil

e H

ea

lth

Cli

nic

Fa

mil

y W

elf

are

Ce

ntr

e

No

n-G

overn

me

nt

Me

dic

al

facil

itie

s O

ut

Pa

tie

nt

0 - 3 - - - - - - - - - - - 2

3 - 5 - - 1 1 - - - 1 - - - 7

5 - 7 - - - - - - - - - - - -

7 - 10 - 1 3 1 - - - - - - - 2

Total - 1 4 2 - - - 1 - - - 11


Source of Water

The main source of water is untreated tape water, tube well /Bore well, Open Wells, Panchayat’ s Overhead Water

tank, ponds etc. The drinking water is supplied through Narmada canal pipelines in villages of study area. Other

water resources such as wells, lakes etc. are there as shown in Table 3-50.

Table 3-50: Water Facilities

Dis

tan

ce

(km

)

Ta

p W

ate

r-

Tre

ate

d

Ta

p W

ate

r

Un

tre

ate

d

Co

ve

red

We

ll

Un

co

ve

red

We

ll

Ha

nd

Pu

mp

Tu

be

We

lls

/B

ore

ho

le

Sp

rin

g

Riv

er/

Ca

na

l

Ta

nk

/P

on

d/

La

ke

Oth

ers

0 - 3 NA A NA NA NA A NA NA NA A

3 - 5 A A A NA NA A NA A A NA

5 - 7 NA A A NA NA A NA NA A NA

7 - 10 NA A A NA NA A NA NA A NA


Means of Communication

The changing trends in technology have massively affected the people in the study area. The most important

means of communication is mobile phones which are possessed by most of the individuals in the locality. All other

means of communication seem to have become extinct after the advent of mobile technology, details are presented

in Table 3-51.

Table 3-51: Communication Facilities

Distance (km) Post Office Sub- Post

office

Telephone

(landlines)

Public Call

Office

/Mobile

(PCO)

Mobile

Phone

Coverage

Internet Cafes /

Common Service

Centre (CSC)

Private

Courier

Facility

0 - 3 NA A A A A A NA




Source: Primary Census Abstract 2011

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Transportation Facility

Transport is important because it enables trade between people, which is essential for the development of

civilizations. The various transportation facilities available in the study area are shown in Table 3-52.

Table 3-52: Transportation facility

Distance (km) Bus Service

Railway Station Auto rickshaw Taxi Government Private

0 - 3 A A NA A A

3 - 5 A A NA A A

5 - 7 A A NA A A

7-10 A A NA A A

Economic profile

Agriculture in study area

The major crops being produced in study area is Millet (Bajari), cotton, castor and Sorghum (Juwar). Cash crop like

cotton is grown in the study area. Agriculture is carried out by the water from Narmada canal and bore wells.

Animal husbandry

Livestock rearing is common among the people of this region and one of the main occupation in the study area is

animal husbandry. Most of the animals reared by them are cows and buffaloes. Private veterinary doctors’ visits on

the basis of the requirement of the local people. Regular medical check-up of animals is carried out by the private

doctors only. Milk produced is used for personal consumption and selling to cooperative dairies.

Industries

Mundra was well known for salt and spice trading in the past and now for tie-dye and block-printed textiles. The old

harbour is virtually unusable today, and only small local fishing crafts navigate its silted waterways up the river. The

main source of income for the local people is agriculture, horticulture and wage labour. Mundra has a Date Palm

Research Station operated by Sardarkrushinagar Dantiwada Agricultural University converted from seed farm in

1969. Several people are employed in manufacturing companies, port and power stations. Mundra Port is the

largest private port with multiproduct special economic zone owned and operated by Adani Ports & SEZ Limited.

There are two thermal power stations adjacent to Mundra, Mundra Ultra Mega Power Plant operated by Tata Power

and Mundra Thermal Power Station operated by Adani Power. This power station generates over 8,600 MW of

electricity. The coal for the power plant is imported primarily from Indonesia. Source of water for the power plant is

sea water from the Gulf of Kutch.

Occupational pattern

The statistics regarding the Occupational Pattern in the study area are presented in Table 3-53.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Table 3-53: Occupational Pattern

Distance (km)

% Occupational Status (2011)

Total

Working

Population

Cultivators Agricultural

Labor

Household

Workers Others

Marginal

Workers

0 - 3 44.30 2.65 5.13 0.55 88.21 3.47

3 - 5 42.05 12.75 11.16 0.91 65.32 9.85

5 - 7 44.18 8.36 8.64 0.80 76.04 6.16

7 - 10 41.41 10.77 13.70 0.72 69.46 5.36

Total 43.06 7.91 9.07 0.72 76.35 5.95

Source: Primary Census Abstract 2011

As per the available Census Data 2011, there are total 43.06 % working population. Out of the total working

population there are 7.91 % are cultivators, 09.07% Agricultural Labor, 0.72 %household workers, others 76.35%

and 5.95 %marginal workers in the study area.

Historical and cultural profile

Places given protection under the ASI Ancient Monuments Act

There are no ASI protected monuments in the study area.

Places given protection under the Gujarat State protected monuments

There is no state protected monuments in the study area.

Places of Commercial / Trade mportance

Mundra Port

The Port of Mundra is a private port and is also a special economic zone. Incorporated in 1998 as Gujarat Adani Port

Limited (GAPL), the company began operating in 2001. The combined company was renamed Mundra Port and

Special Economic Zone Limited.

The multi-purpose terminals contain nine berths of a total 1.8 thousand metres long with alongside depths ranging

from 9 to 16.5 metres. Berth 1 is 275 metres long with alongside depth of 15.5 metres and can accommodate vessels

to 75 thousand DWT. Berth 2 is 180 metres long with alongside depth of 13 metres and can accommodate vessels

to 30 thousand DWT. Accommodating vessels to 60 thousand DWT, Berths 3 and 4 are each 225 metres long; Berth

3 has alongside depth of 14 metres, and Berth 4 has alongside depth of 12 metres. Berths 5 and 6 are each 250

metres long with alongside depth of 14 metres, and both can accommodate vessels to 150 thousand DWT. Berths 7

and 8 are each 175 metres long with alongside depth of 12 metres and can accommodate vessels to 40 thousand

DWT. The Barge Berth is 80 metres long with alongside depth of 6 metres and capacity for vessels of 2500 DWT.

The Mundra Port offers 21 closed dockside warehouses with capacity for 1.37 lakh (137 thousand) square metres to

store wheat, sugar, rice, fertilizer, raw material for fertilizer and deoiled cakes. The port offers 8.8 lakh (880 thousand)

square metres of open storage for steel sheets, coils, plate, clinker, scrap, salt, coke, bentonite, and coal. An additional

26 thousand square metres of open storage is available alongside the railway. The port also offers a wheat-cleaning

facility with capacity to handle 1200 metric tons per day and a rice-sorting and –grading facility that can handle 500

metric tons per day. The Port of Mundra is planning several additions and improvements. Two thermal power plants

are under construction that will produce over 8,600 megawatts. A new terminal site is proposed to be located about

ten nautical miles west of the current terminals at the Port of Mundra. The terminal will eventually contain three

deep-water offshore berths and two sets of stackyards for coal, iron ore, and other dry bulk cargo. The Republic of

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ENVIRONMENT


Kazakhstan is considering to build a terminal at the Mundra Port to provide Indian goods direct access to Central Asia

via the Iran-Turkmenistan-Kazakhstan railway line.

In addition, the Port of Mundra's basin on the south side of Navinal Island will be developed in two phases to enhance

the chorkarmas. Scheduled to be completed in 2010, Phase IIA will include breakwaters, dredging, reclamation as

well as construction of a basin container terminal, two roll-on/roll-off service berths, a craft berth, and support and

back-up facilities. The railway line will be expanded, and a new dedicated berth will be added for liquefied natural

gas. The Port of Mundra is also upgrading its road network, adding two lanes to the existing two-lane road. Mundra

Port is India's first multi-product port-based special economic zone (SEZ). The company currently has an annual cargo

handling capacity 338 MMT as of February 2015. The development of Adani Port & Special Economic Zone Limited

was conceptualised by the entrepreneur Mr. Gautam Adani. Mundra Port was the first one to be developed in October

1998 with just one berth. In a short span of just 12 years Mundra Port achieved 10 crore (100 million) metric tonnes

of commercial cargo in a year thereby becoming India's largest commercial port. Mundra Port has registered the

fastest CAGR of over 35% in the port sector across India.

The Mundra Port is located in the Northern Gulf of Kutch, en route major maritime routes and connected through

rail, road, air & pipelines. This makes it a preferred gateway for cargo bound westwards. The port has been designed

to handle all types of cargo viz. containers, dry bulk, break bulk, liquid cargo and automobiles. Mundra Port has a

capacity to handle 338 MMT of cargo per annum – the largest amongst all operational ports in India. Mundra Port

handled 14.44 crore (144.4 million) MT of cargo in the financial year 2020–21 and is the largest commercial port of

India in term so volume of cargo handled. Mundra Port has not only pioneered the concept of deep draft integrated

port model, but also of port based SEZ. The multi-product SEZ consisting Mundra Port and its surrounding areas is

planned to be spread over 135 square kilometres (13,500 hectares). Currently, notified Multi-product SEZ is spread

over an area of 6,473 Hectare, with an additional 168 Hectares notified as a Free Trade Warehousing Zone.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR

LTD, DHRAB EIA REPORT FOR PROPOSED EXPANSION OF SYNTHETIC ORGANIC CHEMICALS IN

EXISTING FACILITY AT VILLAGE DHRAB & MUNDRA, KUTCH

ANTICIPATED

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS

& MITIGATION MEASURES


4 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION

MEASURES

4.1 Introduction

Objective of this chapter is to:

Identify project activities that could beneficially or adversely impact the environment

Predict and assess the environmental aspects and impacts of the such activities

Examine each environmental aspect-impact relationship in detail and identify its degree of significance

Identify possible mitigation measures for these project activities and select the most appropriate mitigation

measure, based on the reduction in significance achieved and practicality in implementation.

4.2 Methodology of Identification and Assessment of Environmental Impacts

Key Definitions

Environment

Surroundings in which an organization operates, including air, water, land, natural resources, flora, fauna, humans,

and their interrelation.

Environmental Aspect

Element of an organization’s activities (including those activities that occur during normal, abnormal, emergency

and final decommissioning operations) or raw materials or products or services that can interact with the

environment.

Environmental aspects selected for further study should be large enough for meaningful examination and small

enough to be easily understood.

Environmental Impact

Any change to the environment, whether adverse or beneficial, wholly or partially resulting from an organization’s

environmental aspect.

Environmental Components

The environment includes surroundings in which an organization operates such as air, water, land, natural

resources, flora, fauna, humans and their interrelation.

The environmental components (or parts of the receiving environment on which impacts are being assessed)

include: Land use/land cover, air quality, noise quality, surface water environment, ground water environment, soil,

ecology and bio diversity, socio economics, occupational health, community health and safety.

After the identification of impacting activities, impacts require to be assessed based on subjective / objective

criteria. This is done in the following steps:

Identification of Impacts

This entails employing a simple checklist method requiring:

Listing of organisation’s activities, raw materials, products and services

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED




Listing of environmental aspects (i.e. elements of an organization’s activities or raw materials, products or

services that can cause environmental impacts)

Identifying applicable components of the environment on which the environmental aspects can cause an

environmental impact

Making notes of the reason / possible inter-relationships that lead to environmental impact creation

Listing the environmental components likely to receive impacts, along with the key impacting activities on each

component

Component Wise Environmental Impact Assessment and Mitigation

A component wise approach to environmental impact assessment and mitigation is now applied. For each

environmental component (Air Pollution and Air Quality, Noise, Water, Land, EB, RD, SE, OH&HS), this is carried

through a series of steps as follows.

Step 1: Review and Assessment of the Specific Aspects Generating Environmental Impact

Several scientific techniques and methodologies are also used to predict impacts on the environment. Mathematical

models are useful tools (where applicable) to quantitatively describe the cause and effect relationships between

sources of pollution and different components of environment. In cases where it is not possible to identify and

validate a model for a particular situation, predictions have been arrived at based on logical reasoning /

consultation / extrapolation or overlay methods. In any case, for each component of the environment, the methods

used to arrive at the likely impacts require to be described.

Step 2: Arriving at the Environmental Impact Significance, Identifying Aspects Causing Unacceptable

Levels of Environmental Impact Significance and Prioritizing Aspects Requiring Mitigation Measures

Once a general understanding of the impacts has been obtained, efforts are made to compare significance of

different impacts so as to prioritize mitigation measures, focusing on those impacting activities (i.e. aspects) that

require urgent mitigation. For ease of comparison across different activities, a summary environmental significance

score is calculated. Two key elements are taken into consideration based on standard environmental impact

significance assessment methodologies:

Severity: the seriousness or the extent of environmental impact due to an activity and its interaction with the

physical, biological and/or socio-economic environments.

Likelihood of Occurrence: the likelihood that an impact may occur due to the project activity/aspect.

A combination of severity and likelihood of occurrence gives a reasonable measure of environmental impact

significance, which aids in decision making. It must always be kept in mind that any scoring methodology

howsoever well-defined is subjective and different persons can arrive at different impact significance scores based

on their understanding / opinion. Therefore, end results should be evaluated against past experience, professional

judgment as well as project and activity specific conditions to ensure adequacy and equity. Kadam has made an

effort to ensure that the scoring does not change significantly assuming that different evaluators are equally well

informed on the project as well as knowledgeable on the concerned issues.

In addition to above discussion, in the functional area of Land Use / Land Cover, it is observed that the likelihood of

occurrence of impacts on Land Use / Land Cover is not a variable; the impact either happens or does not happen.

Since we will only consider the impacts which are likely to occur, the conventional methodology will rank the

likelihood at highest, in case of Land Use/Land Cover at 5, on a scale of 1 to 5. This fact artificially increases the

Significance (Likelihood X Severity) of all impacts on Land Use / Land Cover. It has therefore been decided to

dispense with the ranking on the basis of likelihood of occurrence (for LULC) and rank only severity of impacts in

such a way that the Significance can span the full range, i.e. 1 to 25, as in the case of conventional assessment.

The steps in calculating the environmental impact significance for each environmental component are discussed in

subsequent paragraphs.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED




Scoring the Impact Severity

The impacts resulting from activities which need to comply with legal requirement, EP Rules / NOC / Other

Statutory permissions, shall not require scoring, and shall be considered Significant.

The severity on various environmental receptors have been ranked into 5 levels ranging from Acceptable (1 point)

to Unacceptable (5 points) as presented in Table 4-1.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR LTD, DHRAB EIA REPORT FOR PROPOSED EXPANSION OF SYNTHETIC ORGANIC CHEMICALS IN EXISTING FACILITY AT VILLAGE DHRAB &

MUNDRA, KUTCH ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL

IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES


Table 4-1: Scoring System for Environmental Impacts due to the Proposed Project – Severity Assessment

S.

No.

Environmental

Component

Impacted

Impact Severity Levels and Scores3

Severity Level: Acceptable

Points: ± 1

Severity Level: Minor

Points: ± 2

Severity Level: Moderate

Points: ± 3

Severity Level: Major

Points: ± 4

Severity Level:

Unacceptable

Points: ± 5

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7

1 Land use / land

cover

Duration

Very short term

(up to 1 year)

Short term

(>1 - 3 years) Medium term (>3 - 5 years)

Long term

(> 5-10 years) Very long term (>10 years)

Extent (Area affected)

Very Limited (Within core zone)

Limited

(<1 km around core zone)

Medium Range

(>1 – 3.0 km around core zone)

Long Range

(>3 – 7 km around core zone)

Extensive (>7.0 km around core zone)

Change in land Use/Cover (conversion to Industrial/ Residential from)

Non-agricultural land, Land without Scrub, Industrial area with scrub land/ Reversible

Scrub Land/ Change in Topography

Water Body Agricultural land, Open and Close vegetation/ Change in

Drainage pattern Forest Area/ Irreversible

Topography

Low (Flat) up to 5 m - Medium (Undulating) up to 10

m - High (Hilly) More than 10 m

Reversible/ Irreversible

Reversible - - - Irreversible

2 Air Quality

Temporary nuisance due to controlled/uncontrolled release of air emissions,

odour / dust or greenhouse gases

Minor environmental impact due to controlled/uncontrolled

release of air emissions, odour / dust or greenhouse

gases with no lasting detrimental effects

Moderate environmental impact due to

controlled/uncontrolled release of air emissions,

odour / dust or greenhouse gases leading to visual impacts, at significant

nuisance levels

Significant environmental impact due to release of air emissions, odour / dust or

greenhouse gases leading to exceedance of limits specified

in EP Rules’

Unacceptable environmental impact due to release of air

emissions, odour / dust leading to possibility of

chronic / acute health issues, injuries or fatalities

3 In case none of the impacts are applicable, Not Applicable (NA) is written in the appropriate cell. A ‘+’ sign indicates a beneficial impact while ‘-‘ sign indicates a adverse impact.





S.

No.

Environmental

Component

Impacted



Points: ± 1


Points: ± 2


Points: ± 3


Points: ± 4

Severity Level:

Unacceptable

Points: ± 5

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7

3

Ambient Noise - give the mean score from the

three categories, rounded to the nearest decimal

Background Noise Levels, with respect to Applicable Limit4 as per The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000, as Measured at Boundary of Relevant Noise Generating Unit

10% of limit or less Between 10% to 5% of limit Between 5% and the limit Up to 5% above the limit 5% or more above the limit

Incremental Noise Levels due to Relevant Noise Generating Unit, as Predicted at Boundary

1 dB(A) or less 1 dB(A) – 2 dB(A) 2 dB(A) – 3 dB(A) 3 dB(A) –4 dB(A) 4 dB(A) or more

Incremental Noise Levels due to Relevant Noise Generating Unit, as Predicted at Boundary of Nearest Human Settlement / Sensitive Receptor

0.5 dB(A) or less 0.5 dB(A) – 1 dB(A) 1 dB(A) – 1.5 dB(A) 1.5 dB(A) – 2 dB(A) 2 dB(A) or more

4

Surface Water - give the mean score from the


Water Consumption (KL/D)

< 50 51 - 100 101 - 250 251 – 500 > 500

Water Consumption Duration (Years)

< 1 1 - 3 3 - 5 5 - 10 > 10

Wastewater Discharge Quality

No wastewater generation Zero Discharge Discharge to an authorized,

functional CETP Other discharge within limits

specified by the EP Rules

Other discharge, outside limits specified by the EP

Rules

5

Ground Water - give the mean score from the


Ground Water - give the mean score from the three categories, rounded to the nearest decimal

Safe Semi-critical Critical Over-exploited Notified

Water Drawl (KL/D)

< 50 51 - 100 101 - 250 251 - 500 > 500

Water Drawl Duration (Years)

< 1 1 - 3 3 - 5 5 - 10 > 10

Wastewater Discharge Quality

4 For leq (day) or leq (night), whichever is higher





S.

No.

Environmental

Component

Impacted



Points: ± 1


Points: ± 2


Points: ± 3


Points: ± 4

Severity Level:

Unacceptable

Points: ± 5

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7

No wastewater generation Zero Discharge Discharge to an authorized,

functional CETP Other discharge within limits

specified by the EP Rules

Other discharge, outside limits specified by the EP

Rules

Accidental Discharge

Negligible leakages of chemicals/oil that only require periodic maintenance for both

storage / transport routes

Minor but frequent leakages of chemicals/oil that require

provision safety measures and proper maintenance

Moderate leakages of chemicals/oil that may

contaminate groundwater if proper safety measures not

provided

Major leakages of chemicals/oil that contaminate

groundwater if safety measures not provided

Heavy leakage that can adversely contaminate groundwater and must

require urgent remediation actions

6 Soil Quality

Loss of up to 20% topsoil, or minor contamination of soil that can be easily restored

close to original condition for volume <10 m3

Loss of up to 40% topsoil, or actual or possible

contamination of soil volume <25 m3 but below Dutch

Intervention Values

Loss of up to 60% topsoil, or actual or possible

contamination of soil volume <25 m3 but above Dutch

Intervention Values

Loss up to 80% topsoil, or actual or possible

contamination of soil volume >25 m3 and above Dutch

Intervention Values, but not deemed to require urgent

remediation

Loss up to 100% topsoil, or actual or possible

contamination of soil volume >25 m3 and above Dutch Intervention Values5 , and deemed to require urgent

remediation

7.1

Flora /

Fauna

Habitat/

Ecosystem

Site specific loss (removal)

of common floral species

(but not any tree or trees).

Vegetation composition does

not form a habitat character

for any species of

conservation significance.

No short term or long term

impacts are likely to

adversely affect the


of some saplings of trees.

Minor temporary impacts on

ecosystem functioning or

habitat ecology of common /

general species.

Minor short term / long term

impacts on surrounding /

immediate / adjacent

habitats and are resilient to


of some common well grown

tree / trees species.

Site specific loss of nesting /

breeding habitat of common

/ general species of flora-

fauna but will not result in

permanent loss of habitat.

Short term or long term

impacts are likely to

adversely affect the

Site specific impact on

threatened species but

impacted species are widely

distributed outside the

project site. Short term

impacts may lead to loss of

abundance or extent, but

unlikely to cause local

population extinction.

Site specific habitat loss of

fauna listed in IUCN, WCMC,

Impact on threatened

species listed in as an

endemic / Schedule-I as per

IWPA 1972, Red Data Book,

ZSI, BSI or literature

published by any State Govt.

Institute, University and

College etc.

Loss of habitat of above said

flora-fauna.

5 Source: Ministry of Housing Spatial Planning and the Environment, Netherlands; Soil Remediation Circular 2009, Annex A.





S.

No.

Environmental

Component

Impacted



Points: ± 1


Points: ± 2


Points: ± 3


Points: ± 4

Severity Level:

Unacceptable

Points: ± 5

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7

surrounding habitat /

ecosystem.

Site specific disturbance to

common / general faunal

species (e.g. movement

pattern, displacement etc.).

No negative impacts on

surrounding ecosystem

functioning or habitat

ecology.

changes in habitat structure

or condition.

Impact on surrounding agro-

ecosystem / agriculture

when environmental data /

parameters are within

permissible limits.

surrounding habitat

character/ habitat ecology/

functioning of ecosystem.

Impact on surrounding agro-

ecosystem / agriculture

when physical parameters

with marginal increase but

can be mitigated.

Birdlife International, or any

other international literature

- secondary information.

Impacts on habitats /

ecosystems of international

importance.

Impact on genetic diversity

of NP /PF /WLS /ESZ /IBA /

tiger reserve / elephant

corridor / wild life corridor.

Impact on ecosystem like

river, forest, wetland (e.g.

RAMSAR site etc.) etc.

7.2 Ecology and Bio-

diversity: Aquatic

Occasional short term impact

and / or disruption to aquatic

flora and fauna.

Impact on aquatic ecosystem,

including flora, fauna and

habitat but not destruction of

species diversity or density.

Significant localised impacts

but without long term impact

on Phytoplankton,

zooplankton habitat.

Temporary impact on benthos

ecosystem or fisheries

ecosystem.

Some loss of fisheries

ecosystem.

Significant widespread impact

on protected wildlife

(corals/mangroves/turtles/

any marine mammals).

Significant impact on

mangroves habitat

Damage to an extensive

portion of aquatic ecosystem

resulting in severe impacts on

aquatic population and

habitats and / or long term

impact on aquatic habitat.

Permanent or long term

impact on protected wildlife

(corals/mangroves/turtles/

any marine mammals) and

mangroves

8.1

Socio-economic Environment:

Social Aspects - give the mean score from the

categories,

Possible Temporary or Permanent Migration, Persons as a % of Population of Study Area

Less than 0.5% Between 0.5% and 1% Between 1% and 1.5% Between 1.5% and 2% More than 2%

Possible Change in Ethnicity, vis-à-vis Major Existing Ethnicities Present in Study Area

Not likely Possible Limited Significant Severe

Gender Imbalance, as a Proportion to Existing Sex-Ratio

Not likely Possible Limited Significant Severe





S.

No.

Environmental

Component

Impacted



Points: ± 1


Points: ± 2


Points: ± 3


Points: ± 4

Severity Level:

Unacceptable

Points: ± 5

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7

rounded to the nearest decimal

Possibility of Return to Original Status in Terms of Any or All of the Above Changes

Less than 1 year Between 1 and 2 years Between 2 and 3 years Between 3 to 5 years Permanent change

8.2

Socio-economic Environment:

Economic Aspects - give

the mean score from the

categories, rounded to the nearest decimal

No. of Jobs Gained or Lost

Less than 50 Between 50 and 75 Between 75 and 100 Between 100 and 250 More than 250

Persons Having Loss or Gain in Income


Land Losers


Losers of Homesteads


8.3 Socio-economic Aspects: Cultural

Minor repairable damage to commonplace structures

Minor repairable damage to structures/ items of cultural

significance, or minor infringements of cultural

values

Moderate damage to structures/ items of cultural significance, or significant,

infringement of cultural values/ sacred location

Major damage to structures/ items of cultural significance,

or major infringement of cultural values/sacred

locations

Irreparable damage to highly valued structures/ items/

locations of cultural significance or sacred value

Consequence distance

9.1 Impact on People

Slight injury or health effects (including first aid case and

medical treatment case). Not affecting work performance or

causing disability

Minor injury or health effects- Affecting work performance,

e.g. restriction to activities, or need to take a time off work to recover. Limited, reversible

health effects e.g. skin irritation, food poisoning.

Major injury of health effects (including permanent

disability). Affecting work performance in the longer

term, e.g. prolonged absence from work. Irreversible health

damage without loss of life, e.g. noise induced hearing loss, chronic back injuries.

Single fatality or permanent total disability- from an accident or occupational

illness

Multiple Fatalities-From an accident of occupational

illness

9.2 Impact on

Environment

Slight Effect- Local Environment damage. Within the fence and within system.

Negligible financial consequences.

Minor effect- contamination. Damage sufficiently large to

attack the environment. Single exceeding of statutory or prescribed criterion. Single

Localized effect- Limited loss of discharges of known

toxicity. Repeated exceeding of statutory or prescribed

limit. Affecting neighbourhood. Spontaneous

Major effect- Severe environmental damage. The company is required to take

extensive measures to restore polluted or damaged

environment to its original

Massive effect-Persistent severe environmental damage or severe nuisance extending over a large area. In terms of

commercial or recreational use or nature conservation, a





S.

No.

Environmental

Component

Impacted



Points: ± 1


Points: ± 2


Points: ± 3


Points: ± 4

Severity Level:

Unacceptable

Points: ± 5

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7

complaint. No permanent effect on the environment.

recovery of limited damage within one year.

state. Extended exceeding of statutory or prescribed limits.

major economic loss for the company. Constant, high exceeding of statutory or

prescribed limits.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED




4.3 Quantifying the Likelihood of Occurrence of the Impact

After identifying the severity as shown in Table 4-1 the likelihood of occurrence also needs to be estimated to

arrive at a complete picture of environmental impact significance. Table 4-2 provides likelihood ratings on a scale

of 1-5. These ratings are used for estimating the likelihood of each occurrence.

Table 4-2: Likelihood of Occurrence

Description Environment/Health and Safety Likelihood of occurrence

Frequent Continuous occurrence or each day during the project life cycle 5

Regular Occurs several times each year during the project life cycle 4

Periodic Might occur annually during the project life cycle 3

Occasional Might happen few times during the project life cycle 2

Rare One time or one-off event during the project life cycle 1

4.4 Quantifying Environmental Impact significance except for Land use land Cover Component

The level of environmental impact significance is calculated by multiplying the consequence score and the

probability of occurrence together. Thus,

Significance of Impact = Severity Score × Likelihood of Occurrence

The final score is in relative point score, rather than actual impact. The impact estimation is carried out on the

assumption that all operations are carried out with standard safety measures.

4.5 Quantifying Environmental Impact Significance for Land Use Land Cover Component

The Significance of Environmental Impact is calculated by adding the severity score of all five components. Thus,

Significance of Impact = Addition of all five severity scores.

Table 4-3 below assigns significance criteria, based on the scale of 1-25, used for prioritizing mitigation measures

for reducing the environmental impact significance and thereafter, formulating and implementing Environmental

Management Plans.

To do this, environmental impact significance levels are first scored and identified as mentioned earlier and then

evaluated on the evaluation scale that follows in Table 4-3.

Table 4-3: Environmental Impact Significance Criteria

Likelihood of Occurrence

Impact Significance

Insignificant

(1)

Minor

(2)

Moderate

(3)

Major

(4)

Catastrophic

(5)

Rare (1) 1 2 3 4 5

Possible (2) 2 4 6 8 10

Likely (3) 3 6 9 12 15

Often (4) 4 8 12 16 20

Certain (5) 5 10 15 20 25

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED




4.6 Categorising Environmental Impact Significance

Environmental impacts are now categorised into five categories from extreme significance to low significance.

Activities resulting into extremely significant impacts are unacceptable and therefore need to be either stopped or

modified such that they are brought to a lower level of environmental impact significance.

Activities resulting into High and moderately severe impacts, although acceptable, require being evaluated and

mitigated in a manner that significance of their impacts is lowered. Activities resulting into Low severe significant

impacts do not require further mitigation. This is summarized in Table 4-4.

Table 4-4: Categorization of Impact Significance

Scoring Negative Impacts (-) Scoring Positive Impacts (+)

Colour Code and

Score Range

Category of

Significance Inference

Colour Code and

Score Range Inference

25 Extremely Significant

Activity should not

proceed in current

form

21 - 25 Activity has Extensive

Positive Benefits

15 - 20 Highly Significant

Activity should be

modified to include

remedial planning and

actions and be subject

to detailed ecological

assessment

15 - 20 Activity has Major

Benefits

8 - 12 Moderately Significant

Activity can operate

subject to

management and / or

modification

9 - 14 Activity has Moderate

Benefits

4 - 6 Less Significant

No action required

unless escalation of

risk is possible

4 - 8 Activity has Minor

Benefits

1 - 3 Minor / Negligible Negligible Risk of

activity 1 - 3

Activity has mildly

positive impacts

4.7 Mitigation Measures

Mitigation measures require being formulated and implemented for all ‘Highly Significant’ and ‘Moderately

Significant’ impact activities. Programmes to implement all mitigation measures are then prepared and presented as

an Environmental Management Programme.

4.8 Identification of Impacting Activities for the Proposed Project

As discussed earlier, environmental impacts have been identified based on an assessment of environmental aspects

associated with the project. The symbol ‘●’ indicates an adverse (negative) impact and ‘o’ indicates a beneficial

(positive) impact.

Identified environmental aspects and impacting functions have been listed in the table below:

M/S. ADANI WILMAR LTD, DHRAB EIA REPORT FOR PROPOSED EXPANSION OF SYNTHETIC ORGANIC CHEMICALS IN EXISTING FACILITY AT VILLAGE DHRAB & MUNDRA, KUTCH ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES


Table 4-5: Environmental Aspects and Impacting Functions

S. No. Project Activity

Impact (Type:

O, N, A, E;

Duration: T, P)

situations

Identified Aspect AP/AQ NV SW GW WW LU/

LC S SHW EB SE RH

OH /

(CH&S) Remarks

1 Project Location

1.1 Site selection N,P Increase in traffic on state highways and

internal roads in study area ● ● o Development of ancillary activities

2 Project Pre- Construction/ Construction

2.1 Site Preparation N,P Removal of top soil and Land clearance ● ●

2.2 Excavation and paving of site,

Movement of earth movers, other machinery etc.

N,P Change in Land Use and Land Cover ●

O,T Generation of Debris ●

N,T Dust generation ● ●

N,T Generation of Noise ● ●

A,T/P Fall in pit, land sliding from sidewalls ● ● OH (H&S): Can cause temporary

or permanent harm

O,T Generation of employment o

2.3 Heavy fabrication work for erecting O,T Generation of scraps ●

2.4 Major plant equipment including

operation of equipment like crane, concrete mixtures, vibrators etc.

N,T Dust & Noise generation ● ● ● ●

O/A,T/P Breaking of pulley, chains of cranes during

lifting of equipment ● ● ●

OH (H&S): Can cause temporary or permanent harm

N,T Influx of construction workers ● ● o

2.5 Usage of Energy and Power &

Water (N,T)

Operation of DG Set during construction phase

● ● ●

3 Commissioning / Project Operation

3.1

Reactions, cooling, Filtration, Separation, Distillation,

Evaporation, Washing & drying activities

N,P Raw water Intake ● Sources of water will be GWIL

N,P Noise Generation (due to operation of

reactors / dryers / compressors / pumps / blowers / DG Sets)

● ●

N,P Emission of VOC, PM and Sulphuric Acid ● ● ● ●

N,P Generation of Effluent ● ● The waste water will be treated in ZLD plant comprising of RO and

MEE

N,P Generation of process residue (chemical

residue, chemical sludge) ●

A,T Loss of Raw Material, water during failure

of batch quality ●

N,P Fugitive Emissions of Solvents ● ●

N,P

Generation of Discarded Container / Barrels / Liners, Spent Activated Carbon, Spent Catalyst , Distillation residue, Filter

residue and Spent Carbon

●

A/T Spillage of chemicals, products, solvents ● ● ● ● ●

N,P Influx of workers ● ● o

3.2 Dispatch and handling of Products A,T Fugitive emissions due to loose packing ● ●

4 General & Utilities

4.1 Transportation of Raw Materials

and Products

N,P SPM generation and emission of HC & CO ● ● ●

A,T Noise generation due to vehicular

movement ●




Impact (Type:

O, N, A, E;

Duration: T, P)

situations


LC S SHW EB SE RH

OH /

(CH&S) Remarks

A,T Possibility of contamination due to leakage

or spillage of chemicals/ materials ● ● ● ● ●

A,T Increase in traffic ● ●

A,T Risk of fire and explosion if spillage of

hazardous chemicals ●

N,P Indirect employment generation o

4.2 Storage & Handling of chemicals

N,P Generation of Waste Drums/Barrels/bags

and containers ●

N,P Fugitive emissions and leakages of

chemicals ● ●

4.3 Storage & Handling of fuel, Raw material, Finished products and

Hazardous waste

N,P Generation of discarded container, drums,

packing material etc. ●

A,T Fire and Explosion in raw material storage

area ● ● ●

A,T Fugitive emissions of PM ● ●

4.4 Operation of utilities like Cooling

Tower, Boilers, DG Sets, Compressor, Pumps, Blowers etc.

N,P Flue gas emission of PM, SO2, NOx from boilers, thermic fluid heaters and DG sets

● ●

N,P Waste water generation from blow down ● The waste water will be treated in ZLD plant comprising of RO and

MEE

A,T Leakages in HSD tank ●

N,P Noise Generation ●

4.5 Equipment and Floor Washing N,P Generation of Waste water ● The waste water will be treated in ZLD plant comprising of RO and

MEE

4.6 Operation of ETP N,P Sludge Generation ●

4.7 Storm water management A,T Mixing of process drain water with Storm

water drains during heavy rains. ● ●

4.8 Equipment maintenance

N,P Generation of used/waste oil and lubricants ●

N,P Generation of scraps and used spares etc. ●

4.9 Analysis in laboratory N,P Waste water generation ●

The waste water will be treated in ZLD plant comprising of RO and

MEE

N,P Generation of Broken Glassware ●

5 Decommissioning Phase

5.1 Venting in case of pressurized

operation or Vessel (O&T)

Emission due to venting of gases ●

Risk during venting of pressurized gas/ liquid, Risk to worker during venting

process ●

5.2 Draining of process vessel, brine solution, Cooling water system or

refrigeration system. (O&T)

Draining material mixed with ground water and Soil

● ●

Damage to Flora/ Fauna found in soil ●

Bottom sludge generated through draining process

●

5.3 Sludge removal, storage and

disposal (O&T)

Leachate of sludge mixed in ground water and Soil

● ●

5.4 Washing of process equipment,

pipeline, tanks etc. (O&T)

Effluent generation after washing ●

Washed water leakage and spillage ●




Impact (Type:

O, N, A, E;

Duration: T, P)

situations


LC S SHW EB SE RH

OH /

(CH&S) Remarks

5.5

Dismantling of following; 1. Pipeline & Fittings

2. Vessels or equipment 3. Steel structure 4. Civil Structure

(O&T)

Noise may generate during dismantling ●

Dust Emission due to dismantle activity ●

Handling of Scrap and disposal of civil structure as per the rule

●

Risk to worker during dismantling ●

5.6 Disposal of Inventory like raw

material, treated effluent, rejects or partly processed material

(O&T)

Handling, transportation and disposal of inventory as pre Hazardous waste rules

●

Risk to worker during handling of inventory ●

Type of Impact – O:One Time; N: Normal; A: Abnormal; E: Emergency; Duration of Impact –T: Temporary; P: Long-Term/ Permanent AQ: Air Quality; NV: Noise and Vibration; SW: Surface Water; GW: Ground Water; WW: Waste water; LU/LC: Landuse/ Landcover; S: Soil; SHW: Solid &Hazardous waste generation; EB: Ecology & Bio-diversity; SE: Socio-Economic; RH: Risk & Hazard; OH/CH&S: Occupational Health, Community Health & Safety

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED




Based on this above identification of impacts, environmental components that are likely to be impacted due to the

project are:

Landuse/Land cover: Land lease, clearance of vegetation / crop, cutting and filling of earth and building of

structures will lead to change in land use land cover at site from scrub land/ land without scrub to Industrial

land/ use.

Air Quality: Impact due to vehicular movements during transportation of raw materials and products and Air

emissions during manufacturing of new synthetic organic chemicals.

Noise: Adverse impact on noise quality is due to vehicle movements during site preparation, excavation, filling

of foundation, heavy fabrication work, laying of pipelines, transportation of equipment & materials, shutdown &

startup activities, operation of ETP, DG set, cooling tower and due to dismantling of structures

Surface Water: Impact due to Leakages during chemicals transportation, spillage of chemicals and fresh

water consumption from APSEZL, storm water contamination due to spillages and leakages, waste water

generation and its treatment, recycling and reuse / ZLD systems.

Ground water: Impact on ground water quality due to Leakage during chemicals transportation, storage of

chemicals and storage of hazardous waste. There will not be impact on groundwater quantity as there will not

be any abstraction of groundwater.

Soil: Impact on soil due to Leakage during chemicals transportation & storage, due to Leaching of sludge

mixed in soil and leakage of washed water during washing of process equipment

Ecology and Biodiversity: Impact on ecology and bio-diversity due to Handling & Storage of Raw material,

fuel, etc., leakage during chemicals transportation and storage, etc. Beneficial impact on ecology as sufficient

greenbelt will be developed.

Socio – Economic: Impact due to increase in traffic movement, increased employment, CSR activities etc.

Occupational health, Community Health and Safety: Occupational risk during various activities

associated with construction work and risk due to leakage of chemicals.

4.9 Measures for minimizing and / or offsetting adverse impacts identified

4.9.1 Land Environment

Construction Phase

Clearance of Land

There will be change in land use/cover pattern typically from Scrub/land to built-up land i.e. industrial area.

Excavation

The excavation work and filling of foundation activity will alter the topography of the site which will have minor

impact on land use.

Impact scores on land use land cover are likely to be as mentioned in Table 4-6.

Table 4-6: Impact Scoring – Land Environment

Sr. No. Impacting Activity Impact Scoring

Remarks S L S x L

1 Preparation of Site -2 3 -6 The change in land cover is from scrub/ land without scrub to the

industrial use

2 Excavation Work -1 6 -6 This activity would change the topography of the region if not

managed.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED




Sr. No. Impacting Activity Impact Scoring

Remarks S L S x L

S: Severity; L: Likelihood of Occurrence; S x L: Total Score

Mitigation Measures

Necessary efforts will be made to keep more area of green belt in the new leased site for the expansion works

in order to minimize disruption of current land use to the extent possible;

Optimization of land requirement through proper site lay out design with minimal disruption or disturbances to

the surroundings.

4.10 Air Environment

As discussed earlier, environmental aspects and impacts have been identified based on an assessment of

environmental aspects associated with the project, which include emissions:

During Project Design Stage;

During Project Construction;

During Project Operation;

During General Operational phase of Utilities

For the purpose of impact predictions on air environment, emission sources can be classified into point and area

sources. Whilst no area sources have been identified as part of the project, point sources have been identified and

these include stacks attached to various units.

The environmental aspects and impacts on air quality as considered are presented as below:

Table 4-7: Environmental Aspect – Impact on Air Quality

S. No.

Project Activity

Impact (Type: O, N, A, E;

Duration: T, P)

Potential Environmental Impacts on Environment

Remarks

AP/AQ

1 Site selection N,P ● Increase in traffic on state highways

and internal roads in study area

2

Excavation and paving of site, Movement of earth movers, other machinery

etc.

N,T ● Dust Generation

3

Major plant equipment including operation of equipment like crane,

concrete mixtures, vibrators etc

N,T ● Dust Generation

4

Manufacturing Process - Reactions, cooling, Filtration,

Separation, Distillation, Evaporation, Washing &

drying activities

(N, P) ● Emission of VOC, PM and Sulphuric Acid

Fugitive Emissions of Solvents

5 Dispatch and handling of

Products A,T ● Fugitive emissions due to loose packing

6 Transportation of Raw Materials and Products

(N, P) ● SPM generation and emission of HC &

CO

A,T ● Increase in traffic

7 Storage & Handling of

chemicals (N, P) ● Dust Generation

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED




S. No.

Project Activity

Impact (Type: O, N, A, E;

Duration: T, P)

Potential Environmental Impacts on Environment

Remarks

AP/AQ

8 Storage of other hazardous

materials (N, P) ● Dust Generation

9 Operation of DG Set (N, P) ● Flue gas emission of PM, SO2, NOx from boilers, thermic fluid heaters and

DG sets 10 Operation of Boilers and

Incinerator (N, P) ●

11 Storage & Handling of Coal

& Fly Ash (N, P) ● Fugitive emissions of PM

12 Plant & equipment final

decommissioning & Final site clean-up

(N, P) ● Dust Emission due to dismantle activity

Type of Impact – O: One Time; N: Normal; A: Abnormal; E: Emergency;

Duration of Impact – T: Temporary; P: Long-Term/ Permanent. AP/AQ: Air pollution/Air Quality;

M/S. ADANI WILMAR LTD, DHRAB EIA REPORT FOR PROPOSED EXPANSION OF SYNTHETIC ORGANIC CHEMICALS IN EXISTING FACILITY AT VILLAGE DHRAB & MUNDRA,

KUTCH ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS



4.11 Impact Scoring – Air Quality

Potential impact on Air environment/Nearby ambient air quality is tabulated in Table 4-8.

Table 4-8: Impact scoring – Air Environment

S.

No. Project Activity

Identified

Aspect N/AN/E Legal

Impact Scoring Significance /

Consequence

Operation Controls/Mitigation

Measures

EMP

Required Severity,

S Likelihood, L

Final Score,

S x L

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11

1 Site selection

Increase in

traffic on state

highways and

internal roads in

study area

N No -2 2 -4 Minor Impact

Regular water sprinkling shall be

done on unpaved roads used for

transportation; PUC Certified

vehicles shall be used for

transportation. Traffic

management shall be ensured.

No

2

Excavation and

paving of site,

Movement of

earth movers,

other machinery

etc.

Dust Generation N No -2 2 -4 Minor Impact

Barricading shall be done along

the periphery of construction area,

regular water sprinkling shall be

done to suppress dust emission

No

3

Major plant

equipment

including

operation of

equipment like

crane, concrete

mixtures,

vibrators etc






No

4

Manufacturing

Process -

Reactions,

cooling, Filtration,

Separation,

Distillation,

Emission of

VOC, PM and

Sulphuric Acid

Fugitive

Emissions of

Solvents

N No -2 5 -10 Moderately

Severe

Water Sprinkling for dust

suppression, Adequate APCMs for

air emission control shall be

provided, adequate safety

precautions shall be opted, use of

Yes





S.


Identified

Aspect N/AN/E Legal


Consequence


Measures

EMP

Required Severity,

S Likelihood, L

Final Score,

S x L

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11

Evaporation,

Washing & drying

activities

necessary PPEs during cleaning

works.

5

Dispatch and

handling of

Products

Fugitive

emissions due to

loose packing

-2 2 -4 Minor Impact





No

6

Transportation of

raw materials, &

products

Possibility of air

emission due to

leakage/spillage

of chemicals/

materials


Severe

Adequate safety measures along

with spill control mechanism; PUC

Certified vehicles shall be used for

transportation. Traffic

management shall be ensured.

Yes

7

Storage &

Handling of

chemicals






No

8

Storage of other

hazardous

materials

Dust Generation N No -2 2 -4 Minor Impact Sprinkling of water shall be carried

out for dust suppression. No

9 Operation of DG

Set

Flue gas

emission of PM,

SO2, NOx DG

set

N No -2 2 -4 Minor Impact

Adequate Stack height of 30 m

shall be provided for DG sets for

proper dispersion & use during

power failure only.

No

10

Operation of

Boilers and

Incinerator

Flue gas

emission of PM,

SO2, NOx from

boilers, thermic

fluid heaters and

DG sets


Severe

Adequate APCMs for air emission

control shall be provided. Periodic

preventive checks & maintenance.

Yes





S.


Identified

Aspect N/AN/E Legal


Consequence


Measures

EMP

Required Severity,

S Likelihood, L

Final Score,

S x L

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11

11

Storage &

Handling of Coal

& Fly Ash

Fugitive

emissions of PM N No -1 5 -5 Minor Impact





No

12

Plant &

equipment final

decommissioning

& Final site clean-

up

Dust Emission

due to dismantle

activity

N No -1 5 -5 Minor Impact Sprinkling of water shall be carried

out for dust suppression. No

Note: N – Normal, AN – Abnormal, E - Emergency

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED




4.12 Impact Prediction & Mitigation Measures

The purpose of impact prediction on air environment, emission sources can be classified as point source and line

source. Emission from these sources will be predicted for its impacts on the Ground Level Concentration (GLC) at

various distances using the dispersion modelling guidelines given by the Central Pollution Control Board, New Delhi

and by using AERMOD view software.

Operational Phase

Impacts on ambient air, during operation phase, would be;

Flue gases emission due to operation of boilers, use of DG sets of various capacity & due to operation of

Incinerator. Imported coal & HSD used as fuel.

Particulate matter emission from exhaust /vent attached to boilers, incinerator, flare and coal handling etc.

The purpose of impact predictions on air environment, emission sources can be classified as point source. Emissions

from the above mentioned point sources will be predicted for its impacts on the Ground Level Concentration (GLC)

at various distances using the dispersion modelling guidelines given by the Central Pollution Control Board, New

Delhi and i.e. by using AERMOD view software.

Sources of Emissions, Emission Rates & Predicted Ground Level Concentrations (GLCs)

As per the discussions with AWL officials, following relevant data were collected to calculate emission rates of

relevant pollutants from point source due to proposed activities during operation phase:

Quantity of fuel;

Fuel analysis;

Stack details: Internal diameter at top, height, exit gas velocity, temperature

Air pollution control measures have already been undertaken for existing plant and will be implemented for

proposed plant to control ambient air quality.

Based on these assumptions and assumption mentioned in Table 4-9.

Table 4-9: Assumptions for Calculating Emission Estimate for Point Source

S. No. Fuel Source Sulphur

Content, % Ash Content, % Source

1 HSD 50 mg/kg 0.01 Refer Annexure 13

2 Imported Coal 0.9 6 Coal Proximate Analysis – Refer Annexure 14

3 LSHS 1 0.1 LSHS Specification – Refer Annexure 15

Volume Source Emissions

From the proposed project, volume source, emitting PM, is identified as open storage of coal. This is not considered

for dispersion modelling as particulate matter emitted shall not be dispersed too far from the source and maximum

GLCs will be well within the project site itself. Emission rates from coal yard is not considered, as the proposed coal

will be stored in covered storage area.

Line Source Emissions

During construction phase, vehicular emissions will be from use of construction machinery and vehicles. Apart from

it, application of heavy machinery and earth movers will generate emissions. Suitable dust suppression techniques

such as water sprinkling will be done.

During operational phase, additional vehicular movement - 20 trucks per day (which involves vehicular emissions,

majorly PM, CO, HC & NOx.

file:///E:/Tanu/Work%20Tanu_EIA/Other%20Works/Group%201/EIA/Dhrub/AP%20AQ/Coal%20Specification%20for%20Procurement.pdf

file:///E:/Tanu/Work%20Tanu_EIA/Other%20Works/Group%201/EIA/Dhrub/AP%20AQ/LSHS%20Specification%20from%20Earth%20Envirotech%20from%20Adani.pdf



Table 4-10: Emission Estimate for flue gas stacks

Stack

No.

Stack Attached

to

Required

Stack

height,

m

Stack

Ht., m

Stack

Dia.

(Top), m

Stack

Exit

Velocity,

m/s

Stack

Exit

Temp, oK

Stack

Exhaust,

m3/s

Type of

fuel used

Fuel

Consumption

(kg/hour)

Sulphur

Content

in Fuel,

%

SO2

Emitted,

kg/hr

APCM

SO2

Reduction

Efficiency

SO2

Emitted

AFTER

APCM,

gm/sec

Ash

Content in

Fuel, %

PM10

Emitted,

kg/hr

APCM PM10

Reduction

Efficiency

PM10

Emitted

AFTER

APCM,

gm/sec

NOx

Emissions

Norms,

ppm

NOx

Emitted

AFTER

APCM,

gm/sec

Existing Stacks - As per Existing CCA Consent Order No. AWH - 103823, Date of Issue: 28.08.2019 Validity of consent: 14.11.2024 & CTE Amendment No. 169132 received on dated 25.06.2020 & validity upto 16/04/2025

1 Water Tube Boiler -

16 TPH 43 50 1.25 6.8 453 8.4

Imported Coal

2083 1 41.7 98% 0.23 6 124.98 99.99% 0.003 50 0.51


24 TPH 60 54 1.25 7.5 393 9.2

Imported Coal

6250 1 125.0 94% 1.97 6 375.00 99.99% 0.01 50 0.65


24 TPH 53 54 1.05 5.6 393 4.9

Imported Coal

4167 1 83.3 96% 1.04 6 250.02 99.99% 0.01 50 0.34


35 TPH 64 56 1.8 7.1 343 18.1

Imported Coal

7917 1 158.3 90% 4.44 6 475.02 99.99% 0.01 50 1.47


35 TPH 64 56 1.025 6.4 393 5.3

Imported Coal

7917 1 158.3 97% 1.13 6 475.02 99.99% 0.01 50 0.37


32 TPH 58 56 1.025 6.4 393 5.3

Imported Coal

5833 1 116.7 97% 1.13 6 349.98 99.99% 0.01 50 0.37

7 Thermic Fluid Heater - 35 Lkcal/Hr.

34 35 1.2 5.3 403 6.0 LSHS

917 1.0 18.34 85% 0.76 0.1 0.92 0% 0.25 50 0.41

NG 0 0 0% 0.00 0 0.00 0% 0.00 50 0.41

8 Thermic Fluid Heater - 80 Lkcal/Hr.

43 35 1.2 5.3 403 6.0

LSHS

2083

1.0 41.66 95% 0.58 0 0.00 0% 0.00 50 0.41

NG 0 0 0% 0.00 0 0.00 0% 0.00 50 0.41

9 HP Boiler - 2.845

TPH 0 30 1.1 5.6 393 5.3 NG 96 0 0 0% 0.00 6 5.75 62% 0.60 50 0.38

10 HP Boiler - 2.420

TPH 0 30 1.1 6.1 393 5.8 NG 29 0 0 0% 0.00 6 1.75 0% 0.49 50 0.41


TPH 0 30 1.15 6.3 393 6.6 NG 113 0 0 0% 0.00 6 6.75 61% 0.74 50 0.46


TPH 0 30 1.15 6.1 403 6.4 NG 96 0 0 0% 0.00 6 5.75 56% 0.70 50 0.44


TPH 0 30 1.25 5.9 393 7.3 NG 175 0 0 0% 0.00 6 10.50 72% 0.82 50 0.51


TPH 0 30 1.25 5.8 403 7.1 NG 175 0 0 0% 0.00 6 10.50 73% 0.78 50 0.49


TPH 23 30 1.2 6.3 413 7.2 LSHS 267 1.0 5.33 60% 0.59 0.1 0.27 0% 0.07 50 0.48


TPH 11 30 1 6.1 433 4.8 LSHS 25 1.0 0.50 0% 0.14 0.1 0.03 0% 0.01 50 0.31

17 DG Set - 1 - 1250

KVA 1 11 0.2 5.5 358 0.2 HSD 4 50 0.0004 0% 0.00012 0.01 0.0004 0% 0.0001 50 0.01

18 DG Set - 2 - 1250

KVA 1 11 0.2 5.5 358 0.2 HSD 4 50 0.0004 0% 0.00012 0.01 0.0004 0% 0.0001 50 0.01

19 DG Set - 3 - 1500

KVA 2 11 0.2 5.5 358 0.2 HSD 27 50 0.0027 0% 0.0008 0.01 0.003 0% 0.001 50 0.01

20 DG Set - 4 - 1500

KVA 2 11 0.2 5.5 359 0.2 HSD 27 50 0.0027 0% 0.0008 0.01 0.003 0% 0.001 50 0.01

Proposed Stacks

1 Water Tube Boiler (High Pressure)

37 50 1.25 6.5 393 8.0 Imported

Coal 1250 1 25 99% 0.07 6 75.00 99.99% 0.002 50 0.57

2 DG Set - 1 - 1500

KVA 2 30 0.2 5.5 359 0.2 HSD 27 50 0.003 0% 0.0008 0.01 0.003 0% 0.001 50 0.01





Table 4-11: Emission Estimate for Process Vents

S.

No. Stack Attached to

Pollutants

Emitted

Stack

Height

in m

Stack

Dia.

(Top),

m

Stack

Exit

Velocity,

m/s

Stack

Exit

Temp, oK

SO2

Emissions

(GPCB

Norms)

mg/Nm3

SO2

Emission

gm/sec

HCl

Emissions

(GPCB

Norms)

mg/Nm3

HCl

Emission

gm/sec

Acid Mist

Emissions

(As per

CCA)

mg/Nm3

Acid Mist

Emission

gm/sec

Existing

1 Acid Oil Plant Scrubber Acid Mist 15 0.3 5.0 323 - - - - 50 0.02

Proposed

1 Alkali Scrubber 1 SO2 24 0.25 5.5 328 40 0.01 - - - -

2 Water Scrubber HCl 24 0.25 5.5 318 - - 20 0.01 - -

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED




Table 4-12: Line Source Emission

Parameter PM CO HC NOx

S. No. Description Unit

1 Type of road - Paved Paved Paved Paved

2 Vehicle Type - Trucks Trucks Trucks Trucks

3 No. of Vehicles Return Trips

on Stretch - 20 20 20 20

4 Total Time of Vehicular

move-ment, Hr - 10 10 10 10

5 Number of Vehicles per

Hour - 2 2 2 2

6 Length of Road within study area

km 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1

7 m 1112 1112 1112 1112

8 Width of Road, m m 11 11 11 11

9 Area of Vehicle Movement m2 244640 244640 244640 244640

10 Speed of Vehicle, km/hr 20 20 20 20

11 Weight of Truck (W) Tons 20 20 20 20

12 Capacity of Truck KW KW 220 220 220 220

13 Emission Factor gm/kWhr 0.02 1.5 0.96 3.5

14 Emission from one truck gm/hr 4.4 330 211.2 770

15 Emission from total

trucks/hr gm/hr 8.8 660 422.4 1540

16 Emission from trucks gm/(m2.hr) 3.59712E-05 0.002697842 0.001726619 0.006294964

17 Emission from trucks gm/m2.s 1.0E-08 7.5E-07 4.8E-07 1.7E-06

4.12.1 Dispersion Modelling

Emissions from all the proposed stacks were analysed for their impacts on the GLC for various distances using the

dispersion modelling guidelines of AERMOD, developed by the AERMIC (American Meteorological Society

(AMS)/United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA), as directed by CPCB.

About AERMOD

AMS/EPA Regulatory Model (AERMOD) is a steady-state plume model. It is designed to apply to source releases and

meteorological conditions that can be assumed to be steady over individual modelling periods (typically one hour or

less). AERMOD has been designed to handle the computation of pollutant impacts in both flat and complex terrain

within the same modelling framework.

The American Meteorological Society/Environmental Protection Agency Regulatory Model Improvement Committee

(AERMIC) was formed to introduce state-of-the-art modelling concepts into the EPA's air quality models. Through

AERMIC, a modelling system, AERMOD, was introduced that incorporated air dispersion based on planetary

boundary layer turbulence structure and scaling concepts, including treatment of both surface and elevated

sources, and both simple and complex terrain.

AERMET is an input data processor that is one of the regulatory components of the AERMOD modelling system. It

incorporates air dispersion based on planetary boundary layer turbulence structure and scaling concepts. Data flow

in AERMOD modelling system is shown in Figure 4-1.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED




Figure 4-1: Data Flow in AERMOD Modelling System

Meteorological Parameters

The hourly meteorological data considered were wind speed, wind direction, ambient atmospheric temperature,

cloud cover, humidity & rainfall.

Other Assumptions

The dispersion modelling assumptions considered are as follows:

The terrain of the study area was considered as FLAT;

Stability class and Atmospheric inversion level is based on software’s database.

Since, no AAQ norms of SPM is available, it is assumed the entire PM emitted from flue gas stack is PM10.

Other assumptions to evaluate emission estimate are provided in Table 4-10, Table 4-11 & Table 4-12.

Results

Air dispersion modelling results with predicted GLC (Isopleths) from proposed activity, mainly due to point source &

line source of all parameters are provided in Annexure 30.

Maximum 24 hourly average GLC’s for PM10, SO2 & NOx and hourly average GLC’s for HC & CO for point sources are

tabulated in Table 4-13.

Table 4-13: Summary of Air Dispersion Modelling for Proposed Stacks

Sr. No. Parameters Number of

Point Sources Maximum GLC, µg/m3

Distance in

meters w.r.t. site

Direction w.r.t.

site

1 PM10 1 0.004 250 E

2 SO2 2 0.24 250 E

3 NOx 1 1.03 250 ENE

4 HCl 1 0.147 250 NNE

Maximum 24 hourly average GLC’s for PM10, NOx & hourly for HC, CO for line sources are tabulated in Table 4-14.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED




Table 4-14: Summary of Air Dispersion Modelling Results for Line Source Emissions

Sr.

No. Parameters

Number of Line

Sources Maximum GLC, µg/m3

Distance in

meters w.r.t.

site

Direction

w.r.t. site

1 PM10 2 0.34 500 WSW

2 NOx 1 14.17 500 WSW

3 HC 1 4.02 500 WSW

4 CO 1 0.01 500 WSW

The worst case is predicted as the sum of average baseline monitored value of a parameter and the incremental

GLC at the monitoring location due to the proposed activities / emissions as tabulated in Table 4-15.

Table 4-15: 24 Hr Average Incremental Increase in GLC from Proposed Project

Sr. No.

Village Name (Distance in

km/Direction) Pollutant Unit

CPCB Limit Concentration

(24 Hrs)

Baseline Concentration

(Avg.)

Incremental GLC Total

Predictive GLC due to proposed project

Point Source

Line Source

1 At Project Site

(Dhrab) (0.5Km NE)

PM10 µg/m3 100 87 0.003 0.12 87.1

SO2 µg/m3 80 8.5 0.23 - 8.7

NOX µg/m3 80 16.1 0.85 4.85 21.8

HC µg/m3 NS 977 - 1.37 978.4

CO mg/m3 4* 0.84 - 0.002 0.8

HCl µg/m3 NS 0.3 0.107 - 0.4

PM2.5 µg/m3 60 26 - 0.02 26

2

Dhrab Village

(GLC area) (1.4 Km S)

PM10 µg/m3 100 77 0 0.03 77

SO2 µg/m3 80 8.9 0.02 - 8.9

NOX µg/m3 80 18.3 0.08 1.04 19.4

HC µg/m3 NS 1023 - 0.28 1023.3

CO mg/m3 4* 0.8 - 0 0.8

HCl µg/m3 NS 0.3 0.011 - 0.3

PM2.5 µg/m3 60 20 - 0 20

3 Nana Kapaya

(1.95 Km NNW)

PM10 µg/m3 100 74 0 0 74

SO2 µg/m3 80 9 0.02 - 9.0

NOX µg/m3 80 16.9 0.09 0.08 17.1

HC µg/m3 NS 936 - 0.02 936

CO mg/m3 4* 0.78 - 0 0.8

HCl µg/m3 NS 0.5 0.018 - 0.5

PM2.5 µg/m3 60 19 - 0 19

4 Adani Township (2.25 Km SE)

PM10 µg/m3 100 73 0 0.01 73

SO2 µg/m3 80 8 0 - 8

NOX µg/m3 80 15.3 0.02 0.52 15.8

HC µg/m3 NS 926 - 0.15 926.2

CO mg/m3 4* 0.74 - 0 0.7

HCl µg/m3 NS 0.2 0.001 - 0.2

PM2.5 µg/m3 60 19 - 0 19

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED




Sr. No.

Village Name (Distance in

km/Direction) Pollutant Unit

CPCB Limit Concentration

(24 Hrs)

Baseline Concentration

(Avg.)

Incremental GLC Total

Predictive GLC due to proposed project

Point Source

Line Source

5 Jarpara

(4.7 Km W)

PM10 µg/m3 100 76 0 0 76

SO2 µg/m3 80 8.2 0.02 - 8.2

NOX µg/m3 80 17.9 0.07 0.07 18

HC µg/m3 NS 941 - 0.02 941

CO mg/m3 4* 0.83 - 0 0.8

HCl µg/m3 NS 0.4 0.025 - 0.4

PM2.5 µg/m3 60 20 - 0 20

6 Mangra

(4.9 Km NE)

PM10 µg/m3 100 73 0 0 73

SO2 µg/m3 80 9 0.01 - 9.0

NOX µg/m3 80 18.2 0.08 0.19 18.5

HC µg/m3 NS 982 - 0.05 982.1

CO mg/m3 4* 0.79 - 0 0.8

HCl µg/m3 NS 0.4 0.004 - 0.4

PM2.5 µg/m3 60 16 - 0 16

7 Pragpar

(7.4 Km N)

PM10 µg/m3 100 57 0 0 57

SO2 µg/m3 80 8.7 0 - 8.7

NOX µg/m3 80 18.3 0 0.01 18.3

HC µg/m3 NS 974 - 0 974

CO mg/m3 4* 0.83 - 0.00001 0.8

HCl µg/m3 NS 0.2 0.005 - 0.2

PM2.5 µg/m3 60 19 - 0 19

8 Borana

(4.1 Km NW)

PM10 µg/m3 100 63 0 0 63

SO2 µg/m3 80 7.8 0.02 - 7.8

NOX µg/m3 80 14.1 0.06 0.05 14.2

HC µg/m3 NS 981 - 0.01 981

CO mg/m3 4* 0.89 - 0 0.9

HCl µg/m3 NS 0.4 0.02 - 0.4

PM2.5 µg/m3 60 18 - 0 18

Mitigation Measures

General Mitigation Measures proposed for Air Quality Control during Operation Phase:

High efficient ESPs along with water scrubber will be provided for flue gas stacks.

Bag-filter is provided on crusher house to reduce PM emission.

Greenbelt will be developed at the facility.

Attenuation of pollution/protection of receptor through greenbelt/green cover.

All vehicles shall be PUC Certified from time to time.

Adequate stack height will be provided to boilers, thermic fluid heaters and DG sets.

Water scrubbers for SO2 reduction will be provided.

APC like Alkali scrubber and Water Scrubber for Process vent will be provided;

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED




Effective water spraying will be done on the access roads to control re-entrained dust during dry season (if

required);

Proper operating procedures will be followed during startup and shutdown;

Proper PPE like dust masks will be provided to workers and its use ensured;

Regular monitoring of air polluting concentrations.

Regular Work place monitoring will be done.

4.13 Incremental Increase in Traffic

Traffic survey for the proposed project was carried out at two locations on main approach roads to the project site.

For traffic flow towards Mundra (Zero Point) (Up) & towards Adani Port (Down) (7 m wide) – Location

coordinate is 22°49'33.9456" N and 69°33'54.8124" E

The vehicle count was recorded at every 15 min. interval for 24 hours. Traffic Survey sheets are presented in

Annexure 16.

Details of traffic survey with total vehicle count over 24 hour time duration, summary of existing traffic survey

(peak hourly) for up & down traffic flow is presented in Table 3-20, Table 3-21 & Table 3-22 respectively in

Chapter 3.

Summary of traffic survey (peak hourly) given in peak hours are considered from 06:00 to 20:00 hours. Proposed

PCU/day as per incremental traffic due to the proposed project is summarised in Table 4-16.

Table 4-16: Proposed PCU/day as per Incremental traffic due to the proposed project

S.


No. of

Vehicles % Composition

Equivalent

factor** PCU

Mechanized Vehicles


2 Passenger Car, Pick-up Van or Auto

Rickshaw 0 0 1.00 0

3 Agricultural Tractor, Light Commercial

Vehicle 0 0 1.50 0

4 Truck or Bus 20 100 3.00 60


Non-mechanized Vehicles

6 Cycle 0 0 0.50 0


8 Hand Cart 0 0 3.00 0



Total 20 100 -- 60

Detail of resultant combined final scenario of incremental traffic due to the project is as Table 4-17.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED




Table 4-17: Final scenario of incremental traffic due to the proposed in project and capacity of roads

Sr.

No.

Traffic flow on

the road

Width

(mtr)

Existing Proposed

Total

Service

Volume

(PCU/

day)

Total

design

Service

Volume

(PCU/

day)

Type of

Carriage Way Vehicle

Count

/Day

Vehicles

Count

(PCU/

Day)

as per

IRC

All

Vehicle

Count

/day

All

Vehicles

(PCU/

day)

as per

IRC

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10

1

Mundra (Zero

point) to Adani

Port 7.0

2507 4578 10 30 4608

15000

Two Lane

Roads (7.0 m

wide) 2

Adani Port to

Mundra (Zero

point)

2199 3329 10 30 3359

Total - 4706 7907 20 60 7967

Note: *As per IRC 64-1990 – Guidelines for Capacity of Roads in Rural Areas (First Revision), The Indian Roads

Congress, Chapter 8, Section 8.1 Table 2 – Plain Road with Design Service Capacity of 15000 PCU per day for Plain

Two-Lane Road.

The calculated PCU per Hour for both existing and proposed vehicle count indicates that PCU are well below

recommended design service volume as per guidelines of IRC: 64-1990: Guidelines for Capacity of Rural Roads with

Two Lanes in Plain Areas.

Based on the traffic survey conducted, it is summarized as below:

Traffic flow in both directions on the road is 4578 (from Mundra (Zero point) to Adani Port) and 3329 PCU

(from Adani Port to Mundra (Zero point) ) respectively;

From the proposed project, additional 60 PCU’s per day will be added on this road;

Thus, the maximum PCU on the road will be 4608 & 3359 PCU/day respectively.

As per IRC, carrying capacity of this approach road of 7 m wide carriageway 2 - Lane (Two way) road has carrying

capacity of 15000 PCU/day.

Thus, the roads are capable of carrying the excess traffic from the proposed project.

Impacts due to Transportation

Increase in transportation will lead to increase in road traffic;

Dispersion of dust and particulate matters from truck transporting goods;

Emission of pollutants like SO2, CO & NOx;

Mitigation Measures

Mitigation measures to minimize impacts on air quality due to proposed project activities:

Traffic will be regulated through proper signage, instruction & parking spaces;

Parking spaces will be provided;

Speed limit will be minimum to reduce traffic congestion;

Signboard shall be provided for smooth traffic flow and also inculcate trucks, other employees & workers to

follow traffic rules;

Vehicles shall be PUC certified

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED




Fugitive Emission & Control Tehnologies

Fugitive emissions are emissions of gases or vapours from equipment due to leaks and other unintended or

irregular releases of gases, mostly from industrial activities. As well as the economic cost of lost commodities,

fugitive emissions contribute to air pollution and climate change.

Fugitive emissions present other risks and hazards. Emissions of volatile organic compounds pose a long term

health risk to workers and local communities. From the proposed project, solvents are the major in fugitive

emission, to control condenser system will be provided. In situations where large amounts of flammable liquids and

gases are contained under pressure, leaks also increase the risk of fire and explosion.

Leaks from process equipment generally occur through valves, pipe connections, mechanical seals, or related

equipment. Though the quantities of leaked gases may be small, gases that have serious health or environmental

impacts can cause a significant problem.

To minimize and control leaks at process facilities operators carry out regular leak detection and repair activities.

Sources of Secondary Emission & Control

Fugitive emissions from the proposed project would be significant as there will be air pollution due to activities like

material handling and transfer points of materials and movement of vehicles. Fugitive emissions are also likely to

occur during leak from pumps, valves and pipes or leak/ spill from storage vessels/ facilities. Mainly, the loss of Di-

Methyl from Amide, Methanol, Phenol, Iso Butyl Alcohol, Alkyl Benzene, Mono Chloro Benzene are likely to occur as

fugitive emissions from the proposed project.

Action Plan for Fugitive Emission Control

The fugitive emissions of organic chemicals and VOCs mainly occur due to tank breathing losses, leaking pipe fitting

and valves, during maintenance operations. Though, these are not expected to be significant, the following

measures will be tracked to ensure compliance and further reductions wherever possible:

The fugitive emissions in terms of handling losses will get reduced by proper storage and handling.

Adequately designed storage area with efficient air change ratio, handling & transport facilities shall be provided

for fuel, raw materials & products.

Raw Materials & Products will be stored in closed containers. These containers will be kept under the shade to

prevent the fugitive emission at elevated temperature.

Hazardous chemicals will be stored as per standard criteria.

Internal concrete roads will be constructed in plant for the prevention of dust during vehicular movement.

Adequate air ventilation system of sufficient capacity will be provided in the entire production plant.

Proper ventilation in storage & production area shall be ensured and all materials must be stored in suitable

packing to prevent contamination of air due to particulates & volatile emissions from storage container & area.

Enclosed system & efficient procedures for materials charging shall be ensured.

Procedures for start-up shut down, operation & maintenance procedures shall be established & maintained in all

relevant area of works.

Proper implementation of safety procedures and efficient use of safety arrangements, facilities & equipment shall

be ensured at all time of operation to prevent accidental release of materials & fuels as well as prevent fire

hazard.

Safety PPEs like dust mask, etc. will be provided from dust protection.

The coverage of greenbelt around the plant also acts as natural barrier to stop carrying of dust along with the

wind current.

Good housekeeping will be maintained in the plant.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED




4.14 Noise Environment

The proposed expansion project related activities will lead to emission of noise that may have minor impact on the

surrounding communities in terms of minor increase in noise levels. The potential impacts on noise level may arise

out of the following:

Noise from Machinery

During operation phase, the machinery will be used during daytime and are expected to emit noise within

permissible limits. Thus, there will not be any adverse impact on nearby habitation due to proposed expansion

project activity.

Noise from Vehicle /Traffic

Vehicle movement for transportation of materials and work force to the site will cause minor noise emission as the

frequency of vehicular movement is less.

Noise from DG sets, cooling tower etc.

Noise generated from Cooling Tower, DG Set etc. will have a permanent effect to the workers working in the

nearby vicinity, if they will work for more hours in a day.

On the basis of identified aspects from project activities, impact scores and operational controls / mitigation

measures on air environment are tabulated in Table 4-18.

Table 4-18 : Aspect-Impact Identification from Proposed Project

S.

No. Project Activities / Aspects

Impact Scoring

Remarks S L S × L

1. Construction Phase

1.1 Preparation of site -2 3 -6

Development of greenbelt around plant boundary. Imposing speed limit on

transport vehicles. Ensuring periodic maintenance of the transport vehicles.

1.2 Vehicular movement for

transportation of construction materials and equipment

-2 3 -6 Providing mufflers on vehicles for control

of noise.

1.3 Excavation work -2 3 -6 Development of green belt. Temporary

noise barriers may be erected along plant boundary.

1.4 Filling of foundation -2 3 -6 Development of green belt. Temporary

noise barriers may be erected along plant boundary.

1.5 Heavy fabrication work

including metal cutting (Gas cutting, welding)

-2 3 -6

Using PPEs, face mask, Earplug and Earmuffs will be provided to workers. Fabrication works to be carried out in enclosed areas with noise barriers.

2 Operational Phase

2.1 Transportation of Raw Materials

and Products -2 3 -6

Imposing speed limit on transport vehicles within the site premises.

2.2 Operation of DG Set -2 3 -6 Proper acoustic enclosures will be

provided.

2.3 Operation of Water heat Boilers -2 3 -6 Earplug and Earmuffs will be provided to

workers.

4. Decommissioning Phase

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED




S.


Impact Scoring

Remarks S L S × L

4.1

Dismantling of following; 1. Pipeline & Fittings

2. Vessels or equipment 3. Steel structure 4. Civil Structure

-2 3 -6 SOP’s will be followed. Earplugs and Earmuffs will be provided to workers.


Assessment of Noise using SoundPLAN

Noise modeling study was done using the Software tool called “SoundPLAN” which predicts the Noise Map

generated due to the sources present at the project site, and predicts the Noise Levels at various receiver points

due to the sources present at the project site.

To analyze the Noise Map of the project site, first, the geometrically coordinated Google Earth images of the Project

site were imported into the software. Various Sources of noise were added with their approximate Sound Pressure

Levels, and the “Receiver points” were added at various locations where Noise Monitoring was conducted.

“SoundPlan” generates the Noise Map with colored pattern isoplates, which indicate whether or not the SPL in that

particular region is above the limits mentioned by CPCB or not. If the Limit for Sound Pressure Level indicated by

CPCB for that particular area is 75 dB during the day, and if the predicted SPL is below that, the Noise Map will

show Green colour for that area. But if the SPL is above the “user set” allowable limit, the same will be shown in

Red colour depending upon the Difference between then Predicted SPL and the Allowable SPL, and the “Conflict” in

SPL is mentioned in the table if any conflict is predicted.

Consideration during the analysis

The sources considered at the project site for the analysis with their approximate Sound Pressure Levels are

considered slightly on the higher side for more critical analysis. The sources of noise considered are as Table 4-19.

Table 4-19: Sources of noise with their sound pressure levels

S .No. Sources Levels dB(A)*

1. D.G Set 85

2. Cooling Tower 85

3. Pump 85

4. Boiler 90

5. Dryer 95

6. Reactor 85

* - Source of DB (A) levels are taken based on observation readings on several other projects

Isopleths are generated for daytime and night time SPLs, using the above considerations and are shown in Figure

4-2 & Figure 4-3.


KUTCH ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL



Figure 4-2: Isopleths for incremental noise generated during day time


KUTCH ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL



Figure 4-3: Isopleths for incremental noise generated during night time

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS &

MITIGATION MEASURES


Observations

The sound pressure levels were predicted at different sources as mentioned above. The observations are:

The project site is an industrial area, where the CPCB limits defined for Noise Levels are 75 dB during the day

and 70 dB during the night. However, sound pressure levels are considered on higher side for more critical

analysis.

The maximum predicted cumulative noise levels due to plant operations at the boundary of the project site was

observed to be 67.9 dB(A). The noise levels further reduce with distance and the resultant noise levels at the

nearby habitations are below 55 dB(A).

From Figure 4-2 and Figure 4-3, it can be observed at project site and in nearby habitations, the resultant

ambient noise levels will be within the permissible limit for industrial area and Residential area.

The predicted noise levels along with the incremental values are as presented in Table 4-20.

Table 4-20: Noise level at receptor locations

S.

No. Receiver Name Category

CPCB Limits in dB

(A)

Baseline Average

Noise levels in dB

(A)

Predicted

Cumulative Noise

Levels, dB(A)

Predicted

Incremental

Noise Levels,

dB(A)

Day Night

Day Night Day Night Day Night

A B C

Baseline

Results

Algorithmic

Calculation C=B-A

1 Near Main Gate (At Site) Industrial 75.0 70.0 67.9 61.2 67.9 61.3 0.0 0.1

2 Near South Corner

Boundary of the Site Industrial 75.0 70.0 65.6 61.2 65.7 61.3 0.1 0.1

3 Proposed Expansion Site Industrial 75.0 70.0 65.1 62.4 65.1 62.4 0.0 0.0

4 Near North Boundary of

the Site Industrial 75.0 70.0 64.7 60.7 64.9 61.0 0.2 0.3

5 Sukhpar Habitation

(Mundra) Residential 55.0 45.0 54.2 44.7 54.2 44.7 0.0 0.0

6 Jhulelal Park 1

Habitation (Mundra) Residential 55.0 45.0 54.1 44.2 54.1 44.3 0.0 0.1

7 Dhrab village Residential 55.0 45.0 54.8 44.7 54.8 44.7 0.0 0.0

8 Adani Township Gate Residential 55.0 45.0 54.9 44.1 54.9 44.1 0.0 0.0

Conclusion

From the noise level prediction conducted using SoundPlan software, it is observed that no significant increase will

be caused in the ambient noise levels due to the proposed project expansion activities. The cumulative noise levels

after expansion will remain within the permissible limits. SoundPlan analysis is carried out assuming that there are

no obstructions (such as trees, buildings, walls, enclosures, etc.) in between the receiver locations and the sources

of sound, which is not true in real conditions. Therefore, the actual ambient noise levels will be much lower than

that predicted by SoundPlan as presented in above table.

Mitigation Measures

Although there was no significant increase predicted at any of the noise monitoring locations outside the project site,

the noise environment also includes the people who are working within the project site, and who may face permanent

hearing damage in case they face the Workplace Noise Dosage beyond the permissible limits. Therefore, it is

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED


MITIGATION MEASURES


important to implement adequate noise control measures in order to meet regulatory requirements and avoid any

permanent hearing damage to the people working inside the project site.

AWL is already adopting necessary noise control measures as given below and the same will be further strengthened

in the proposed expansion project. Additional noise control measures will be adopted, wherever required.

Provision of Acoustic Enclosures on major noise generating stationary equipment in the plant

Provision of suitable personal protective equipment (PPE) such as earmuffs and earplugs to Workers exposed

to high noise generating operations/area.

Job Rotation of workers working in the high noise area.

Identification of High noise generating areas and marking with display board for warning.

Development of thick Green belt within the plant premises and along project boundary to screen noise.

Provision of Acoustic mufflers / enclosures in large engines/machinery.

All equipment operated within specified design parameters.

Equipment to be maintained in good working order.

Implement good working practices (equipment selection) to minimize noise and reduce its impacts on human

health (earmuffs, safe distances, and enclosures).

Periodic monitoring of ambient noise levels in the plant premises and Noise Exposure levels for workers

deputed in different sections in the plant. Based on the monitoring results, effectiveness of noise control

measures will be identified and additional noise control measures will be adopted, if required.

4.14.1 Vibrations

Impacts due to vibrations

Vibrations are generated in the machines due to moving / rotating parts.

Hand arm vibration (HAV) is a potential hazard for employees who work with hand held tools, hand guided

machinery or feed work by hand to a machine where this exposes their hands and arms to high levels of vibration.

Prolonged and regular exposure to excessive levels of HAV can affect the operator’s health in particular causing

Hand Arm Vibration Syndrome (HAVS), of which the best-known condition is Vibration White Finger (VWF). The

other impacts of HAV are decreased grip strength, decreased hand sensation and dexterity and Carpal tunnel

syndrome.

Whole body vibration (WBV) is mainly concerned with large shocks or jolts when there is a risk of injury to the back

and usually applies to workers in the sitting or standing position when travelling in mobile machinery over rough

surfaces for extended periods. The major health problem associated with WBV is back pain.

Prolonged exposure to excessive levels of vibration can cause incurable conditions and severely affect the sufferer’s

ability to continue work and the quality of their life. The amount of injury is related to the magnitude of vibration

generated by the work equipment, the duration of the exposure and other factors such as the method of work,

workplace temperature and damp or windy conditions.

Exposure Limit values: (Ref: Schedule XXIV, Model Factory Rules 120)

1. For Hand Arm Vibration:

(a). The daily exposure Limit value is 5m/s2

(b). The daily exposure action value is 2.5 m/s2

2. For Whole Body Vibration:

(a). The daily exposure Limit value is 1.15m/s2

(b). The daily exposure action value is 0.5 m/s2

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED


MITIGATION MEASURES


Proposed Vibration Control Measures

The following control measures are proposed to be adopted in the proposed activities to minimize the impacts due

to vibrations:

Procurement of less vibration generating machines/equipment.

Periodic preventive maintenance of all the machines/equipment.

Provision of hand gloves to operators.

Use vibration dampeners for all the equipment.

Provision vibration absorbing seats in transportation and other heavy vehicles.

Periodic training to workers on how to prevent health problems caused by vibration.

Job rotation and frequent rest breaks to workers exposed to high vibration jobs.

Periodic medical examination of the workers.

4.15 Water Environment & Hazardous Waste

Based on this preliminary identification, environmental indices that are likely to be impacted on ground and surface

water quality during the operation phase and which are discussed in further detail.

4.15.1 Impacts Scoring on Surface Water & Hazardous Waste Management

Likely impact scores on surface water environment and Hazardous waste management are presented in Table

4-21.

Table 4-21: Impact Scoring for Surface Water

S.


Impact Scoring Remarks

S L S × L

1 Usage of Water -2 2 -4 Adequate measures to be taken to

reduce fresh water demand.

2 Painting -2 2 -4 Empty carboys will be sold to recyclers.

3 Transportation of Raw Materials


Proper care shall be taken during raw material transportation and handling to avoid Possibility of contamination due to

leakage or spillage of chemicals/ materials

4 Usage of Water -2 2 -4

No disposal of untreated sewage and effluent on surface water body. ETP sludge will be stored at designated

hazardous waste storage area.

5 Operation of ETP -2 5 -10 The waste water will be treated in ZLD

plant comprising of RO and MEE

6 Equipment and Floor Washing -2 2 -4 The waste water will be treated in ZLD

plant comprising of RO and MEE

7 Storm water management -2 2 -4 Mixing of process drain water with Storm

water drains during heavy rains.

8 Dismantling of structures of the

project components -2 5 -10

Proper care shall be taken during raw material transportation and handling to

avoid spillage and leakage

S: Severity; L: Likelihood of Occurrence; S x P: Total Score

Mitigation Measures for Impacts on Surface Water Sources and Quality

Following mitigation measures will be implemented to reduce surface water related impacts:

ZLD concept shall be followed to avoid effluent discharge outside the premises.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED


MITIGATION MEASURES


Drip irrigation system will be proposed to reduce fresh water demand for gardening.

Proper operation and maintenance of effluent treatment plant will be done to ensure meeting specified disposal

standards and also no discharge of untreated waste water on land, avoiding leakages;

Provide separate drainage for storm water and effluent to avoid any contamination of surface water sources;

All chemical and fuel storage and handling areas will be provided with proper bunds to avoid run-off

contamination.

Hazardous Wastes will be properly handled in containers and properly stored in hazardous waste storage areas

as per rules and also bunding will be provided to avoid overflow of spillage waters which can contaminate the

surroundings.

Provision & installation of water meter, pH meter & other devices (as mandated by GPCB) at the outlet point to

measure quality & quantity of effluent discharged.

Mitigation Measures for Impacts on Hazardous Waste

Hazardous Wastes will be properly handled in containers and properly stored in hazardous waste storage areas

as per rules and also bunding will be provided to avoid overflow of spillage waters which can contaminate the

surroundings.

Recyclable waste will be handed over to authorized recyclers and other ETP sludge will be sent to TSDF facility.

4.15.2 Ground water & Geology

Impact on Geology

The project site area falls in seismic zone 5 and therefore, in eventuality of the occurrence of earthquake

changes in surface and sub-surface environment cannot be ruled out.

Impact on Geo Hydrological condition of the surrounding area

Due to this and other activities resulted from all other industrial development in surrounding area is going to

impose additional stress on surface and ground water resources of this area.

Minor changes in natural physical properties of top soil layer are likely due to the present as well as future

activities, as a result, there will be reduction in effective infiltrating top soil area and contributing infiltration to

underneath aquifer. Consequent upon it there will be reduction in recharge to underneath groundwater aquifer.

The top soil covers in and around the present project site is sandy, which is a cause of concern as it can make

easy entry of pollutant into the subsurface environment. And therefore, entry of such pollutant from top soil

cover may likely to pollute ground water reservoir which is having limited lateral and vertical extent.

Present as well as future water requirement at this project site is from surface water sources – GWIL. This does

not mean that there will not be any kind of impact on groundwater. Due to this development, the use of

groundwater for ancillary activity within as well as outside the project area is likely to deteriorate groundwater

quality. As this area is having limited ground water resource, all possible measures need to be taken for its

conservation.

In eventuality of developing cracks in flooring, the possibility of likely leakage of liquid chemical, and oil

through these cracks is likely which may pollute the groundwater quality.

In any eventuality, if a part of water requirement is to be met from desalination plant of company, waste

generated from desalination plant is going to be disposed into sea; this project is near coastal area which is

under the influence of tidal flow & sea water intrusion, due to increase in ground water use for domestic and

irrigation. Water level of both unconfined and semi confined aquifer shows falling trend, and consequent upon

possibility in acceleration in reversal of ground water gradient which cannot be ruled out.

Though ground water is not used at this project site, adequate measures need to be taken along coast to

increase the recharge to underneath aquifer for restricting / controlling falling trend in water level

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED


MITIGATION MEASURES


Table 4-22: Impact scoring on Groundwater

S. No. Project Activities / Aspects

Impact Scoring

Remarks S L S × L

1 Storage and Handling of Chemicals -1 2 -2 Avoid the leakage and contamination of

groundwater

2 Draining of process vessel, brine solution, Cooling water system or

refrigeration system -1 2 -2

The storage is having impervious base and guard around the structure to

restrict flow

3 Transportation of Raw Materials


It is assumed that storage is having impervious base and guard around the

structure to restrict flow

4 Operation of ETP -1 2 -2 Draining effluent mixed with ground

water and Soil

5 Sludge removal, storage and

disposal -5 2 -10

Leachate of sludge mixed in ground water and Soil

6 Dismantling of structures of the

project components -5 2 -10

To conduct due diligence for soil & ground water on primary phase to

ensure no contamination.


Mitigation

Although, this area is in close vicinity of sea, ground water quality within the depth of +100 meter below

ground level is good due to presence of appreciable extent of vertical and horizontal sandy strata.

Maximum area needs to be brought under plantation for enhancing permeability of top soil layer due to root

action of plant, consequent upon which there will be increase in recharge into underneath ground water

aquifer. It may also allow more retention time for better recharge rate.

Necessary infrastructure needs to be created for diverting, collecting and storing run-off water at low lying

area/natural depression that give more retention time for enhancing infiltration of collected run-off water. Such

areas need to be earmarked for constructing rainwater recharge structure outside plant area.

Top layer of soil is sandy. The storage area as well as surrounding area should be provided proper impervious

flooring. At bottom of this flooring impervious layer using bentonite clay should be provided to

reduce/eradicated any likely leakage of any chemical, oil, petroleum product through development of any

cracks.

4.16 Soil Environment

It has been observed that the soil quality gets impacted by activities like excavation work, transportation and

storage of chemicals. On the basis of that, impact scoring with respect to soil quality was carried out and presented

in Table 4-23.

Table 4-23: Impact scoring for Soil

S. No. Project Activities /

Aspects


S L S × L

1 Vehicular movement for transportation of coal,

materials and equipment -2 2 -4

Impact due to spillage of hazardous materials will be moderate

2 Excavation work -2 2 -4 Top soil will be preserved to be used

for greenbelt development, hence moderate impact

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED


MITIGATION MEASURES



Aspects


S L S × L

3 Construction material storage and disposal

-3 2 -6 Spillage of construction materials may affect soil quality due to its alkaline

nature and soils are having alkaline pH.

4 Storage and Handling of

Chemicals -2 2 -4

Spillage of stored materials may have minor impact on soil quality

5 Transportation of Raw Materials and Products

-2 2 -4 Accidental spillage may have moderate

effect on soil quality during transportation of chemicals

6 Storage, handling and

disposal of solid/hazardous waste

-2 2 -4 Accidental spillage may have moderate effect on soil quality during handling

and disposal of hazardous wastes

7 Operation of ETP -2 2 -4 ETP solid and liquid wastes may have

moderate effect on soil quality

8 Landscaping and greenbelt

area development 2 3 6

Positive impact on soil as there will be reduction in soil loss due to water &

wind.

9

Draining of process vessel, brine solution, Cooling

water system or refrigeration system

-2 2 -4 Not much impact on soil quality due to spillage and release of gases on soil

quality

10 Sludge removal, storage

and disposal -2 2 -4

Spillage of sludge may not have great impact on soil quality

11 Washing of process

equipment, pipeline, tanks etc.

-3 2 -6 May affect soil quality due to spillage of

washings of equipment etc.

12 Dismantling of structures of

the project components -2 2 -4

Due to spillage of debris and will be maintained well.


Mitigation Measures

Spillage of chemicals etc. should be taken care of while loading, unloading and transportation.

Care may be taken while cleaning the site at the initial and final stages and storage of top soil.

Spillage of construction materials and ETP/STP wastes should be taken care of to avoid soil contamination.

4.17 Ecology & Biodiversity Environment

4.17.1 Ecology Impact Assessment Methodology

Impacts on ecological components were identified by following various steps which are explained in detail in

following sections:

Determination of Activities Likely Impacting Ecological Components

Broader level determination of ecological components like Terrestrial Flora (TFL), Terrestrial Fauna (TFA) etc has

been performed on the basis of activities and associated activities involved at the different phases of project.

Possible Impacts

During construction phase, increase in deposition of dust and dust settling on the existing vegetation may alter

or limit the plant’s abilities to Photosynthesize and / or reproduce.

Habitation fragmentation due to clearance of existing scrub cover during site preparation.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED


MITIGATION MEASURES


Mitigation Measures

The developed greenbelt and green cover in the project area would increase the flora and fauna density in the area

at the project site.

Considering the above mitigation measures the impact scores on biological environment are likely to be as

mentioned in Table 4-24.

Table 4-24: Impact Scoring for Ecology and Biodiversity


Aspects

Impact Scoring

Remarks Severity,

S

Likelihood,

L

Final score,

S × L

1

Major plant equipment including operation of equipment like crane,

concrete mixtures, vibrators etc. due to this noise and

dust will be generate.

-1 5 -5

No plantation available surrounding construction area, Moreover, greenbelt

will be developed with additional species so which will support existing

faunal biodiversity

2 Emission of, PM, VOC and

Sulphuric Acid -3 4 -12

No plantation available surrounding construction area, Greenbelt will be developed with additional species so

which will support existing faunal biodiversity

3 Possibility of contamination due to leakage or spillage of chemicals/ materials

-1 1 -1

No plantation available surrounding construction area, Greenbelt will be developed with additional species so

which will support existing faunal biodiversity

4

Flue gas emission of PM, SO2, NOx from boilers,

thermic fluid heaters and DG sets

-1 4 -4 No plantation available surrounding

construction area

5

Damage to Flora/ Fauna found in soil due to draining

of process vessel, brine solution, Cooling water system or refrigeration

system (Ammonia)

-1 1 -1

All chemical parameter in the discharged water shall be kept in

permissible limit of wastewater. The discharge on the soil will be avoided


4.18 Socio Economics

The impact scores on socio economic environment are likely to be as mentioned in Table 4-25.

Table 4-25: Impact scoring of Socio-economic

Code Impacting

Activity

Impact Scoring

Remarks Severity, S Likelihood, L Final score, S × L

A Project Pre- Construction/ Construction

1 Site selection +1 5 (+5)

Social Consequences - Local or persons from outside can be

employed temporarily, so there can be <0.5% increase in migration of

the study area (-2); there will be no change in the ethnicity (-1); not

likely gender imbalance in the study

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED


MITIGATION MEASURES


Code Impacting

Activity

Impact Scoring


area (-1); possibility to return the status (0); Total = (-4); Economic Consequences – 100 (temporary) jobs gained (+2); Gain in income (+3); land losers (0); Homestead

losers (0); Total=+5

Grand Total = +01

2

Heavy fabrication work for erecting

major plant equipment including

operation of equipment like crane, concrete

mixtures, vibrators etc.

+1 5 (+5)




likely gender imbalance in the study area (-1); possibility to return the status (0); Total = (-4); Economic Consequences – 100 (temporary) jobs gained (+2); Gain in income (+3); land losers (0); Homestead


Grand Total = +01

3

Vehicular movement for

transportation of raw materials and

finished goods

+1 5 (+5)

Local vehicles will be hired for transportation of material. Jobs

gained<50 (+1); loss of income (0); land losers (0); Homestead losers

(0); Total = +1

4 Influx of workers +1 5 (+5)






Grand Total = +01

B Commissioning / Project Operation

5 Influx of workers +1 5 (+5)






Grand Total = +01

6 Contribution to state and central

+5 5 (25) Likely tax revenue to state and

central Government

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED


MITIGATION MEASURES


Code Impacting

Activity

Impact Scoring


exchequers by way of taxes and duty

C Decommissioning of plant

7 Dismantling of plant -3 2 (-6)

Economic Consequences – 100 (Direct/Indirect) jobs lost (-2);loss

in income (-1); land losers (0); Homestead losers (0); Total=-3

4.18.1 Occupational Health and Risk to Surrounding Community

Due to Storage of Hazardous Chemicals

This includes,

Hazards Identification,

Selection of Potential Loss Scenarios,

Simulation of release source model, and

Plotting of contour maps

A detailed risk assessment and consequence analysis study is presented in Chapter 7 i.e. Additional Studies of this

report (please refer Section 7.2.6 ).

On the basis of that study MLCs (as shown in Section 7.2.5), have been selected and studied. On the basis of the

outcomes of the study a detailed impact scoring was undertaken and presented in Table 4-26 including the

following general safety measures and mitigation measures.

Also Occupational Health & Risk due to certain activities are attached as Annexure 18.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED


MITIGATION MEASURES


Table 4-26: Impact Scoring of Occupational Health, Community Health and Safety

S.

No. Impacting Activity

Impact Scoring Basis of Scoring

Mitigation

Measures S L S × L

1 Benzyl chloride

Leak -2 2 -4 L = 2 as sufficient safety measures

provided

Dyke and Fire Fighting system

Provided Catastrophic

Rupture -2 2 -4

2 Ethylene diamine

Leak -2 3 -6 L=2 as low flash point

and high IDLH

Gas detector system, fire hydrant system, provision of

dyke wall

Catastrophic Rupture

-2 2 -4

3 Ethyl acetate

Leak -2 3 -6

L=2 as low flash point and high IDLH


dyke wall


-2 2 -4

4 2-Ethyl Hexanol


and high IDLH


dyke wall


-2 2 -4

5 Mono

Ethelyne Glycol


and high IDLH


dyke wall


-2 2 -4

6 Mono

Ethanol Amine


and high IDLH


dyke wall


-2 2 -4

7 Hydrogen

Leak -2 3 -6 L=2 as hydrogen is transferred through

pipeline

Transferred through pipeline so risk is

low Catastrophic Rupture

-2 2 -4

8 Ammonia

Leak -2 3 -6 L=2, as low flash

point and high IDLH


dyke wall


-2 2 -4


4.18.2 Hazard Identification & Proposed Safety Measures

Hazard Identification

HIRA points are attached as Annexure 17.

Table 4-27: Identification of Hazards in Department

S.

No Area

Type of

Hazards Affecting Population

Precaution to be

Taken Mitigation Measures

01 (Generator

room)

Fire in electrical circuits

Not a normally occupied area

2 -3 persons may be affected if any job is

being done at the time of fire

Any one supply is always ensured. DG set is the alternate source

for EB.

Emergency lamps are available at critical

points

Line circuit breakers in case of fire in circuits.

POSITIVELY isolate the electrical supply and other

concerned circuit.

Use CO2 or DCP fire extinguisher to extinguisher to put off the fire. If the fire

is spreading, if necessary mobilize and use additional

fire extinguishers from nearby buildings.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED


MITIGATION MEASURES


S.

No Area

Type of


Precaution to be


Isolation of area through fencing and

door

Portable fire extinguishers are

maintained nearby and spare capacity is also

available.

Do not use water or foam type fire extinguishers on any fire connected with

electrical circuits.

Contain the spilled material with a bund of sand or earth. Do not use any

combustible to make a bund. Collect in a receptacle and

clean the area. Prevent spark and hot spots.

If the spill catches fire, use portable fire extinguishers of

foam or DCP. Mobilize additional extinguishers from

nearby buildings if necessary.

If it is a large fire, evacuate and cordon the area. Keep surrounding area cool. Call

for additional help from outside

02 Production

Large scale spillage of hot thermic fluid oil

in process areas

2-5 persons may be affected who are

normally present when process is in progress

Thickness testing of pipelines.

Preventive maintenance

Arresting of supply of oil by stopping of pumps and

closing of related valves.

Evacuation of personnel if necessitated

03 Production

Fire in any of the processes

due to hot spots or static

electricity



Preventive maintenance

Portable fire extinguishers for

incipient fires

Training in fire fighting

Use all extinguishing media. Call for additional help.

Evacuate area

Fire hydrant points and hoses available

Sprinkler system

04 Production Runaway reaction



Standard operating procedure

Calibration of connected instruments.

Rupture disc available.

Emergency shutdown procedure.

05 Storage tank

area

spillage

Fire

(Static electricity)


2 persons may be affected if unloading or maintenance jobs are carried out at the time

of fire

Earthing and bonding

Flameproof electrical fittings

Unloading procedures

Competent supervision

Firefighting facilities – portable fire extinguishers

and water monitors

06 Storage tank

area Spillage

catching fire


2 persons may be affected if unloading or maintenance jobs are carried out at the time

of fire

Portable fire extinguishers

Earthing and bonding

Cleaning and housekeeping

Use 50 liters’ trolley type foam extinguisher kept in the area and extinguishes fire. Mobilize additional

extinguishers from nearby if necessary.

For large fires, evacuate and cordon the area. Call for

outside help.

07 Fire in bushes / scraps near plant area.

Accidental contamination

of floor sweepings with

About 10 persons working in production area and around may

be affected

Segregation at source

Fight fire by laying hoses from nearest points. Use fire-beating method with

available resources to

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED


MITIGATION MEASURES


S.

No Area

Type of


Precaution to be


any chemical can cause fire

by auto ignition in hot sun.

prevent spread of fire. Dig small trenches around the

fire so that fire will not spread further due to

starvation.

08

Quality control /R&D

laboratory

Spillage of corrosive

chemicals and resultant

pollution in confined area

4 persons who normally work in lab

may be affected

Storage in small quantities

Neutralizing chemicals

Personal protective equipment

Training in handling of chemicals.

Cordon area. Dike the material and prevent from spreading. Collect using

appropriate personal protective equipment. Refer

to Material Safety Data sheets for further

information.

09 Tank Farm and Storage

area

Fire in flammable materials.

4 persons who normally work in lab

may be affected

Cordon area. Remove combustibles and other

flammables from the area. Use appropriate fire

extinguishers or water, if the same is applicable. If

necessary, switch off power supply in laboratory.

Refer to Material Safety Data Sheets.

10

Stores

Fire

About 5 persons who normally work may be affected if the fire is in day time. This area is not occupied at other

times

Palletized storage

Local fire Extinguishers

Use 50 liters trolley type foam /DCP extinguisher kept in the area and extinguishes

fire.

Remove flammable material nearby if it can be done without posing danger.

Mobilize additional extinguishers from nearby if necessary. Use AFFF foam.

Cool nearby area by hydrant

For large fires, evacuate and cordon the area. Call for

outside help.

11

Office blocks

Fire due to electrical short

circuits

About 5 persons in the particular floor of building where fire

occurs may be affected

Earth fault relays


Isolation facilities

Smoke detectors

Isolate power supply from the nearest cut of point. Complete shutdown if

warranted from substation.

12

Fire in MCC of production

Fire- local

5 persons who normally work in that area may be affected

Earth fault relays


Isolation facilities

Isolate power supply from the nearest cut of point. Complete shutdown if

warranted from substation.

13 Raw Material Warehouse

Toxic release of vapours in abnormal

condition due to material

(MDI & TDI) coming in

contact of fire



Dedicated Cold Storage of material.

Storage in 200 kg drums only.

Isolation and confine the barrels.

Evacuation of people.

Fire hydrant points and hoses

Sprinkler system

Proposed Safety Measures

Considering the various chemicals handled and stored at site; following safety measures will be provided at the site.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



ANTICIPATED


MITIGATION MEASURES


Requisite personnel protective equipment shall be provided. Instructions to wear the same will be displayed.

Further, it will be insisted to use the same while at work.

Dyke Provided

Fire Fighting facilities are made available

Provision of safety shower with eye washer.

MSDS of all hazardous chemicals will be available at office and with responsible persons. The operative part’ of

MSDS (precautions to be taken while handling, PPE required, First Aid if exposure takes place etc.) will be

displayed at places where the respective chemicals are stored or handled.

Antidotes for all chemicals being used as per MSDS will be available at the site.

Regular training programme for safety awareness.

Provisions of First Aid Box and trained person in first aid.

Prohibition on eating, drinking or smoking at work-area.

Any leakage/spillage of liquid chemical shall be immediately attended.

Work area will be monitored to maintain work environment free from any dust/chemicals-fumes/ vapors and to

keep well within below permissible limit.

Provision of adequate Fire Extinguishers at site and training will be imparted to the workers also.

Maintaining the Fire-Protection System adequately.

Availability of Self Contained Breathing Apparatus at site.

Provisions of immediate accident/incident reporting and investigation.

Instructions on Emergency/Disaster will be displayed.

Safety Posters and slogans will be exhibited at conspicuous places.

Arrangement of Periodical Training to workers and supervisors.

Work permit systems will be strictly followed.

Safety Committee will be constituted and safety, health and environmental matters/issues will be discussed in

the meeting and enlighten the participants in these respect.

Mitigation Measures

Medical checkup would be carried out at regular intervals.

During site preparation proper care would be taken by AWL, appropriate PPEs will be provided to site workers

and staff members.

Appropriate personnel protective clothing to be used to prevent skin contact.

Safety Goggles will be used to prevent eye contact.

Acoustic enclosures will be provided to noise generating equipment.

AWL will develop and implement a spill management plan to prevent risk of spill which may cause health

problem.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR


FACILITY AT VILLAGE DHRAB & MUNDRA, KUTCH ANALYSIS OF

ALTERNATIVES


5 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES

5.1 SITE ALTERNATIVE

The proposed expansion of synthetic organic chemicals is a backward integration of the products which will be used

as indigenious raw materials in the existing plant.

The proposed organic chemicals facility will also utilise existing infrastructure utilities available in the existing plant.

Infact it is proposed to remove existing Acid Oil Plant 1 and construct the new MPR Plant in its place in Phase I of

the expansion project. Phase II expansion will take place in the new adjacent plot premises (taken on lease) once

the Phase I plant is operational. The utilities can be easily extended to the new adjoining plot during development

of Phase II.

Hence no alternative sites were assessed, since the expansion project can be accommodated in the existing facility

and also end products utilised in the existing facility.

5.2 TECHNOLOGY ALTERNATIVES

The new products that will be manufactured have taken into consideration the best available technology which is

environment friendly.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR


EXISTING FACILITY AT VILLAGE DHRAB & MUNDRA, KUTCH ENVIRONMENTAL

MONITORING PROGRAM


6 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM

6.1 Environmental Monitoring Program

Based on the identified aspects from the proposed activities on air, noise, water, land, ecology and biodiversity and

socio-economic environment, scoring was done based on its severity and likelihood of occurrence as discussed in

Chapter 4. Thus, monitoring program is required for each environment based on its consequence.

6.1.1 Objectives of Monitoring

Main objective of environmental monitoring program is to:

Measure effectiveness of operational procedures involving pollution control measures and mitigation measures;

Confirm statutory and mandatory compliance;

Identify unexpected changes

6.1.2 Environmental Monitoring Plan

Budgetary Environmental Monitoring Plan is presented in Table 6-1.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR LTD, DHRAB EIA REPORT FOR PROPOSED EXPANSION OF SYNTHETIC ORGANIC CHEMICALS IN EXISTING FACILITY AT VILLAGE DHRAB & MUNDRA, KUTCH ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM


Table 6-1 Environmental Monitoring Plan

S. No. Parameters Measurement

Methodology Frequency Location Data Analysis Reporting Schedule

Fixed Cost,

INR

Recurring Budget

per annum in INR

A Air

1 Ambient air monitoring of parameters specified by GPCB in their consents from time to time (PM10,

PM2.5, SO2, NOx)

IS 5182 Once a season (except

monsoon) 4 locations (up and

down wind Direction)

Comparison with specified limits and

previous baseline data of the area if available

Compliance reports of EC & CTO/CC&A to be sent

to process manager as well as top management (if

non-complied/partially complied conditions).

Compliance report of EC to MOEF&CC on 6

monthly bases.

Compliance report of CTO/CC&A to be sent to

GPCB.

1,50,00,000 for 1 new boiler

stack

INR 15,000 per Location x 4 locations

x 3 times = INR 1,80,000 per Annum

& CPCB Guidelines Vol. 1 (Gravimetric Method)

2

Stack monitoring of Boilers, Thermic Fluid Heater & DG Sets for parameters specified by GPCB in their consents from time to time of parameters specified by GPCB in their consents from time to time (PM10,

PM2.5, SO2, NOx)

Stack monitoring by Isokinetic sampling IS:

11255 Once a season 2 Flue gas stacks

Comparison with specified limits in GPCB

consents

Cost of online monitoring system =

25,00,000/-

INR 10,000 per stack x 2 stacks x 3 times =

INR 60,000 per Annum

3 Monitoring of Process Vents of parameters like HCl,

Acid Mist & SOx specified by GPCB in their consents from time to time

Stack monitoring by Isokinetic sampling IS:

11255 Once a season 2 Process Vents

Comparison of Process Vents emission with

specified limit

Cost of online monitoring system =

20,00,000 (10 Lacs per system

for 2 plant process stacks)

INR 10,000 per stack x 2 stacks x 3 times =

INR 60,000 per Annum

4 Work place monitoring of parameter like VOC,

Total Dust As per factory rules Once a season

Expected area of the emissions (total 5 measurements per

month)

Comparison with specified limit

-

INR 10,000 per location x 5 locations x

3 times = INR 1,50,000 per Annum

B Water

5 Maintaining record of water consumption and

wastewater generation Flow meters at inlet

and outlet Daily Plant site office

Comparison with allowed water consumption and effluent generation as

per Consents

Compliance report of EC to MOEF&CC on 6 monthly and Compliance report of CtO to GPCB in case on

new/expansion/renewal application or as per requirement 0 0

Use the data in preparation of various reports and for alerting Operations Dept. in case of undesirable change

in parameter values

6 Monitoring of outlet of industrial effluent of

parameters specified by GPCB in their consents APHA : 23rd Edition,

2017 Quarterly

Inlet & outlet of ETP, RO Permate & Reject

Comparison with specified limits in GPCB

consents

Compliance report of EC to MOEF&CC on 6 monthly and Compliance report of CTO/CC&A to GPCB in case

on new/expansion/renewal application or as per requirement

INR 10000 per sample x 4 sample x 3 times x 4 ETPs = 4,80,000 per

Annum

7 Monitoring of Rain water quality APHA : 23rd Edition,

2017 Every month during rainy

season Rain water collection

tank

Comparison with specified limits of IS

10500 - -

Rs 8000 Rs. x 4 samples =32,000/-

C Noise

9 Ambient Noise level IS 9989 : 1981 Quarterly 6-7 locations at Site Comparison with specified limits

Compliance report of EC to MOEF&CC on 6 monthly and Compliance report of CTO/CC&A to GPCB in case

on new/expansion/renewal application or as per requirement

-

INR 5000 Per Quarter x 6 location x 3

times= 90,000 per Annum

D Solid & Hazardous Waste





Fixed Cost,

INR

Recurring Budget

per annum in INR

10 Maintaining record of Hazardous Waste

Generation, Storage and Disposal

a. Keep record of hazardous waste generation, sale, transfer, storage, recycling, recovery, pre-processing, co-processing and utilization vide Form 3.

b. Mark hazardous waste storage area showing types of hazardous waste category, quantity stored on weekly basis or as and when disposal takes place.

c. Maintain transportation record including Date, Manifest number, Disposal quantity, type of waste, category, type of transportation vehicle, vehicle number etc.

d. Ensure all the containers of waste sent for disposal have proper labels as specified in Form 8 of hazardous waste rules.

e. Prepare and submit annual return of Hazardous waste vide Form 4 to SPCB.

Maintain daily hazardous waste generation, disposal and stock data to fill yearly

Form- 4 & 5 and maintaining Monthly

records as per Form 3

Hazardous waste storage facility

Comparison with permitted limit in

Consent and earlier data

Form-4 by 30th June for financial year,

Compliance of CTO/CC&A to GPCB, reporting to higher authority as per company procedure

Construction of new Hazardous Waste Storage

Shed – 285 sq.m x 12500 = Rs

35,62,500, Say Rs 36 Lacs

Maintaining records and submission of

Form 4 and 5 – Rs 5 Lacs

11 Hazardous waste analysis

APHA: 23rd Edition, 2017

IS-2720

Yearly Hazardous waste area Comparison with specified limits in

consent

Compliance report of CTO/CC&A to GPCB, reporting to higher authority as per company procedure

E Soil

12 Soil sample analysis

APHA: 23rd Edition, 2017

IS-2720

Yearly At 4 locations in and around the premises

Comparison with specified limits

Compliance report of CTO/CC&A to GPCB, reporting to higher authority as per company procedure

- Rs 5000 x 4 – Rs

20000/- per annum

F Groundwater

13 Monitoirng of groundwater from monitoring

(piezometric) wells as per Standard Drinking Water Parameter - ISO 10500 (2012)

APHA Standard Methods (23rd Edition,

2017) Quarterly At site

Ground Water as per APHA Standard

Annually submission to GPCB - INR 10,000 /- x 4

times x 9 samples = Rs 3,60,000/-

14 Installation of Monitoring (piezometric wells) APHA Standard

Methods (23rd Edition, 2017)

One time At Site Ground Water as per

APHA Standard Annually submission to GPCB

Rs 2,00,00/- per well x 9 wells – Rs 18,00,000/-





Fixed Cost,

INR

Recurring Budget

per annum in INR

G Ecology & Biodiversity

18

Greenbelt Within study area and immediate vicinity of plant premises and nearby villages (Rs. 200/sapling) INR 6,00,000/- -

Maintenance cost of existing greenbelt in plant premises - 2,00,000 /-

Plantation approximately 250 Trees in 2 acre of land

Additional Greenbelt and Biodiversity Conservation INR 75,000 /- 1,15,500 /- (for 4

years)

Awareness programme for “Wild Life” conservation Education Program (Village: Dhrab, Toda, Baraia, Borana & Lakhanpar) - 1,51,500/-

Artificial concrete water pond of 1000 lit capacity to provide drining water facility to wild animals (Dhrab Village) INR 50,000 /- 10,000 /- (for 4 years)

H Effectiveness of Emergency Procedure

13 Mock Drill

An Independent Observer notes,

compliances and non compliances with

respect to the emergency procedures

Onsite- Quarterly Onsite Observations in the

report of Independent Observer shall be

addressed with root cause analysis and corrective actions

Onsite for Factory inspector

-

Onsite/ Local: 50,000*6 times=

3,00,000

Off site- Yearly Off site Offsite at District level Offsite: 2,50,000/year

I Occupational Health

14 Health Parameters As specified by

qualified medical professional

Once in a year All employees

Identify abnormalities (Occupational Health

Issues) found and maintain records and

advise corrective action where required.

Advise individual employee and provide information to Chief Medical Officers and Head (HR) on completion of every schedule. Report to Factories Inspectorate as per

requirements of Factories Act.

- INR 3,500/- per

employee per annum

Total Cost 2,02,00,000 22,12,000 per

annum

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



MONITORING PROGRAM


6.1.3 Socio-Economic / Corporate Environmental Responsibility (CER)

Corporate Environmental Responsibility (CER) Budgetary Provision

According to the CER office memorandum dated 01st May, 2018 of MoEFCC the CER budget for 5 years comes to

INR 1.515 crores ( 0.75% of project cost INR 202 crores)

Table 6-2: Budget for CER Activities for 5 years

S. No. Activities Budget in % Budget Amount

(INR in crores)

01. Education 30% 0.454

1.1 Infrastructure facility (Shed for Mid-day meal, furniture, music instruments, renovation of building etc.)

1.2 Tree Plantation

1.3 Computer with projector for smart class

1.4 Sports kit and playing equipment’s

2. Health and Hygiene 20% 0.303

2.1 Waste Management system

2.2 Individual toilets

2.3 Health camps

3. Water recharge/ harvesting 15% 0.228

3.1 Rooftop rain water harvesting with percolation well in Anganwadi and Government primary school

3.2 Pond deepening and beautification

4. Skill Development 10% 0.151

4.1 Skill development training program for youths

5. Community tree plantation 5% 0.076

5.1 Tree plantation at the periphery of village , schools, Anganwadi and other common places of village

6. Infrastructure facility development 20% 0.303

6.1 Construction / repair and maintenance of public places like Panchayat building, Anganwadi, community hall etc.

6.2 Solar street light

Total 100% 1.515

*The activities based on Focus Group Discussion

6.2 Regulatory Framework

The following EHS regulatory requirements are applicable to the activities being planned, and the checklist given in

Table 6-3 may be taken into consideration prior to actual commencement of operations. This checklist requires to

be reviewed at quarterly intervals.

Table 6-3: Applicable EHS Regulatory Requirements for Proposed Project

S.

No. Applicable Legislation / Rule / Permit Requirement

Action Required /

Timing of Action

1 Environmental Clearance as per the EIA Notification dated 14th Sept 2006 and

amended till date Permit to establish facility

Before commencement of the project

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



MONITORING PROGRAM


S.

No. Applicable Legislation / Rule / Permit Requirement

Action Required /

Timing of Action

2 Consent to Establish/ NOC from the GPCB

under water and air act Permit to establish facility

Before commencement of the project

3 Consent to Operate under the Air Act from

the GPCB

Permit to discharge air emissions from the flue gas stacks and process vents

Application to be filed with the GPCB once the EC and NOC is

obtained after the commencement of the project

4 Consent to Operate under the Water Act

from the GPCB

Permit to generate/discharge wastewater resulting from the

project activities



5 Authorization to generate, transport and dispose hazardous wastes from the GPCB

Permit to generate and dispose hazardous wastes



6 The Manufacture, Storage and Import of

Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 1989 (as amended till date)

Listing of hazardous materials; thresholds against which Safety Audit and Safety Report has to be maintained; Requirements of

disclosure of information; Availability of MSDS’

If required, safety audit and safety report to be prepared as per

Gujarat Factories Act.

8 The Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991

(PLI) Insurance to be taken Unit will take insurance under PLI

9 Chemical Accidents (Emergency Planning, Preparedness and Response) Rules, 1996

Preparation of Local/District Level Crisis groups, for management of offsite

emergencies.

Identify whether Local or District Level Crisis Groups exist and take proactive part in preparing Offsite

DMP.

10 Factory License from the DISH

(Department of Industrial Safety Health) License to operate the Factory

Application prior to construction and also commissioning

M/S. ADANI WILMAR


FACILITY AT VILLAGE DHRAB & MUNDRA, KUTCH ADDITIONAL

STUDIES


7 ADDITIONAL STUDIES

7.1 Public Consultation

Public hearing for the project is yet to take place.

7.2 Risk Assessment

7.2.1 Background

The risk assessment process is intended to identify probable hazards in the work environment and all operations, to

quantify the hazards and to assess the risk levels of those hazards in order to prioritize those that need an

immediate attention.

In the unlikely event that an abnormal consequence has occurred, the disaster management kicks in. This includes

prescribing the procedures pertaining to a number of issues such as communication, encounter, rescue,

rehabilitation and further steps to prevent recurrence of such consequence in future. These issues are addressed in

the disaster management plan.

Both, the RA and DMP are living documents and need to be updated whenever there are changes in operations,

equipment or procedures.

7.2.2 Key definitions

The terminologies used in this Risk Assessment (RA) study are defined below.

Consequence: Magnitude or size of the damage or loss. In terms of health and safety, it is the degree of harm

that could be caused to the people exposed to hazard, the potential severity of injuries or ill health, and/or the

number of people who could be potentially affected. Consequence of hazard need not only be in terms of human

safety criteria, but could also be in terms of a financial loss due to production and incurred costs due to

repairs/replacement, environmental impacts as well as public outrage.

Disaster: A catastrophic consequence of a major emergency/accident that leads to not only extensive damage to

life and property, but also disrupts all normal human activity for a significant period of time and requires a major

national and/or international effort for rescue and rehabilitation of those affected.

Emergency: A situation of process deviation that, if uncontrolled, may lead to a major accident/disaster with

potential short term and/or long term risk damage consequence to life and property in and/or around the

workplace.

Emergency Response Planning Guidelines1 (EPRG1): The maximum airborne concentration below which it is

believed that nearly all individuals could be exposed for up to 1 hour (without a respirator) without experiencing

other than mild transient adverse health effects or without perceiving a clearly defined objectionable odour.

Emergency Response Planning Guidelines2 (ERPG2): The maximum airborne concentration below which it is

believed that nearly all individuals could be exposed for up to 1 hour without experiencing or developing irreversible

or other serious health effects or symptoms that could impair their abilities to take protective action.


believed nearly all individuals could be exposed for up to 1 hour without experiencing or developing life-threatening

health effects.

Hazard: Source of potential harm, injury or loss to man and machines.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Immediately Dangerous to life and health (IDLH): It represents the maximum concentration of a chemical

from which, in the event of respiratory failure, one could escape within 30 minutes without a respirator and without

experiencing any escape/impairing (e.g. severe irritation) or irreversible health effects.

Lethal Concentration Low (LCLo): It is the lowest concentration of a material in air, other than LC50, which has

been reported to cause death in human or animals.

Risk: Combination of the likelihood of a specific unwanted event and the potential consequences, if it occurs.

Risk Assessment: A process that involves estimation and measurement of risk to determine priorities and to

enable identification of appropriate level of risk treatment (used also to describe the overall process of risk

management).

Risk Control: Implementation of strategies to prevent, control and minimize hazards.

Risk Management: Overall description of the steps taken to manage risk, by identifying hazards and

implementing controls in the workplace.

Risk Rating: The category, level, or risk assigned following risk assessment (e.g. High, Medium, or Low).

Threshold Limit Value (TLV): it is the permitted level of exposure for a given period on a weighted average

basis (usually 8 hrs. for 5 days in a week)

Short Time Exposure Limit (STEL): it is the permitted short-term exposure limit usually for a 15 minutes

exposure.

Toxic Concentration Low (TCLo): It is the lowest concentration of a material in air, to which humans or animals

have been exposed for any given period of time that has produced a toxic effect in humans or produced

carcinogenic, neoplastigenic or tetratogenic effect in humans or animals.

7.2.3 Methodology for Risk Assessment

The methodology includes,

1. Hazard identification,

2. Selection of potential loss scenarios,

3. Simulation of release source model on DNV’s PHAST 7.1,

4. Plotting the damage contour on site map

7.2.4 Hazard Identification

The project description, and other project related data provided by the client have been comprehensively reviewed

to identify the hazardous operations. Also the information on the hazardous properties (MSDS) of all the chemicals

handled at the site has been reviewed to identify the hazards associated with the same.

At present Adani Wilmar Limited is proposing for expansion in existing facility at Dhrab, Mundra. This involves

storage of Benzyl chloride, Ethylene diamine, Ethyl acetate, Ammonia, Hydrogen etc. at the site which can lead to

uncontrolled release of hazardous material. On the basis of this, the important hazards that can lead to accident in

the proposed project are described in Table 7-1.

Table 7-1: Important Hazardous Events

Type of Event Explanation

BLEVE Boiling Liquid Evaporating Vapour Explosion; may happen due to catastrophic failure of refrigerated

or pressurized gases or liquids stored above their boiling points, followed by early ignition of the same, typically leading to a fire ball

Deflagration Is the same as detonation but with reaction occurring at less than sonic velocity and initiation of the

reaction at lower energy levels

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Type of Event Explanation

Detonation A propagating chemical reaction of a substance in which the reaction front advances in the

unreacted substance at or greater than sonic velocity in the unreacted material

Explosion A release of large amount of energy that form a blast wave

Fire Fire

Fireball

The burning of a flammable gas cloud on being immediately ignited at the edge before forming a flammable/explosive mixture.

Flash Fire A flammable gas release gets ignited at the farthest edge resulting in flash-back fire

Jet Fire A jet fire occurs when flammable gas releases from the pipeline (or hole) and the released gas

ignites immediately. Damage distance depends on the operating pressure and the diameter of the hole or opening flow rate.

Pool Fire Pool fire is a turbulent diffusion fire burning above a horizontal pool of vaporizing hydrocarbon fuel,

where the fuel has zero or low initial momentum

Spill Release ‘Loss of containment’. Release of fluid or gas to the surroundings from unit’s own equipment / tanks

causing (potential) pollution and / or risk of explosion and / or fire

Structural Damage Breakage or fatigue failures (mostly failures caused by weather but not necessarily) of structural

support and direct structural failures

Vapour Cloud Explosion

Explosion resulting from vapour clouds formed from flashing liquids or non-flashing liquids and gases

Hazard and Damage Assessment

Toxic, flammable and explosive substances released from sources of storage as a result of failures or catastrophes,

can cause losses in the surrounding area in the form of:

Toxic gas dispersion, resulting in toxic levels in ambient air,

Fires, fireballs, and flash back fires, resulting in a heat wave (radiation), or

Explosions (Vapors Cloud Explosions) resulting in blast waves (overpressure).

Consequences of Fire/Heat Wave

The effect of thermal radiation on people is mainly a function of intensity of radiation and exposure time. The effect

is expressed in term of the probability of death and different degree of burn. The consequence effects studied to

assess the impact of the events on the receptors are provided in Table 7-2.

Table 7-2: Damage due to Radiation Intensity

Radiation (kW/m2) Damage to Equipment Damage to People

4.0 - Causes pain if duration is longer than 20 sec. But

blistering is unlikely.

12.5 Minimum energy to ignite wood with a

flame; melts plastic tubing. 1% lethality in one minute. First degree burns in 10

sec.

37.5 Severe damage to plant

100% lethality in 1 min.

50% lethality in 20 sec.

1% lethality in 10 sec.

Consequences of Overpressure

The effects of the shock wave vary depending on the characteristics of the material, the quantity involved and the

degree of confinement of the vapour cloud. The peak pressures in an explosion therefore vary between a slight

over-pressure and a few hundred kilopascals (kPa). Whereas dwelling are demolished and windows and doors

broken at overpressures as low as 0.03- 0.1 bar. Direct injury to people occurs at greater pressures. The pressure

of the shock wave decreases rapidly with the increase in distance from the source of the explosion. The

overpressure damage is shown in Table 7-3.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Table 7-3: Overpressure Damage

Overpressure (bar) Damage

0.02068 Limited minor structural damage

0.21 Corrugated asbestos shattered; corrugated steel or aluminum panels, fastenings fail, followed

by buckling, wood panels (standard housing) fastenings fail, panels blown in

1 Fatality

Source: CCPS Consequence Analysis of Chemical Release

Consequences of Toxic Release

The effect of exposure to toxic substance depends upon the duration of exposure and the concentration of the toxic

substance.

Short-term exposures to high concentration give Acute Effects while long term exposures to low concentrations

result in Chronic Effects.

Only acute effects are considered under hazard analysis, since they are likely credible scenarios. These effects are:

Irritation (respiratory system, skin, eyes)

Narcosis (nervous system)

Asphyxiation (oxygen deficiency)

System damage (blood organs)

Following are some of the common terms used to express toxicity of materials.

Threshold Limit Value (TLV): It is the permitted level of exposure for a given period on a weighted average

basis (usually 8 hr/day, 40h/week).

Short Time Exposure Limit (STEL): It is the permitted short term exposure limit usually for a 15 minutes’

exposure.

Immediately Dangerous to life and health (IDLH): It represents the maximum concentration of a chemical from

which is likely to cause death or immediate or delayed permanent adverse health effects or prevent escape

from such an environment.

Lethal Concentration Low (LCLo): It is the lowest concentration of a material in air, other than LC50, which has

been reported to cause a death in human or animals.

Toxic Concentration Low (TCLo): It is the lowest concentration of a material in air, to which humans or animals

have been exposed for any given period of time that has produced a toxic effect in humans or produced

carcinogenic, neoplastigenic or tetratogenic effect in humans or animals.

Emergency Response Planning Guidelines1 (EPRG1): The maximum airborne concentration below which it is

believed that nearly all individuals could be exposed for up to 1 hour (without a respirator) without

experiencing other than mild transient adverse health effects or without perceiving a clearly defined

objectionable odour.


believed that nearly all individuals could be exposed for up to 1 hour without experiencing or developing

irreversible or other serious health effects or symptoms that could impair their abilities to take protective

action.


believed that nearly all individuals could be exposed for up to 1 hour without experiencing or developing life-

threatening health effects.

7.2.5 Selection of Maximum Credible Loss Scenarios (MCLs’)

Following important points should be considered for the selection of release scenarios.

Flammability and the flash point of the material

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Phase of material i.e. liquid or gas

Threshold quantity of the chemicals as prescribed in MSHIC Rule

Operating temperature and pressure of the material

Total inventory of the material

On the basis of study of chemical properties (MSDS) of the chemicals those are selected for simulation are


Table 7-4: Chemicals selected for Simulation

S.

No.

Raw Material &

Products State

Flash Point

(°C)

IDLH

(ppm) Hazard UEL% LEL%

Raw Material

1. Benzyl chloride Liquid 67 10 Flammable &

Toxic 14 1.1

2. Ethylene Diamine** Liquid 38 1000 Flammable 16 2.7

3. Ethyl acetate Liquid -4 2000 Flammable 11.5 2

4. 2-Ethyl Hexanol Liquid 72 NA Flammable 9.7 0.9

5. Mono Ethelyne

Glycol Liquid 111 NA Flammable 15.3 3.2

6. Mono Ethanol

Amine Liquid 92 30

Flammable & Toxic

23.5 3

7. Ammonia Gas NA 300 Toxic 28 15

8. Hydrogen Gas NA NA Flammable 75 4

On the basis of the information provided in Table 7-4 and as discussed over failures sceneries given in publications

like World Bank Technical Paper 55 and TNO Purple Book and the experience of the consultant, MCLs’ which may

take place are presented in Table 7-5.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR LTD, DHRAB EIA REPORT FOR PROPOSED EXPANSION OF SYNTHETIC ORGANIC CHEMICALS IN EXISTING FACILITY AT VILLAGE DHRAB & MUNDRA, KUTCH ADDITIONAL STUDIES


Table 7-5: Scenarios Selected for Simulation

S.

No. Material

Hazard

involved

Mass

Inventory

Operating Condition Types of Failure Possible

Consequences Studied Temperature

(°C) Pressure (bar) Credible Scenarios Worst Case Scenario

1. Benzyl chloride

Flammable & Toxic

25 KL Ambient Atmospheric 75 mm & 250 mm leak Catastrophic Rupture Jet fire, Pool Fire, Overpressure,

Maximum Concentration

2. Ethylene diamine

Flammable 25 KL Ambient Atmospheric 75 mm & 250 mm leak Catastrophic Rupture Jet fire, Pool Fire, Overpressure

3. Ethyl acetate Flammable 50 KL Ambient Atmospheric 75 mm & 250 mm leak Catastrophic Rupture Jet fire, Pool Fire, Overpressure

4. 2-Ethyl Hexanol

Flammable 25 KL Ambient Atmospheric 75 mm & 250 mm leak Catastrophic Rupture Jet fire, Pool Fire, Overpressure

5. Mono Ethelyne

Glycol Flammable 25 KL Ambient Atmospheric 75 mm & 250 mm leak Catastrophic Rupture Jet fire, Pool Fire, Overpressure

6. Mono Ethanol

Amine Flammable &

Toxic 25 KL Ambient Atmospheric 75 mm & 250 mm leak Catastrophic Rupture

Jet fire, Pool Fire, Overpressure, Maximum Concentration

7. Hydrogen Flammable 19.5 m3 Ambient 12 6 mm & 13 mm leak Catastrophic Rupture Jet fire, Fireball, Overpressure

8. Ammonia Toxic 8.8 m3 Ambient 15 1 mm & 2 mm leak Catastrophic Rupture Jet fire, Fireball, Overpressure,

Maximum Concentration

Also, the risk assessment is considered using certain internationally recognized yardsticks for measuring risk. These first need to be explained, and this is done as Table 7-6.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR


FACILITY AT VILLAGE DHRAB & MUNDRA, KUTCH ADDITIONAL STUDIES


Table 7-6: Broadly Accepted Frequency

Annual Fatality risk level

per year Conclusion

10-3 Unacceptable to everyone. Immediate action shall be taken to reduce the hazards

10-4 Willing to spend public money to control hazards, such as traffic signs, fire departments etc

10-5 People still recognize. Safety slogans have precautionary rings. Such as never swim alone,

never point a gun

10-6 Not of great concern to everyone. People are aware of these hazards but feel that they

cannot happen to them. Such as Lightning Never Strikes twice an Act of God.

7.2.6 Simulation of Release and Development of Contours

As the MCLS’ were developed for the selected set of chemicals, the next step is to carry out the consequence

analysis. The consequence analysis results along with their contours are presented in the following sections.

Benzyl Chloride

Radiation level and effect distance due to the release of Benzyl Chloride are presented in Table 7-7. Toxic Effect

Distance are presented in Table 7-8.

Table 7-7: Radiation Level and Effect Distance due to Release of Benzyl Chloride

Chemical

(Storage Tank)

Failure

Scenario Consequence

Met

Data

Effective Distance in meter to Radiation Level

4 kW/m2 12.5 kW/m2 37.5 kW/m2

BENZYL CHLORIDE

(25 KL TANK)

75 mm leak

Jet Fire

2.5/B 4 NR NR

2/E 4 NR NR

5/D 3 2 NR

Late Pool Fire

2.5/B 17 11 5

2/E 17 11 5

5/D 18 12 6

250 mm leak

Jet Fire

2.5/B 10 8 8

2/E 9 7 NR

5/D 10 8 7

Late Pool Fire

2.5/B 17 11 5

2/E 17 11 5

5/D 18 12 6

Catastrophic rupture

Late Pool Fire

2.5/B 17 11 5

2/E 17 11 5

5/D 18 12 6

*NR;-Not Reached

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Table 7-8: Toxic Effect Distance due to Release of Benzyl Chloride

Chemical (Storage

Tank) Failure Scenario Met Data

Effective Distance in meter to Toxic Level

IDLH (10 ppm)

Benzyl chloride

(25 KL Tank)

75 mm leak

2.5/B 89.0

2/E No Hazard

5/D 64.0

250 mm leak

2.5/B 74.0

2/E 87.0

5/D 52.0


2.5/B 16.0

2/E 60.0

5/D 21.0

The contours for effect distance generated for the release of Benzyl Chloride are presented in Figure 7-1, Figure 7-2,

Figure 7-3.

Figure 7-1: Toxic effect distance of Benzyl Chloride due to 75 mm leak at Weather 2.5/B

Figure 7-2: Toxic effect distance of Benzyl Chloride due to Catastrophic rupture at Weather 2/E

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Figure 7-3: Let Pool fire effect distance of Benzyl Chloride due to Catastrophic rupture at Weather 5/D

Ethylene Diamine

Radiation level and effect distance due to the release of Ethylene Diamine are presented in Table 7-9.

Table 7-9: Radiation Level and Effect Distance due to Release of Ethylene Diamine

Chemical Failure


Met

Data


4 kW/m2 12.5 kW/m2 37.5 kW/m2

ETHYLENE DIAMINE

(25 KL TANK)

75 mm leak

Jet Fire

2.5/B 9 7 NR

2/E 9 8 NR

5/D 8 6 NR

Late Pool Fire

2.5/B 12 8 3

2/E 12 7 3

5/D 13 8 3

250 mm leak

Jet Fire

2.5/B 23 19 NR

2/E 21 17 NR

5/D 21 17 15

Late Pool Fire

2.5/B 12 8 3

2/E 12 7 3

5/D 13 8 3


Late Pool Fire

2.5/B 12 8 3

2/E 12 7 3

5/D 13 8 3

*NR;-Not Reached

The contours for effect distance generated for the release of Ethylene Diamine are presented in Figure 7-4 &

Figure 7-5.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Figure 7-4: Jet Fire effect distance of Ethylene Diamine due to 250 mm leak at Weather 2.5/B

Figure 7-5: Late Pool Fire effect distance of Ethylene Diamine due to Catastrophic rupture at Weather 5/D

Ethyl Acetate

Radiation level and effect distance due to the release of Ethyl Acetate are presented in Table 7-10 , whereas

Overpressure effect distance due to release of Ethyl Acetate are presented in Table 7-11.

Table 7-10: Radiation Level and Effect Distance due to Release of Ethyl Acetate

Chemical Failure


Met

Data


4 kW/m2 12.5 kW/m2 37.5 kW/m2

ETHYL ACETATE (50 KL TANK)

75 mm leak

Jet Fire

2.5/B 19 16 13

2/E 20 16 NR

5/D 17 14 12

Late Pool Fire

2.5/B 19 12 4

2/E 19 11 4

5/D 20 13 4

250 mm leak

Jet Fire

2.5/B 51 41 35

2/E 47 39 32

5/D 48 38 32

Late Pool Fire

2.5/B 20 12 4

2/E 19 12 4

5/D 20 13 4


Late Pool Fire

2.5/B 19 12 4

2/E 19 12 4

5/D 20 13 4

*NR;-Not Reached

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Table 7-11: Overpressure Effective Distance due to Release of Ethyl Acetate

Chemical Failure

Scenario Consequence Met Data

Overpressure Distances in Meters

0.02 bar 0.21 bar 1 bar

ETHYL ACETATE

(50 KL TANK)

75 mm leak Late Explosion

2.5/B 23.00 13.00 11.00

2/E 28.00 14.00 12.00

5/D 17.00 11.00 11.00


2.5/B 76.00 39.00 34.00

2/E 83.00 41.00 34.00

5/D 69.00 38.00 33.00


Late Explosion

2.5/B 73.00 29.00 24.00

2/E 79.00 32.00 25.00

5/D 80.00 29.00 24.00

The contours for effect distance generated for the release of Ethyl Acetate are presented in Figure 7-6, Figure

7-7 & Figure 7-8.

Figure 7-6: Overpressure effect distance of Ethyl Acetate due to 250 mm leak at Weather 2/E

Figure 7-7: Overpressure effect distance of Ethyl Acetate due to Catastrophic rupture at Weather 5/D

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Figure 7-8: Late Pool Fire effect distance of Ethyl Acetate due to Catastrophic rupture at Weather 5/D

2-Ethyl Hexanol

Radiation level and effect distance due to the release of 2-Ethyl Hexanol are presented in Table 7-12.

Table 7-12: Radiation Level and Effect Distance due to Release of 2-Ethyl Hexanol

Chemical Failure


Met

Data


4 kW/m2 12.5 kW/m2 37.5 kW/m2

2-ETHYL HEXANOL

(25 KL TANK)

75 mm leak

Jet Fire

2.5/B NR NR NR

2/E NR NR NR

5/D NR NR NR

Late Pool Fire

2.5/B 4 NR NR

2/E 4 NR NR

5/D 5 NR NR

250 mm leak

Jet Fire

2.5/B 4 3 NR

2/E 4 2 NR

5/D 4 3 NR

Late Pool Fire

2.5/B 4 NR NR

2/E 4 NR NR

5/D 5 NR NR


Late Pool Fire

2.5/B 4 NR NR

2/E 4 NR NR

5/D 5 NR NR

*NR;-Not Reached

The contours for effect distance generated for the release of 2-Ethyl Hexanol are presented in Figure 7-9.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Figure 7-9: Late Pool Fire effect distance of 2-Ethyl Hexanol due to Catastrophic rupture at Weather 5/D

Mono Ethylene Glycol

Radiation level and effect distance due to the release of Mono Ethylene Glycol are presented in Table 7-13.

Table 7-13: Radiation Level and Effect Distance due to Release of Mono Ethylene Glycol

Chemical Failure


Met

Data


4 kW/m2 12.5 kW/m2 37.5 kW/m2

MONO ETHYLENE GLYCOL

(25 KL TANK)

75 mm leak

Jet Fire

2.5/B NR NR NR

2/E NR NR NR

5/D NR NR NR

Late Pool Fire

2.5/B 13 8 6

2/E 13 8 6

5/D 12 9 6

250 mm leak

Jet Fire

2.5/B NR NR NR

2/E NR NR NR

5/D NR NR NR

Late Pool Fire

2.5/B 13 8 6

2/E 13 8 6

5/D 12 9 6


Late Pool Fire

2.5/B 13 8 6

2/E 13 8 6

5/D 12 9 6

The contours for effect distance generated for the release of Mono Ethylene Glycol are presented in Figure 7-10.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Figure 7-10: Late Pool Fire effect distance of Mono Ethylene Glycol due to Catastrophic rupture at Weather

2/E

Mono Ethanol Amine

Radiation level and effect distance due to the release of Mono Ethanol Amine are presented in Table 7-14,

whereas Toxic effect distance due to release of Mono Ethanol Amine are presented in Table 7-15.

Table 7-14: Radiation Level and Effect Distance due to Release of Mono Ethanol Amine

Chemical Failure


Met

Data


4 kW/m2 12.5 kW/m2 37.5 kW/m2

MONO ETHANOL AMINE

(25 KL TANK)

75 mm leak

Jet Fire

2.5/B NR NR NR

2/E NR NR NR

5/D NR NR NR

Late Pool Fire

2.5/B 9 5 NR

2/E 9 5 NR

5/D 10 6 NR

250 mm leak

Jet Fire

2.5/B 5 NR NR

2/E 4 NR NR

5/D 5 3 NR

Late Pool Fire

2.5/B 9 5 NR

2/E 9 5 NR

5/D 10 6 NR


Late Pool Fire

2.5/B 9 5 NR

2/E 9 5 NR

5/D 10 6 NR

*NR;-Not Reached

Table 7-15: Toxic Effective Distance due to Release of Mono Ethanol Amine

Chemical Failure Scenario Met Data

Effective Distance in meter to

Toxic Level

IDLH (30 ppm)

Mono Ethanol Amine (25 KL Tank)

75 mm leak

2.5/B 42.0

2/E 30.0

5/D 28.0

250 mm leak

2.5/B 73.0

2/E 86.0

5/D 51.0

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES




Toxic Level

IDLH (30 ppm)


2.5/B 25.0

2/E 24.0

5/D 35.0

The contours for effect distance generated for the release of Mono Ethanol Amine are presented in

Figure 7-11: Toxic effect distance of Mono Ethanol Amine due to 250 mm leak at Weather 2/E

Figure 7-12: Toxic effect distance of Mono Ethanol Amine due to Catastrophic rupture at Weather 5/D

Figure 7-13: Late Pool Fire effect distance of Mono Ethanol Amine due to Catastrophic rupture at Weather

5/D

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Hydrogen

Radiation level and effect distance due to the release of Hydrogen are presented in Table 7-16. Overpressure

effect distance due to release of Hydrogen are presented in Table 7-17.

Table 7-16: Radiation Level and Effect Distance due to Release of Hydrogen

Chemical Failure


Met

Data


4 kW/m2 12.5 kW/m2 37.5 kW/m2

HYDROGEN

(19.5 m3 BULLET)

6 mm leak Jet Fire

2.5/B NR NR NR

2/E NR NR NR

5/D NR NR NR

13 mm leak Jet Fire

2.5/B 8 NR NR

2/E 7 NR NR

5/D 8 NR NR


Fireball

2.5/B 72 40 19

2/E 72 40 19

5/D 72 40 19

*NR;-Not Reached

Table 7-17: Overpressure Effective Distance due to Release of Hydrogen

Chemical Failure



0.02 bar 0.21 bar 1 bar

HYDROGEN

(19.5 m3 BULLET)


2.5/B 27.00 13.00 11.00

2/E 29.00 14.00 12.00

5/D 25.00 13.00 11.00


Late Explosion

2.5/B 121.00 32.00 19.00

2/E 122.00 33.00 19.00

5/D 124.00 33.00 22.00

The contours for effect distance generated for the release of Hydrogen are presented in Figure 7-14 & Figure

7-15.

Figure 7-14: Overpressure effect distance of Hydrogen due to Catastrophic rupture at Weather 5/D

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Figure 7-15: Fireball effect distance of Hydrogen due to Catastrophic rupture at Weather 5/D

Ammonia

Radiation level and effect distance due to the release of Ammonia are presented in Table 1 20, whereas

Overpressure effect distance due to release of Ammonia are presented in Table 1 21. Toxic effect distance is

presented in Table 1 22.

Table 7-18: Radiation Level and Effect Distance due to Release of Ammonia

Chemical Failure


Met

Data


4 kW/m2 12.5 kW/m2 37.5 kW/m2

AMMONIA

(8.8 m3 BULLET)

1 mm leak Jet Fire

2.5/B 4 NR NR

2/E 4 NR NR

5/D 3 NR NR

2 mm leak Jet Fire

2.5/B 8 NR NR

2/E 9 NR NR

5/D 7 6 NR


Fireball

2.5/B 167 68 NR

2/E 167 68 NR

5/D 167 68 NR

*NR;-Not Reached

Table 7-19: Overpressure Effective Distance due to Release of Ammonia

Chemical Failure



0.02 bar 0.21 bar 1 bar

AMMONIA

(8.8 m3 BULLET)


Late Explosion

2.5/B 279.00 72.00 41.00

2/E 282.00 73.00 41.00

5/D 269.00 72.00 47.00

Table 7-20: Toxic Effect Distance due to Release of Ammonia



Toxic Level

IDLH (300 ppm)

AMMONIA (8.8 m3 BULLET) 1 mm leak

2.5/B 32.0

2/E 54.0

5/D 19.0

2 mm leak 2.5/B 70.0

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES




Toxic Level

IDLH (300 ppm)

2/E 99.0

5/D 58.0


2.5/B 516.0

2/E 677.0

5/D 652.0

The contours for effect distance generated for the release of Ammonia are presented in Figure 7-16, Figure 7-17

& Figure 7-18.

Figure 7-16: Toxic effect distance of Ammonia due to Catastrophic rupture at Weather 2/E

Figure 7-17: Overpressure effect distance of Ammonia due to Catastrophic rupture at Weather 2/E

Figure 7-18: Fireball effect distance of Ammonia due to Catastrophic rupture at Weather 5/D

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


7.2.7 Conclusion

Based on the above study, the maximum distance affected due to Radiation level, Overpressure effect and Toxic

Dispersion effect is presented in Table 7-21.

Table 7-21: Conclusion of Consequence Analysis

Chemical Scenario

Effect Distance in Meters

Consequence

Zone

Affected

Villages

having

Population

At Radiation

level 37.5

Kw/m²

At

Overpressure

1 bar

At Toxic Level

(IDLH)

Benzyl chloride

Normal Condition (75 mm leak)

6 @ 5/D --- 89 @ 2.5/B

(IDLH: 10 ppm)

R: Within the Site

T: Within the Site ---


6 @ 5/D --- 60 @ 2/E

(IDLH: 10 ppm) R: Within the Site T: Within the Site

Ethylene diamine


3 @ 2.5/B --- --- R: Within the Site

--- Catastrophic

rupture 3 @ 5/D --- --- R: Within the Site

Ethyl acetate


35 @ 2.5/B 34 @ 2/E --- R: Within the Site O: Within the Site

---


4 @ 5/D 25 @ 2/E --- R: Within the Site O: Within the Site

2-Ethyl Hexanol


NR --- --- R: Not Reached

--- Catastrophic

rupture NR --- --- R: Not Reached

Mono Ethelyne Glycol


6 @ 5/D --- --- R: Within the Site

--- Catastrophic

rupture 6 @ 5/D --- --- R: Within the Site

Mono Ethanol Amine


NR --- 86 @ 2/E

(IDLH:30 ppm) R: Not Reached

T: Within the site ---


NR --- 35 @ 5/D

(IDLH: 30 ppm) R: Not Reached

T: Within the site

Hydrogen


NR 12 @ 2/E --- R: Not Reached

O: Within the site ---


19 @ 5/D 22 @ 5/D --- R: Within the site O: Within the site

Ammonia


NR --- 99 @ 2/E

(IDLH: 300 ppm)

R: Not Reached T: Within the site None of the

villages within 1 km of site are affected


NR 47 @ 5/D 677 @ 2/E (IDLH: 300

ppm)

R: Not Reached O: Within the site

T: Slightly Outside of site

R: For Radiation Level; O: At Overpressure; T: At Toxic Level; NR: Not Reached

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


7.3 Safety Measures

7.3.1 Treatment and Control

After examining the high priority risks, a prime consideration is given to the potential to reduce or eliminate the risk

by using the hierarchy of controls. This assists in establishing methods to reduce risk. The desirable hierarchy of

risk control plans (with reducing effectiveness) is as follows;

Elimination: Take step to eliminate the hazard completely,

Substitution: Replace with less hazardous material, substance or process,

Separation: Isolate hazard from person by provision of barriers, guarding, space,

Administrative: Adjusting the time or conditions of risk exposures,

Training: Increasing awareness, improving skills and making tasks less hazardous to persons involved,

Personal protective equipment: Use appropriately designed and properly fitted PPE.

Control measures can reduce either the likelihood or consequence of the event or both. Depending on the level of

reduction of the hazard, there could still be a residual risk that needs to be monitored so that a secondary

prevention process can be initiated when trigger points are reached.

The control measures and action will be adopted by AWL to minimize the risk present in the facility for the

hazardous event are summarized in Table 7-22.

Table 7-22: Event Consequences, Treatment and Control

Hazardous Event Possible Consequences Treatment and Control

Loss of containment

Rupture / leak in storage tanks

Fire, explosion and toxic hazards

Gas detectors, Dyke wall provision, Level indicator, Earthing, flame arrestor &

visual observation, Ready availability of fire extinguishers and fire hydrant system

7.3.2 Control Measures for Hazardous Materials

Tank farms will be provided with proper dyke walls and at a safe / regulatory distances from surrounding plant

areas.

Firefighting facility with Fire extinguishers and Sand buckets, Hydrant and Sprinkler will be provided at

hazardous chemical Storage as well as other risk prone plant areas.

Integrity of storage tanks checked by engineers periodically.

Earthing Arrangements will be provided and checked periodically.

MSDS will be available for emergency handling

Required PPEs will be available for emergency including SCBA

Lightening arrester will be provided and checked periodically for its resistance.

Safety instructions boards will be displayed

Bund wall will be provided surrounding some storage tank

Flame arrester will be provided in tanks vent pipe

All chemicals shall be handled in a closed system and manual handling shall be avoided to the maximum extent

possible.

Pipe, joints etc. will be checked by Engineers periodically.

Barrier will be provided to prevent collision with storage tanks and other equipments

Employees will be trained to handle hazardous chemicals with care.

Employees will be trained to use SCBA & other PPEs.

Employees will be trained to evacuate with wet cloth on nose

Work permit system will be applicable for all maintenance & repair works

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


7.3.3 Minimization of manual handling of hazardous chemicals

Raw material and finished goods will be transferred and processed/stored into closed system, there will be no

expose of the raw materials and finished good into the atmosphere air.

Proper training will be provided for handling of hazardous chemicals.

Whether moving materials manually or mechanically handled, employees should know and understand the

potential hazards associated with the task at hand and how to control their workplaces to minimize the danger.

To minimize lifting of raw materials or heavy loads, platforms, trolleys etc. will be provided.

7.3.4 Precaution during Storage, process and handling of chemicals

All chemicals will be stored in a segregated and approved area.

The personnel involved in chemical handling will wear all PPEs like safety gloves, goggles, helmet, safety shoes,

nose mask

Maintain eye washer, body shower and quick-drench facilities in work areas.

Do not enter storage areas and confined spaces unless adequately ventilated.

Eating, drinking and smoking will be prohibited in areas where material is handled, stored and processed.

Workers will wash hands and face before eating and drinking.

For leak, spills or other emergency, full chemical-resistant suit will be worn only by trained and authorized

persons.

7.3.5 Precautions to be taken during Transportation

Following are some precautions that will be taken during the loading and unloading of material in plant premises

Ensuring all labels remains intact on containers and packaging

Wear antistatic hand gloves / antistatic safety shoe in shop floor

Wear safety goggles in all cases where the eyes may be exposed to dust, flying particles, or splashes of liquids.

Wear respirator when exposed to harmful aerosols, dusts, gases or vapors.

Restrict vehicle speed in factory premises up to 15 kmph.

Before the tanker enters the industry premises, the tanker is to be inspected for authorized entry and safe &

sound condition of the tanker, its contents and that of the prime mover. Flammable material carrying tankers

entering plant are to be fitted with spark arresters on their exhaust.

Static charge neutralizing

The quality of the chemical in the tanker will be ascertained before unloading to avoid contamination of

chemical already at storage.

Coupling used for connecting hose to tanker must be leak proof.

For flammable chemicals, the tanker and the hose are to be properly earthed before starting unloading

operation.

Unloading should be done under personal supervision of responsible staff authorized by the management.

Provision of sample quantity of water / neutralizing medium to take care of leakage / spillage must be made.

Inert gas hose stations must be available at unloading point.

Fire alarm and firefighting facility commensurate with the chemical will be provided at the unloading point.

7.4 Disaster Management Plan

7.4.1 Objectives

To respond to any incident or accident in the factory as fast as possible and in most efficient manner so that

the incident is localized and eliminated as soon as possible.

To be ready for ‘Mutual Aid’ if need arises to help neighboring unit.

To inform authorities and mutual-aid center to come for help.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


To secure the safe rehabilitation of affected areas and to restore normalcy.

To provide authoritative information to the new media.

To preserve records, equipment’s etc. and to organize investigation into the cause of the emergency and

preventive measures to stop its reoccurrence.

To ensure safety of the works before personnel re-enter and resume work.

To work out a plan with all provisions to handle emergencies and to provide for emergency preparedness and

the periodical rehearsal of the plan

7.4.2 Roles & Responsibilities during Emergency

Persons designated below will perform the assigned emergency responsibilities, i.e. Factory manager, Site Main

Controller, Incident Controller (IC) Dy. IC, Safety Manager etc.

Plant: Factory Manager Mr. Sharad Sharma (SMC-Site main controller)

Incident Controller Mr. Sharad Sharma (Plant)

Production Manager Mr. Kirit Vadukul (Process plant)

Safety Manager: Mr. Anil Kumar Jain

Boiler Station: All boiler staff

Duties and Responsibilities of Incident Controler (IC)/Factory Manager during Emergency

Rush to accident site, ask field operator to close the required valves.

At accident site, take charge at the scent of incident and assess the scale of emergency and take necessary

actions to control and confirm the emergency.

Decide for continuing the operation of the plant.

Ensure that outside emergency services have been called in.

Ensure that SMC and key personnel are informed and called.

Direct Fire-Fighting operations to internal as well external agencies.

Direct essential workers to carry out their duties to control the situation and to mobilize the resources.

Brief Site Main Controller.

Preserve evidence for subsequent fact-finding investigations.

Duties of Deputy Incident Controller (Dy. I.C.)

Immediately reach at the scene of incident and help.

Will act as IC in his absence.

Call outside emergency services.

Will ensure about the emergency with other departments of the company.

Will act as a link with ECC (SMC) and IC (Accident Site).

Arrange for any control devices to stop he leakage.

Duties and Responsibilities of Site Main Controller (SMC)

In consultation with IC will declare major emergency.

Ensure for mutual aid help.

Will direct key personnel for transportation, evacuation, medical help, traffic control etc.

Will appraise Govt. and statutory authorities.

Take action for rehabilitation of victims at Hospitable.

Take account of all the personal those who were on duty.

Duties and Responsibilities of Engineering Coordinator

Remain with incident controller assist him for controlling emergency.

Assist Site main controller and other outside agencies.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Arrange for sufficient and suitable PPE’S through Essential persons.

Ensure the safety of the personnel engaged in controlling the emergency

Co-ordinate with the incident controller and site main controller.

Provide essential workers to emergency spot for emergency engineering services.

Ensure the pumps running and water level maintained in the fire water lake.

Ensure continuous electric supply to emergency equipment’s

Shut off Electrical power supply as per requirement of IC.

Provide or cut off utilities like power supply, Water, air, Steam etc. as per requirement of IC.

Duties and Responsibilities of HR Coordinator

On being informed of the emergency he will rush to the E.C.C. and will report to the site main controller on arrival

at emergency control center he will-

Arrange for the head counting of affected / exposed area in co-ordination with respective dept head or his

second line with an objective of all persons have been rescued from the emergency spot & no person is caught

in the emergency.

Organize traffic control arrangements

Ensure that all the key personnel called in.

Ensure that the communication system work efficiently during emergency.

Divert all external incoming calls to receptionist and only emergency related emergency calls to be given to

concerned.

To call factory medical officer for necessary medical treatment.

To keep ready transportation means for any emergency services.

Ensure first aid & medical treatment to casualties as received by rescue team.

Arrange for transportation to the victims.

Intimation to outside agencies like fire brigade, mutual aid, hospitals & govt. authorities as per instruction by

ECC.

Assist site main controller to send internal / external help at the incident site, if require.

Arrange to inform the families of victims.

Arrange the canteen & welfare facilities if the emergency prolonged.

Arrange alternate shelter and food for the evacuated public and workers.

Ensure that all visitors & outside vehicles have been safety out of company premises.

7.4.3 Emergency Control Centre (ECC)

The emergency control centre plays most important role for directing emergency operations and must be located at

safe & easily accessible place.

Location of ECC:

At Admin Office

Attended by in the emergency:

HR Head

Site Main Controller (If required)

Role of ECC

After getting intimation from IC or other source, ECC will be attended by Unit Head, if required

ECC will provide necessary help to the incident controller for controlling emergency.

ECC will arrange outside help as per instruction by Incident controller / site main controller.

Ensure the actions as per emergency communication action plan.

In case of offsite emergency, to arrange for evacuation of neighboring public.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


In case of Main road is affected by emergency, to control Traffic till the arrival of Police.

Facilities available at ECC:

Following information is available at ECC

Copy of Onsite Emergency Plan

Copies of MSDS of all hazardous chemicals used in the company

Factory drawing

Emergency Telephone Nos.

Emergency PPE’s (Safety Appliances)

Telephone Facility

SCBA Set;

Table 7-23: List of Items at ECC

Sr. No Name of PPE’s Existing Qty. (Nos.) Proposed Qty. (Nos.) Total (Nos.)

1 First aid box 01 00 01

2 Fire extinguishers 02 00 02

3 Telephone directory 02 00 02

4 Umbrella 04 01 05

5 Note Book, Pen, Pencil, 05 01 06

6 Torch 02 00 02

7 Rain coat 02 02 04

8 On Site Plan, Map of Factory, etc. 01 00 01

7.4.4 Communication Facilities

When an emergency occurs it is necessary to raise the alarm immediately, to declare an emergency, to inform the

works emergency controllers, to inform the plant emergency services and affected areas. Following communication

facilities are provided in the plant for effective communication:

Emergency telephone nos., which includes fire brigade, Govt. Authorities, Hospitals, Police are displayed at

Emergency control center (Admin Office) and contact nos. of Key Personnel are available at Emergency control

center.

Mobile (cell) phones are provided to most of key personnel.

Siren is also available in the company for communicating emergency.

Codes of Siren:

Fire: - Wailing tone for 10 seconds followed by 5 seconds gap – repeated for 2 times.

Gas Leakage: Wailing tone for 20 seconds followed by 5 seconds gap – repeated for 3 times.

Air Raid: Wailing tone for 30 seconds followed by 5 seconds gap – repeated for 5 times.

All clear: Continuous tone for 2 minutes.

Testing: Every Monday Day – 15 second Normal Factory Siren

Table 7-24: Details of Alarms & Siren

Location The Alarm is

heard at KM

Location of operating

witch

It’s period of

checking Sound difference

At Main Gate 5 KM Main Security Office

On every Monday for 15 Second

Emergency Siren: Wailing Sound means 15 seconds blow and 5

second off for 1 minute.

All Clear Siren: Continuous Sound means continuous blowing for 1

minute after control of emergency.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


7.4.5 Emergency Communication Action Plan

Any person who is observing any abnormal situation like Fire, Explosion, Collapse of any structure, Spillage of

hazardous chemicals, Gas leakage, bursting of any tank, Pipe or any other equipment carrying hazardous

material in the company will immediately inform Area In-charge of respective area.

Area In-charge will inform Incident Controller & Security and then go to the occurrence spot and he will try to

control the occurrence.

Incident controller & Security will come to occurrence spot with necessary aids like stricture, Fire extinguishers,

SCBA set etc. & try to control occurrence jointly with Area in-charge.

Incident controller will get help from Engineering coordinator, HR coordinator, Emergency Coordinator.

If occurrence is not possible to control by their joint efforts, Incident controller (IC) will inform Site main

controller & take decisions for declaring the emergency to evacuate the person working in the plant.

If the emergency is not controllable & likely to spread to entire division, Incident controller shall get consent for

evacuating entire division from Site Main Controller (SMC).

On getting consent from Site main controller, Incident controller shall order security for raising Emergency

siren.

Security will raise EMERGENCY SIREN at security gate or anode division as per instruction of Incident

controller.

After confirmation for declaring emergency, SMC may come to Emergency Spot.

After hearing emergency siren, plant personnel will start to shut down their job safely. Key personnel &

essential persons will go to occurrence spot & play their respective role. Non-essential persons will go to safe

assembly area (Perpendicular to wind direction).

If help from outside agencies is required for controlling emergency, IC will inform emergency control centre

(ECC) for the same.

ECC will arrange required help as per requirement of IC.

Outside agencies will go to emergency spot & takes charge to control emergency. IC will provide necessary

help to outside agency.

If emergency is likely to affect outside people of surroundings, IC will inform SMC/ECC regarding the situation.

SMC/ECC will consult with Gov. Authorities & will act as per their advice.

District Authorities will come & go to Emergency spot & takes overall charge of controlling emergency then

starts actions accordingly.

After controlling Emergency, District authorities will inform to IC for raising All clear siren.

IC will inform security for raising All clear siren.

Security will raise ALL CLEAR SIREN at assembly area. After hearing of ALL CLEAR SIREN, Plant personnel will

resume their duty.

7.4.6 Key Persons & their Responsibilities

In the light of information received on the developing situation at the emergency, Key personnel will take directives

from Site Main Controllers to control emergency in the respective fields. Such key personnel will include the senior

persons for safety, security, fire gas and spill control, pollution control, communication system including telephone,

wireless, messengers etc., medical services, transport, engineering, production including utilities, laboratories,

stores and personnel (including welfare, canteen, shelters etc.). We have nominated Key Persons to handle the

situation of emergency person wise.

Table 7-25: List of Key Personnel

Sr. No. Designation Department Place of Availability in Plant

1 Mr. Sateesh Kumar Environment Admin-2 office

2 Mr. Anil Kumar Jain Safety Fire & safety office SP-1

3 Dr. Jagdish Vyas Medical (OHC) First aid centre

4 Mr. Sonal Arora Hr & admin Admin office

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Sr. No. Designation Department Place of Availability in Plant

5 Mr. Bikash Ranjan Nayak Security Security gate

Outside Drivers / Owner of the Vehicles

All the truck/ tanker drivers should be instructed to move their vehicles out of the gate without obstructing the road

& park the vehicle outside the main gate.

7.4.7 General Instructions

Speed of actions is essential.

Clarity of information and instructions to all concerned persons and authorities.

Telephone systems are to be used only for essential communication to combat the emergency.

In case of communication failure, send messengers by bicycle or any other transport available.

Ensure only trained persons are deployed for combating the situation and safety procedures are followed.

Ensure that MOCK DRILLS are conducted regularly.

Nobody should leave the premises without subjecting himself / herself to the head-count even during major

emergencies of fire, toxic-gas leak, flood, earthquake etc. Remember that other persons may have anxious

moments trying to trace you OR answer enquiries regarding you.

Adequate quantity of material to neutralize the risk elements should be kept ready.

During emergency, if your immediate superior is absent, you have to perform his emergency duties also.

After All Clear Signal

Investigation to avoid recurrence, recommendations and records – Safety Officer.

Resetting the operations – Site Main Controller.

Permission from different Authorities and Final Clearance - Chief Controller.

Preservation of evidence so as to facilitate any inquiry in to the cause and circumstances, which caused or

escalated in the emergency.

Emergency Response

Incidence observer will communicate the emergency to Site controller & raise the alarm.

On hearing the alarm or getting information about emergency, site controller will proceed to control room &

take charge. He will inform incident controller immediately.

Incident controller will proceed to affected area on hearing alarm or on getting report from Site Controller.

Fire pump attendant will proceed to Fire pump house & start fire water pump. All other persons will stand by

for instructions from incident controller.

Incident controller will organize emergency response activity & emergency response teams. He will also decide

for the need for outside assistance.

F & S officer will proceed to his position & control emergency with the help of Emergency crew personnel.

Administration In-charge will take control of main gate to control traffic. He will guide outside assistance like

fire brigade, ambulance van etc.

7.4.8 Outside Organization if involved in Assisting during On-Site Emergency

Company has good liaison with nearest fire station & disaster management & District authorities for mitigating the

emergency.

Table 7-26: Details of Outside Organization

Name & Address of the

Factories & Fire Stations

Approx.

Distance

Contact

information FFE Available

No. of Experts & Trained

Persons Available

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Adani Port Ltd 15 Km 02838-289101 All basic firefighting

facilities All staff

Govt. Fire Brigade Gandhidham 60 Km 02836-231610

Type of Accident

Chemical Spillages from tank /drums/ Containers

Flammable/ Toxic Gas Release.

Fire/ Explosion due to Gas Cylinders

Building Collapse

Electrical Installation failure like Transformer, PCC etc.

Natural Calamities (Cyclone, Lightening, Flood, Heavy rain fall, Earthquake

Causes

The causes or events that can lead to a major accident:

Table 7-27: Causes of Accidents

Natural Cyclone, Lightening, Flood, Heavy rain fall, Earthquake

Deliberate Sabotage, Terrorism, Plan Crash, Wars

Unsafe Acts & Situations Corrosion, Equipment Failure, Design Deficiency, Abnormalities in Operation or Maintenance &

Fire/ Emergency in neighbourhood.

Common Cause of Failures

Failures of containment may cause by various reasons, resulting in spillage/leakage of liquids. It may due to

manmade unsafe situation or natural.

Unsafe Act and Unsafe condition

In adequate design against internal pressure, external forces, corrosion and temperature.

Mechanical failures of pipes, vessels, elbows, due to corrosion, erosion, impact, etc.

Failure of manual and automatic control system and safe guard.

Failure of safety system.

Weld or gasket failure.

Unsafe operator / maintenance.

Emergency in neighboring industries.

Spillage, leakage of flammable materials, if get any source of ignition, resulting into fire.

Uncontrolled vehicle movement results into accident.

Any source of ignition catch by flammable liquid materials may be caused reason of Fire & Explosion due to

solvent spillage.

System Elements or Events that can lead to A Major Hazard

1. Operating Emergency/ Leak:

It can arise due to the following reasons:

Sudden, heavy leakage of gas/ liquids due to failure of gaskets/ valves pipelines & equipment.

Sudden leakage at loading/ unloading points.

Process Parameters going out of control (Process conditions, utility, instrument/ equipment failure etc.)

2. Fire Emergency: It can arise due to:

Sparks contacting with leaking/ spilled material.

Auto ignition due to gas/liquid falling on hot surface.

Welding & hot works.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Electrical short circuits.

Sparks due to static discharge.

Negligence/ smoking in hazardous chemical storage area.

Fire/ Gas leak in neighbouring industry.

3. Accidents:

Structural failure & collapse of buildings and equipment fall down from high altitude due to negligence causing

serious injury, wrong method of material handling, loading, or unloading of drums/ movement of heavy

equipment/ articles.

4. Natural Calamities:

Flood, Earthquakes, storm & Lightning

Safety Relevant Components

Fire hydrant, AFFF foam nozzles, and solutions, Fire water tanks, Gas masks & safety PPE’s with fire proximity

suits, Foam trolleys, And Portable Fire Extinguishers.

Scrubbers

Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus Sets.

Medical Oxygen supplies kit, Paddle operating suction machine etc containing well-equipped OHC.

Explosive Meter & Oxygen Meter.

Round the clock ambulance

7.4.9 Details of Dangerous Substances

Dangerous Substances details are presented in Table 7-28.

Table 7-28: Details of Dangerous Substances

S.

No.

Name of Hazardous

process and

operation

Types of

Hazards

occupational health impact on

employees Control measures Proposed

1 Amidofication Reaction

Exothermic reaction

,Hazardous , Fire and amine

fumes evaluation

Skin/Eye: Molten: Skin contact with material will cause thermal burns. Amine in recover water will cause burns & damage in eye. Exposure

to Amine vapours may be irritating to the eyes.

Nitrogen purging system , mass flow meter , Safety valve

,Rupture disk Control valve, Hydrant system, EF, Interlocking with temperature as high and low

and pressure, DCS operating system

2 Quarterisation Process irritating

material handling

Skin/Eye: Molten: Skin contact with material will cause thermal burns. vapours may be irritating to the

eyes.

SO3 absorber, mass flow meter interlocking with temp and

pressure, DCS operating system. PH meter

3 Sulphilation Reaction

Exothermic reaction

,Hazardus , irritating

fumes evaluation


eyes.

Nitrogen purging system , mass flow meter, Safety valve ,Rupture

disk Control valve, Hydrant system, EF, Interlocking with

temperature as high and low and pressure, DCS operating system

4 Esterification Reaction

Exothermic reaction

,Hazardus , irritating

fumes evaluation


eyes.

Nitrogen purging system, SO3 absorbed, Cooling system,

Control valve, mass flow meter, FR, Safety valve, Pressure

measuring system, Pressure controlling system. Temperature

control system. Alarm system

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


5 Drum filling Spill and chemical

contamination

Skin/Eye: Molten: irritating to the eyes.

Flame proof fitting, earthing and grounding, auto filling system,

PPE

6 Tanker

Loading/unloading system

Spill, Fire and explosion

Skin/Eye: Molten: irritating to the eyes.

Earthing grounding, Loading/unloading, check list,

Fire system

7 Storage of chemicals Spill, fire and

explosion


eyes.

Dedicated store, Flame proof fitting earthing and bonding, spill control kit. Firefighting system

Fire Details

Firefighting equipment items are presented in Table 7-29.

Table 7-29: List of Firefighting Equipment-Fire Extinguishers

No. Equipment’s Capacity Qty.(Nos.)

Existing

1 Dry Chemical Powder 25 Kg 37




5 Carbon Dioxide 3.2 Kg 3




Total 461

Proposed

1 Dry Chemical Powder 5 Kg

2 Dry Chemical Powder 9 kg 9

3 Carbon Dioxide 4.5 kg 4

4 Carbon Dioxide 6.8 kg 9

5 Carbon Dioxide 2 kg

Table 7-30: List of Firefighting Equipment-Fire Sand Buckets Stands

No Location of Fire Bucket stand Nos. of stands Total Sand Buckets

Existing

1 Tank farm 1 6

2 Tank farm (Near DOC Wall ) 0 0

3 Boiler 1 6

4 SEP 0 0

5 PCC ROOM 1 6

6 TRANSFORMER 1 6

7 HT PENAL ROOM 1 6

Proposed

1 Tank farm 1 6

2 Tank farm (Near DOC Wall ) 1 6

3 Boiler 1 6

4 SEP 0 0

5 PCC ROOM 0 0

6 TRANSFORMER 1 6

7 HT PENAL ROOM 0 0

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Accident Scenario

Table 7-31: Details of Accident Scenario with causes

S. No. Accident Scenario Causes Consequence Zone

1 Minor Spill

Hose failure during road tanker unloading to storage tank,

Pipeline/ pump gland leakage,

Gasket failure,

Spill of acidic/ flammable material

Local

2 Large Spill

Failure of bottom valve or catastrophic failure of reactor/ storage tanks, evaporator

Overturning of tanker

Off Site Potential

3

Explosion.

Release of high velocity Fragments of ruptured Equipment due to over pressure condition.

Run away Reaction,

Uncontrolled exothermic reaction,

Pressure development

Off Site Potential

4 Fire Any spill of flammable material catching fire on

finding of ignition source Local

5 Fire & Explosion due to leak of

Hydrogen Improper operations, handling, failure of

operational/ process control. Local

6 Electric Fire

At electrical installations,

Transformer area,

Loose cable,

Overloading on cables etc.

Local

7 Fall of Structure Earthquake, poor maintenance Local

8 Release of toxic flammable

vapours Distillation column failure of cooling tower Local

9 Air, Water, Soil Pollution

Leak of spill of any material- Solid, Liquid or Gaseous.

Toxic gas release from the neighbouring company.

Off Site Potential

10 Heavy rain fall/ Flooding Natural calamity Off Site Potential

11 Risk from surrounding Company

Due to leak of toxic gas from the process/ storage tank/ cylinders etc.

Explosion in reactor or tank due to overpressure

Off Site Potential

12 Fire in nearby company Due to unsafe material handling loading- unloading and failure in process control.

Off Site Potential

7.4.10 Hazard Control Plan

In Line with Disaster Control and Hazard Control Planning, Ensuring the Necessary Technical and Organizational

Precautions.

Assembly Point

The following points are identified as Safe Assembly Point and are marked/ Displayed, boards are provided in the

area.

Table 7-32: Location of Assembly Points

Sr. No. Location Accommodation

Capacity Name

Place of availability PPE that may be required

In the factory

1. Near Main Gate 1 500 Security I.C Main Gate-1 Sufficient personal protective equipment and fire

extinguishers and first aid boxes and other necessary

2 Unit-II Tanker Loading Bays

1000 Packing I.C. Small pack

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Sr. No. Location Accommodation

Capacity Name

Place of availability PPE that may be required

In the factory

3 Warehouse – 02

loading point 1000 Plant I.C Plant

items are available at the main gate and also in small pack &

plant.

4

Near 600TPD Utility

1000 Plant I.C Plant

5 Near oleo Tank

farm 500 Plant I.C. Plant

6 Near 1500 TPD 500 Plant I.C. Plant

7 New ETP 300 Plant I.C. Plant

In case any assembly area, which is affected adversely by emergency, Workers will go to safe assembly area

amongst above it means perpendicular to wind direction. Both assembly areas are identified.

Transport & Evacuation Arrangements

Ambulance van is available with driver at nearby sister concern. Apart from that 108 ambulance service is also

available. Other Transport & Evacuation arrangements are also available in the factory.

Apart from normal exits, Various Emergency Exits have been provided for easy evacuation of employees &

rescue operation.

Emergency evacuation route chart is also marked in each building. These are provided a teach building &

compartment.

The necessity for evacuation in the plant may arise due to fire, smoke exposure, Exposure of any hazardous

chemical, gas leakage, Natural emergency etc. in the affected area, which would also extend to the adjacent

area.

For the purpose of evacuating personnel, Safe assembly points are clearly marked to assemble the person at

safe place in the emergency.

Table 7-33: Transportation & Evacuation Arrangements

Sr. No. Vehicle Location Quantity Capacity Person Incharge

1 Four wheeler Main Security Gate 4 28 person Mr. Vijay Shah

Transport Department 2 Staff Bus Main Security Gate 3 153 person

Essential Employees

In each shift there will be available some trained workers in firefighting, use of gas masks, first aid. It will be a task

force to assist and execute the instructions of The Incident Controller and The Main Controller.

Rehearsal/ Mock Drill

As required by the Indian Manufacture, Storage, and import of Hazardous Chemical Rules (MSIHC 1989), mock

drills shall be held every six months to practice emergency response techniques. This would avoidconfusion and

save valuable time which would result in reducing the extent of loss to plant / equipment and human resources.

Regular training and rehearsal program of emergency procedures shall be conducted with elaborate discussions and

testing of action plan with mock drill. If necessary, the cooperation/ guidance of outside agencies will be sought.

Mock Drills

Table Top Experience

Mock-drill – within one department / plant

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Full scale Mock Drill Yearly

Revision

“The Plan”, will be reviewed once in every calendar year and modified if necessary. In case of any change in the

process of operations or methods.

Safety Policy

As a commitment towards safe working environment, the Management has formulated a safety policy and the same

is displayed at prominent places at site.

7.4.11 Emergency Action Plan

Emergency situations can occur in the plant due to Fire/Explosion/Flammable Gas release. In sequence to the

Emergency Communication action plan, actions to be taken to mitigate the fire. Following firefighting measures to

be utilized for the same.

Rescue operation as well as first aid & medical treatment should be given first priority.

In case of small fire, it can be extinguished by fire extinguishers or fire sand bucket or application of water

according to class of fire

In case of major fire, outside help can be utilized & electrical shutdown should be done for affected area.

If major fire is in close room, Person must use self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) set to go to spot for

firefighting. SCBA set is kept at store.

Not to apply any liquid based fire extinguisher to live electrical fittings.

Outside help can be made available for firefighting in case of fire is not controllable with all internal resources.

If any solvent or petroleum storage is there nearby fire, Solvent area must be cooled with spreading water

along with firefighting.

In case of any body is caught in fire, Stop, Drop & roll him for extinguishing fire, then arrange first aid &

medical treatment.

For fire in live electrical fittings or panel, CO2 gas, dry chemical powder or dry sand to be used.

Actions against Explosion:

In case of explosion it is very important to take preventive actions instead of mitigated actions. In case of any

casualty is there, Rescue, first aid & medical treatment should be given on top priority. If fire resulted after

explosion, then take actions required for fire.

Actions against Flammable Gas release:

Rescue operation as well as first aid & medical treatment should be given first priority.

Ensure that no spark causing equipment is made on/off in the gas exposed area.

Self-Contained Breathing apparatus (SCBA) set, PVC suit, PVC Hood, PVC hand gloves & gum boot must be

utilized before going to mitigate any kind of release.

Wet cloth mask to be kept on the nose by unwanted persons & to be shifted at safe assembly area.

In case of gas is uncontrollable, evacuate the area towards perpendicular direction of wind direction.

If situation is anticipated to affect other departments, those departments must be evacuated to safe assembly

area according to wind direction (Perpendicular to wind direction).

If situation is anticipated to affect outside people, anticipated area must be evacuated to safe place according

to wind direction (Perpendicular to wind direction) with keeping wet mask on the nose. Cattle’s should be made

free.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Post Emergency Actions

Prepare immediate Incident/Accident report as soon as possible and submit it to Safety department /

administration department.

The Functional head shall carry out an investigation and prepare a detailed report mentioning any further

requirement of facilities for avoiding & tackling such type of emergencies. Modify Emergency plan as necessary.

Before the startup of plant, Engineering / Respective dept. shall assess the danger to ensure equipment is safe

for continued services.

Operated Emergency equipments to be refilled / replaced.

Rehabilitation of plant and all affected onsite & off-site personnel.

Collection of records.

Insurance claims

Rehabilitation of affected personnel.

Complying formalities related to government authorities.

Normalization of plant

Ensuring proper medical care to the persons who are affected by emergency

Respective division head shall reply to press and public during and after the emergency if required.

Communication Cascade

Table 7-34: Emergency Actions

OBSERVER Inform Supervisor/ Shift In charge

SUPERVISOR/ AREAINCHARGE Inform Security & Incident controller.

Come to Occurrence spot & Arrange evacuation at localized area & start controlling action.

INCIDENT CONTROLLER(IC) Come to Occurrence spot & start controlling action.

Engineering coordinator, HR coordinator, Safety In-charge may be called by IC.

SECURITY & ENGINEERING COORDINATOR

Come to occurrence spot. Security shall come with necessary aids like Ambulance, megaphone, stricture, Fire

extinguishers, SCBA set etc. & try to control occurrence jointly with supervisor/ shift in-charge.

INCIDENT CONTROLLER (IC) If occurrence is not possible to control by their efforts, Incident controller will inform Site Main

Controller (HOD) regarding the occurrence.

SITE MAIN CONTROLLER (If required) Come to Occurrence spot & review the impact for spreading of occurrence.

INCIDENT CONTROLLER (IC) If Occurrence is likely to spread, IC will discuss with Site Main Controller & get consent for

declaring Emergency. IC will instruct security for raising Emergency siren.

EMERGENCY SIREN Security shall Raise EMERGENCY SIREN at main gate with wailing sound at which evacuation is

required.

In Case of Off-Site Emergency (Effects of Emergency is not confined to company premises)

SMC/ECC will inform District collector/authorities. District authorities shall come to occurrence spot & Take

charge of controlling emergency.

After controlling emergency, give clearance to site main controller (SMC).

Hospitals:

→Adani Hospital, Mundra 02838-619555

→Adani Hospital, Shantivan 02838- 284400

→Shah Orthopedic Hospital, Bhuj 02832-254415

→Rao Hospital, Bhuj 02832- 254054

Government authorities:

→Govt Hospital, Bhuj 02832-222850/220552

Fire Brigades:

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


→Govt, Fire Brigade Gandhidham 02836-231610

→Adani Port Ltd/Fire Brigade 02838-289101

7.4.12 Fire Fighting Resources

Fire Water Hydrant System

There is a dedicated tank of 600 m3 capacity for fire water. Details of fire pumps are presented in table below:

Table 7-35: Fire Pump details

Pump Detail Number of

Pump Head Capacity (Flow) KW/HP

Jockey Pump 2 88.0 meter 10.8 m3/hrs KW/HP :15 HP:20

Electrical Pump 2 88.0 meter 273 m3/hrs KW/HP-110 HP 150

Diesel Pump 1 88.0 meter 273 m3/hrs KW/ HP: 139.84/190 :

Total 5

Fire water sprinkler System

There is a dedicated tank of 600 m3 capacity for sprinkler water with two number of fire water sprinkler pump. One

is operated electrically with discharge 273 m3/hr. & other is diesel operated with discharge 273 m3/hr.

Emergency Power

DG Set. 2 Nos.- 1250 KVA & 2 Nos 1500 KVA

7.4.13 Medical Facilities

First Aid

First Aid box is available as & where required & main security gate.

Medical and First aid

Ambulance van is available with driver at nearby sister concern. Apart from that 108 ambulance service is also

available. Other Transport & Evacuation arrangements are also available in the factory.

Hospitals

Company has necessary tie up with nearby hospitals for emergency treatment.

Table 7-36: List of Hospitals

Sr.

No

Name of Medical

Treatment Facility

Location &

Phone No.

Name of

Incharge

Accommodation

Facility Distance

Facility &

Equipment

Antidotes

Available

1 ADANI HOSPITAL

SEZ MUNDRA (02838) 619555

Incharge doctor

120 beds 11 km

MD & MBBS Doctor Medicine

_

ICU

Operation Theater Indoor

treatment provision

Basic medical facilities

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


2 GOVT HOSPITAL

ADANI HOSPITAL

BHUJ 222850/

220552

Incharge doctor

1000 Beds 63 KM

MD & MBBS Doctor Medicine

ICU Operation

Theater Indoor treatment provision

Basic medical facilities

7.4.14 Off-Site Emergency Plan

The following are the responsibilities towards generation of the Offsite Emergency Plan:

To provide the local/district authorities, police, fire, brigade, doctors, surrounding industries and public the

basic information of risk and environmental impact assessment and appraise them of the consequences and the

protection/prevention measures and to seek their help to communicate with public in case of major emergency.

To assist district authorities for preparing the off-site emergency plan for district or particular area and to

organize rehearsals from time to time and initiate corrective actions on experience.

An off-site emergency plan organization has essentially two parts:

Formation of the Local Crisis Group: This Group is headed by the Deputy Collector or the Magistrate of the

Industrial area and is responsible for the management of any industrial emergency confined to the local area.

Formation of the District Crisis Group: This Group is headed by the District Collector of the District and is

responsible for any major Industrial emergency affecting Local and beyond any industrial area of the District.

The typical structure of the Offsite Emergency Crisis group is provided in Figure 7-19.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Figure 7-19: Composition of Offsite Crisis Group

7.4.15 Checklist of Do’s & Don’ts of preventive maintenance, strengthening of HSE, manufacturing

utility staff for safety related measures

Checklist of Do’s and Don’ts for preventive maintenance is presented in Table 7-37 and for HSE & Safety

measures are presented in Table 7-38.

Table 7-37: Do’s & Don’ts of Preventive Maintenance

Do’s Don’ts

Do ensure all equipment is installed correctly and operating as intended.

Don’t underestimate the inconvenience caused by equipment breakdown.

Do follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the installation, operation, storage, cleaning and maintenance of equipment.

Don’t be tempted to operate your equipment beyond its rated capacity. Don’t push it to its limits or use it for purposes other

than what it was designed for.

Do proper arrangement of the power fluctuation and surge protection of the equipment.

Don’t overload power points and electrical circuitry. E.g. ‘piggybacking’ of double adapters, power boards and

extension leads.

Do schedule regular electrical testing of all equipment. Don’t wait for failure to occur - implement a preventative

maintenance program now.

Schedule the thermal, hydro test, thickness testing of the equipment.

Do not allow the person to work without getting the authorized work permit.

Develop the check list for the preventive maintenance of the equipment’s.

Do not allow hot work like welding, cutting, drilling in the Flammable or chemical storage zone.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Do’s Don’ts

Do keep all equipment well ventilated to prevent it from overheating. Keep moisture away too.

Do not allow the person to do the maintenance work without availability of safety measures/PPE’s.

Do keep ‘pest control’ programs up to date. Remember rats and mice are good climbers and can easily chew through

wires, cabling and the like.

Do not allow the person to do the work in low oxygen zone. Area has to be checked by oxygen analyser before

maintenance.

Do train staff in the safe use and maintenance of equipment, including the early warning signs of failure.

Do not allow to pump to work dry and without discharge.

Do encourage employees to report any problems with equipment immediately.

Do not allow the utilities to work beyond its rated capacity.

Do promote a safety culture to limit the chance of workplace accidents and injuries

Do not allow any maintenance work without ensuring that the main of the supply to the equipment is removed.

Establish ‘Maintenance Schedule’ for ensuring all major equipment is regularly checked and kept in good working

order.

Review and replace consumable items, such as belts and filters, according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Keep an accurate log book of all maintenance activities.

Replacement parts that can quickly become obsolete or difficult to source.

The storage tanks/reactors are completely flushed by inert gas and tested by Oxygen analyses before go for Preventive

maintenance.

The overall noise level in and around the plant area shall be kept well within the prescribed standards by providing noise

control measures including acoustic insulation, hoods, silencers, enclosures vibration dampers etc. on all sources of

noise generation.

Use appropriate MOC of the Equipment’s for the handling of Corrosive & toxic chemicals.

Do regular cleaning & painting of the structural materials.

Do schedule oiling & greasing of the gears, or rotating equipment’s.

Do ensure that the plug out of any electrical connection before doing maintenance of the Equipment’s.

Table 7-38: Do’s & Don’ts list for HSE & Safety measures

Do’s Don’ts

Proper lifting tools & tackles or equipment’s with adequate capacity.

Don’t use the tools & tackles or equipment’s above its designed lifting load capacity.

Authorized person & supervision should be for material handling

Do not allow person to move in the Drum loading & forklift movement area.

Knowledge of material handling & hazard related to the same.

Do not store the chemicals that are incompatible with other chemicals.

Do the separate arrangement for Hazardous & non-hazardous chemicals along with proper identifications.

Do not allow empty containers of hazardous chemicals to be used by others.

Use appropriate personal protective equipment like gloves, aprons, respirator, face shield etc. while handing the

Hazardous chemicals

Do not dispose chemical without chemical treatment or neutralization.

Use safety showers, eye washer in case of splash of chemical into the eyes.

Do not use chemicals or solvent for cleaning hands & doing siphoning by mouth.

Provide proper ventilation at the chemical handling area to limit their concentration within prescribed level.

Do not spill the chemical & movement of loose lid filled drums.

Segregate toxic, flammable chemicals and keep them under control.

Do not leave flammable & hazardous material at the work area.

While lifting a load physically, keep the load as near as possible to the body with feet properly placed for body

balance.

Do not hold the load with top & also do not exceed the lifting load more than 55 kg for men & 30 kg for women.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Do’s Don’ts

The waste Hazardous container, waste used cloths, carboys, bags should be disposed properly.

Do not store flammable & Hazardous chemical in open area.

Keep minimum inventory of flammable material. Do not use instrument that are not intrinsically safe in the

explosive area.

Keep the fire water tank always full & schedule cleaning of filters or strainer attached to the pumps.

Do not allow to take the water from Fire water tank for plant uses.

Schedule testing of fire hydrant hose, hose reel, hose clams. Do not keep damaged hose pipe into the Hose boxes.

Do proper earthing of all the storage tanks, Reactors & electrical equipment’s & panels to prevent the accumulation

of Static charges.

Do not allow unloading & loading of flammable chemicals with proper earthing arrangement.

Check periodically operationally of the firefighting system & repair the abnormalities immediately.

Do not misuse fire-fighting equipment other than intended purpose.

Proper ventilation shall be provided in the work area. Do not obstruct accessibility to the fire related equipment.

Do maintain the First aid boxes with necessary antidotes & bandages.

Do not keep the medicines which are of expiry dates.

Do follow the sign of No smoking, No Mobile & any another electronic item

Do not smoke in the No smoking zone.

Do your working area proper cleaning & dust free Do not let the dust to make the layers on the instruments.

Provide proper free space for the movement of personnel & material.

Do not allow the dustbins to overflow.

Keep separate bins for paper, plastics, metals, and glass & bio-medical waste.

Do not disturb the safety equipment’s form their mentioned place.

Do regular refilling of fire extinguishers. Do not block emergency exit area, emergency switch &

on/off switches of the equipment’s.

Ensure exits are indicated / painted for use during emergency.

Do not generate extra waste.

Arrest all types of spills such as chemical, water, oil, air / gas, steam etc. and clean up the area immediately.

Do not leave a spillage unattended.

Know the location where emergency equipment such as first aid box, firefighting equipment, SCBA, Stretchers are kept.

Do not destroy the inspection tag provided with the fire equipment.

Regular health check-up of all the employee. And maintain the record for the same.

Proper direction mentioned & location of Assembly point for the plant personal.

7.5 Social Impact Assessment

7.5.1 Identification of Focussed Area

The main impact of Synthetic organic is through soil, air and water. Considering the impact due to Land use/land

cover, Noise and vibration and air the focus area for social studies was taken within 3 Kms from the proposed

project site.

Detailed description of the focused area with reference to the socio economic study was carried out based on focus

group discussions with the stakeholders. Community consultation results in identification of relevant issues

identified by local residents, and a lack of it can result in missed data, in addition to missed opportunities to share

experiences and identify solutions to resolve concerns / issues.

The nature of the villages in the focused area based on discussions with the Village Sarpanches / PRI

representatives (duly recorded on village fact sheets) indicated the following:

The villages are predominantly consisting of General and OBC community. Being an industrial area also people

from different region of India and a very less ~1.08% (Census 2011) of schedule tribe community resides in

the study area.

No significant diversity is observed within the villages. Most are single or double community villages.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Due to the above considerations, further field studies focused on undertaking primarily focus group discussions,

since household level questionnaires would not probably yield any specific useful information requiring Redressal as

part of the Social Management Plan.

7.5.2 Focussed Group Discussion Details & Their Findings

The basic FGD was done in the Gram Panchayat, Anganwadi, School and Primary Health Centre. The people are

aware about the project as proponent is having existing unit.

Dhrab

FGD at Gram Panchayat

The FGD was conducted with Sarpanch and Talati. Following points were highlighted during the discussion:

The main source of income of gram panchayat is house tax, professional tax and government grant.

Mostly people earn their livelihood by cattle rearing, farming and working in nearby Industry.

Drinking water is supplied by Narmada canal pipeline. Village is having Primary health sub- centre. For availing

the treatment people go to Mundra. Main diseases noted during the conversation are seasonal disease like

cough, common cold, fever etc.

There is no waste collection system in the village.

During the conversation requirements noted are RCC road, Solar street light and paver block.

FGD at School

Focused group discussion was conducted at Government primary school with Principal and teachers.

Following points emerged during the discussion.

Primary school is a Gujarati medium government school in all there are 109 students and 05 teachers. The

student teacher ratio is 1:21. As observed by the attendance register more boys are there as compared to girls

in the school. All the teachers come from Mundra and are having average 10 years of experience in teaching.

Adani foundation has also provided one teacher to this school under there Utthan Project.

Mid-day meal is provided to the students. They are having the provision of separate toilets for girls and boys,

library, playground etc.

Books and uniform are provided by State Government to the students.

The requirements which emerged during the discussion are shed for Mid-day meal and water filter with cooler.

Nana Kapaya


The FGD was conducted with Sarpanch. Following points were highlighted during the discussion:

The main source of income of gram panchayat is house tax and government grant.

Mostly people earn their livelihood by cattle rearing, farming and transportation business.

Drinking water is supplied by Narmada canal pipeline.

Village is having Primary health centre. For availing the treatment people go to Mundra. Main diseases noted

during the conversation are seasonal disease like cough, common cold, fever etc.


During the conversation requirements noted are paver block, Solar street light, drainage line and stitching

machine.

FGD at School

Focused group discussion was conducted at Government primary school with Principal and teachers.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Following points emerged during the discussion:


student teacher ratio is 1:29. As observed by the attendance register more boys’ and girls’ ratio is equal in the

school. All the teachers come from Mundra and are having average 07 years of experience in teaching. Adani

foundation has also provided one teacher to this school under there Utthan Project.




The requirements which emerged during the discussion are computer lab and tables.

FGD at Anganwadi

There are 2 anganwadi in the Nana Kapaya village. The FGD was conducted in 1 anganwadi located in the village.

There are 24 students in anganwadi, average 22 students attend the anganwadi regularly.

Vaccination and regular check-up is done every month for anganwadi children’s, Pregnant and nursing women

of the village at Anganwadi.

During the survey, it was found that there no malnourished children. Seasonal disease like cough, common

cold, fever etc. due to climate change is found among students.

They have requested for renovation of Anganwadi and posters and toys for children.

Mota Kapaya




Mostly people earn their livelihood by farming and Labor work.


Village is having Primary health sub- centre. For availing the treatment people go to Mundra. Main diseases

noted during the conversation are seasonal disease like cough, common cold, fever etc.


During the conversation Sarpanch suggested to give proper waste management facility for the village.

FGD at Primary School

Focused group discussion was conducted at Government Boys primary school with Principal and teachers.



student teacher ratio is 1:26. All the teachers come from Mundra and are having average 10 years of

experience in teaching.




Principal requested to give sports uniform to students.

FGD at Secondary School

Focused group discussion was conducted at Government secondary school with Principal and teachers.


M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES








There were no specific demands from the principal.

Zarapara




Mostly people earn their livelihood by cattle rearing and farming.


Village is having Primary health centre. For availing the treatment people go to Mundra. Main diseases noted

during the conversation are seasonal disease like cough, common cold, fever etc.


During the conversation requirements noted are CCTV camera, Paver block and individual toilets.










Principal requested for Computer, benches, Plantation and painting of building.

Borana




Mostly people earn their livelihood by farming.


Village does not have any Primary health centre or sub - centre. For availing the treatment people go to

Bhujpur Primary Health centre. Main diseases noted during the conversation are seasonal disease like cough,

common cold, fever etc.


During the conversation requirements noted Paver block and community hall.




M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES








Principal requested to provide computer with projector and shed for mid-day meal.

Photograph 7-1: Photographs of Focussed Group Discussion

Zarapara Panchayat Focused group discussion at Zarapara Panchayat

Dhrab Primary school Anganwadi Nana Kapaya

Mota Kapaya Gram Panchayat Mota Kapaya Boys primary school

Borana Primary school At Proposed project site

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



STUDIES


Suggested Community Development Activities

Table 7-39: Suggested activities

Sr. No. Name of Village Suggested activities

1 Dhrab

Gram Panchayat

RCC Road

Solar Street Light

Paver Block

Primary School

RO Plant

Shed for Mid-day meal

2 Nana Kapya

Gram Panchayat

Paver Block

Solar Street Light

Drainage Line

Stitching Machine

Primary School

Table

Computer lab

Anganwadi

Renovation of Anganwadi -1

Posters and toys

3 Mota Kapaya

Gram Panchayat

Waste Management

Primary School

T shirt for Sports

4 Jarpara

Gram Panchayat

CCTV Camera

Paver Block

Toilet

Primary School

Computer

Benches

Plantation

Painting of school building.

5 Borana

Gram Panchayat

Hall for Community Program

Paver Block

Primary School

Computer and Projector

Shed For Mid-Day Meal

M/S. ADANI WILMAR


FACILITY AT VILLAGE DHRAB & MUNDRA, KUTCH PROJECT BENEFITS


8 PROJECT BENEFITS

8.1 Technological Benefits

Backward integration of manufacturing activity leading to Make In India Concept. The new products will be

manufactured using environment friendly technology with emphasis on sustainable development.

8.2 Substantial Socio-Economic Benefits

The project will deliver socio-economic benefits as follows:

The project related construction activities will benefit with temporary employment of construction laborers –

skilled, semi-skilled and un-skilled, tertiary sector employment and provision of goods and services for daily

needs including transport.

The proposed project will provide additional permanent employment to the skilled as well as un-skilled persons.

The local population will be given preference depending upon their suitability to the job requirement.

Social investment in the form of continued CSR activities would help improve the healthcare, education,

sanitation, infrastructure and other areas wherein the project proponent would be actively involved as part of

its CSR commitments.

8.3 Improvements in the social infrastructure

The Corporate Environmental Responsibility (CER) interventions proposed include:

Preventive health, Sanitation and safe, clean drinking water;

Education and Skill development;

Rural Development;

Environmental Sustainability including village pond rejuvenation

Help to needy children in the schools;

Help in providing Digital education in village school;

Providing drinking water to nearby villagers;

Helping Gram Panchayat in improving infrastructure facilities

8.3.1 Mobile ambulance will be provided.

Skill development programs will take place.

8.4 Employment potential –Skilled; Semi-Skilled and Unskilled

There shall be employment generation for the local people during the construction and operational phase of the

proposed facility. Local skilled and semi-skilled workers will be preferentially hired for the purpose.

8.5 Other Tangible Benefits

The positive impacts include enhanced direct employment for technical / administrative works and indirect

employment opportunities for transporters of raw material and finished goods. There will be indirect development

of small businesses for various aspects around the site.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR


FACILITY AT VILLAGE DHRAB & MUNDRA, KUTCH ENVIRONMENT COST

BENEFIT ANALYSIS


9 ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS

Environmental cost benefit analysis has not been recommended at the scoping stage, and has therefore not been

carried out.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR


FACILITY AT VILLAGE DHRAB & MUNDRA, KUTCH ENVIRONMENT

MANAGEMENT PLAN


10 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN (EMP)

10.1 Introduction

The EIA study for the proposed project has identified impacts that are likely to arise during different phases of the

project. The study has also examined the extent to which the adverse impacts identified can be controlled through

the adoption of mitigation measures. An EMP, presented in the following sections, describes generic good practice

measures as well as site-specific measures, the implementation of which is aimed at mitigating potential impacts

associated with the proposed activities.

Details of expected aspect due to Proposed Activities in project and its management plan are presented in the

tables on following pages:


KUTCH ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT

PLAN


Table 10-1: Environmental Management Plan for Air Quality

Objective To ensure that air emissions due to the site preparation, installation of proposed project and operation phase will be minimum

Concern Operation phase can deteriorate air quality

Benefit of EMP Reduced air pollution and protection of health of workers and local community

Impacting Activities

Mitigation Measures and Rationale

Implementation and Management Remarks

Location Timing Responsibility Monitoring Records

Dust generation due to Site preparation

Sprinkling of water which lead to dust

suppression At site

Once in a day during the site

cleaning/preparation Contractor

Random checks by Site Engineer

Water consumption records

Ambient air monitoring records

-

Vehicle movement for transportation of

construction materials and equipment

Ensure that vehicles have a Pollution Under

Control (PUC) Certificate

At the gate

During construction phase

Contractor Checks by security staff at the entry

gate PUC Certificate

Dust Generation due to Excavation work

Sprinkling of water which leads to dust

suppression At Site

Once a day during the excavation

process Contractor



Ambient air monitoring -

Dust Generation due to Filling of foundation


suppression At site

Once a day during the filling of foundation

Contractor Random checks by

Site Engineer


Ambient air monitoring -

VOC’s emission due to Painting

Adequate safety measures along with

spill control mechanism

At site Ongoing activity to be implemented by

an SOP Contractor


Periodic Workplace air quality monitoring & Analysis

reports

workplace monitoring

Proper personnel protective equipment to

be worn by workers at all times

Dust emission at the time of Final Clearing

of site


suppression At site

Once a day during the Final Clearing of

site Contractor


Water consumption records -

Transportation of raw materials and

products

Ensure that vehicles have a Pollution Under

Control (PUC) Certificate

Along the vehicle

movement track

At all times during operational phase

Safety department Checks by security staff at the entry

gate PUC Certificate -

Adequate safety measures along with

spill control mechanism

At site During

Transportation EHS Officer

Periodic monitoring by a

party acceptable to regulatory authority

Type of chemicals, operating condition of chemicals transported, Periodic Workplace air quality

monitoring

Record of leak detection

Proper personnel protective equipment to

be worn by workers at all times



PLAN


Objective To ensure that air emissions due to the site preparation, installation of proposed project and operation phase will be minimum

Concern Operation phase can deteriorate air quality

Benefit of EMP Reduced air pollution and protection of health of workers and local community


Mitigation Measures and Rationale

Implementation and Management Remarks

Location Timing Responsibility Monitoring Records

Manufacturing process

Adequate safety measures, adequate

stack height, Electrostatic

Precipitator for exhausted gases,

Pigment dust will be controlled by

equipment like water scrubber & Alkali

scrubber, etc.

At processing areas of the plant premises

At all times during operational phase

EHS Officer

Periodic stack monitoring,

ambient air quality monitoring, work place monitoring

Stack, ambient air quality monitoring reports, work place monitoring report

PPEs to be provided to workers and will be used

by workers in process area; regular health

check-ups of the employees/workers

Operation of Water Tube Boiler, HP Boiler, Thermic Fluid Heater

and DG set

Adequate safety measures, adequate

stack height At site

At all time, during the production

process Safety department

Periodic stack monitoring

Ambient air monitoring records of the stack

-



PLAN


Table 10-2: Traffic Management Plan

Objective To ensure that there is smooth traffic both within and outside the facility for the duration of the construction phase and operation phase

Benefit of EMP Smooth and congestion free traffic operation

Impacting

Activity Mitigation Measures

Implementation and Management

Remark Data Analysis

Measurement

Methodology Frequency Location

Reporting &

Implementation

Responsibility

Emergency

Procedure

Movement of vehicles

throughout the construction phase and operational phase. Road Signage and

Training

Controlled vehicular movement (preferably with clearly demarcated entry /

exit) with adequate supervision

Vehicles movement Manual Throughout

construction and operation phase

Main Gate Security In charge Route for safe exit will be in

place. --

Segregation of vehicular and pedestrian area

-- -- Throughout


-- Security In charge Route for safe exit will be in

place. --

Vehicle entry and exit scheduling so that traffic congestion is not created on the public road leading

to the site.

Provision of road sinages and periodic training to

drivers for effective traffic movement

-- -- Throughout


-- Security In charge Route for safe exit will be in

place. --



PLAN


Table 10-3: Environmental Management Plan for Noise Environment

Objective To reduce noise level due to the proposed project

Benefit of EMP Preventing the noise environment from being adversely affected due to the proposed activities

Impacting Activity

Mitigation Measures

Implementation and Management Remark

Data Analysis

Measurement Methodology

Frequency Location Reporting &

Implementation Responsibility

Procurement Schedule

Vehicular movement for

transportation of materials and

equipment

Vehicles trips during daytime only fixing route by avoiding populated area

Vehicle movement

records Manual Daily

At material gate

Security officer During construction

and operation phase

Road Signage, Instructions to

Transport Contractor

Start-up and shutdown

activities like operation of

equipment for all the proposed

plants

SOP’s will be followed. Acoustic enclosures will be provided. Ear plugs and Ear muffs will be provided to workers

Noise Levels SLM

Once during week (Hourly reading for 24 hours at each

location)

All plants Plant in charge & Third

Party/Contractor

During commissioning

phase

Ear plugs/Ear muffs to be worn by workers at

all times.

Operation of DG sets

SOP’s will be followed Noise Levels SLM

Once during week (Hourly reading for 24 hours at each

location)

All plants Plant in charge & Third

Party/Contractor During operation

phase

Proper personal protective equipment to be worn by workers

at all times.

Dismantling of structures of the

project components

Dismantling activities during daytime only &

well maintained vehicles should be used

Noise Levels SLM During

operation of activity

Near dismantling

site

Plant in charge & Third Party/Contractor

During dismantling phase

Proper personal protective equipment to be worn by workers

at all times.



PLAN


Table 10-4: Environment Management Plan for Water Environment

Objective To reduce surface water pollution

Concern Pollution to surface water

Benefit of EMP Surface water quality will not be impacted by the proposed activity


Mitigation Measures and Rationale Implementation and Management

Remarks Location Timing Responsibility Monitoring Records

Usage of Water

Water conservation practice with ZLD concept shall be done by recycling of treated water through recycling in plant

premises to reduce water demand as well as to conserve natural resources.

Drip irrigation systems shall be proposed for gardening.

Online flow meters shall be installed at each of raw water consumption point.

Explore the condensate recovery from the boiler.

At site All time Site EHS

Manager / EHS Team

Monitoring of water

consumption at intake points

Records of Water consumption at each unit to be

carried out

-

Wastewater generation,

treatment and disposal

Wastewater generated from the proposed project shall be segregated at source and treated in ETPs followed by RO &

MEE and treated water shall be reused in plant.

Online flow meters shall be installed at inlet and outlet of the ETPs.

Use of PPE’s shall be mandatory while handling the chemicals in ETP to avoid spillages.

ETP Sludge shall be disposed into approved Landfill site and ETP sludge from domestic shall be used as a manure.

At Site All time

Site EHS Manager / EHS Team/ETP in

charge

Monitoring of inlet and outlet

quality of wastewater

Records of wastewater

generation and discharge quantity to be maintained.

Also records for recycled treated wastewater to be

maintained.

Hazardous waste Management and

Disposal

Hazardous waste shall be segregated at source and stored in hazardous waste storage area.

Proper area shall be demarcated for the storage of hazardous waste facilitate with impervious flooring and

bunding to avoid leakage problem.

Spill control mechanism shall be in place. PPE’s shall be mandatory while handling the hazardous waste during

loading & unloading of wastes.

At Site All time Site EHS

Manager / EHS Team

Periodic Workplace

monitoring shall be carried out

Records of hazardous waste generation and

disposal quantity to be maintained.



PLAN


Table 10-5: Environmental Management Plan – Groundwater

Objective To ensure that the water environment during site preparation, plant operation, and decommissioning phase is properly managed and mitigated

to minimize its effect

Benefits of EMP Reduce deterioration of water quality in and around the site, and in turn protecting health of workers, marine life and surrounding community

Impacting Activities Mitigation measures

and Rationale

Implementation Monitoring and Management

Location Timing Responsibility Monitoring Records Administrative Aspects

Storage, handling of chemicals and disposal

of waste water

Monitoring activity to check if mitigation

measures like spill control, proper handling of all

chemicals, training etc. are effective or not

Piezometer well

Once in month Site in charge,

EHS department

Monitoring of Salinity, TDS, pH, EC by authorized laboratory in and around the site

Ground water level and

quality results

To keep records and to informed EHS or environment or concerned

department for variation in ground water quality

Start up and shutdown activities including washing of process equipment, pipeline, tanks, etc. venting in case of pressurized operation or vessel,

sludge removal, storage and disposal

Quantity & Quality of ground water intake to be

checked regularly

Piezometer well

Once in month Site in charge,

EHS department



quality results


department for variation in ground water quality

Dismantling of plant machinery & equipment

To conduct primary due diligence for ensuring no contamination through

soil & ground water

At site After

dismantling Site in charge,

EHS department



quality results


department for variation in soil & ground water quality



PLAN


Table 10-6: Environmental Management Plan - Land Environment

Impacting Activity Operation Controls /

Mitigation Measures


Remark Data

Analysis

Measurement

Methodology Monitoring Location

Reporting

Schedule /

Responsibility

Records Procurement

Schedule

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C11 C12

General & Utilities

Clearance of vegetation

Clearance of vegetation shall only be done on which construction is to take place

Top soil will be stored separately and will be used for greenbelt within the site.

Landscape will be developed within site.

- -

Periodic records in form of

photographs

Random checks by

Site supervisor

At Site Site Engineer

Periodic records in form of

photographs

- -

Excavation

Excavated earth will be used for backfilling and care will be taken that natural drainage

pattern of the surrounding area remains unchanged

Table 10-7: Environmental Management Plan -Soil Environment

Sr. No. Potential Impact Action Parameters for Monitoring Parameters for

Monitoring Mitigation Measures Timings

1 Top soil loss Preserve the same at the earmarked

place -

Preserving the top soil

Till it is used for landscape/gardening

2

Soil contamination due to spillage of construction

material/ETP waste/chemicals etc.

Check the soil quality EC, pH and ESP During construction and

completion of the project and at the time of de-commissioning



PLAN


Table 10-8: Environmental Management Plan – Ecology & Biological Environment

Project Activity

Operation Controls / Mitigation Measures


Remark Data Analysis

Measurement Methodology

Frequency Location Reporting Schedule /

Responsibility

Procurement Schedule

Project Operation

Emission of dust due to vehicular movement, Handling of Coal, Emission of PM, SO2,

NOx operation of Boilers. Noise Generation (due to operation of

boilers, generators, compressors, pumps, blowers)

Green belt will be

maintained in the total plot area of AWL

Tree plantation Counts

Manual

During start of

construction phase

Within plant premises and around Likely Impact Zone

HR Manager

During Construction &

Operation phase

Capital cost: Cost for saplings in and around project site. Recurring Cost: Maintenance of

Greenbelt

M/S. ADANI WILMAR


EXISTING FACILITY AT VILLAGE DHRAB & MUNDRA, KUTCH ENVIRONMENT

MANAGEMENT PLAN


10.1.1 Summary of Environment Management Plan

Air Environment

Properly designed and appropriate air pollution control equipment will be attached to Boilers, Thermic Fluid heaters

& DG Sets. Effective measures will be taken to control fugitive emissions. Emission control measures will be taken

to ensure air emission standards and norms are strictly followed.

Noise Environment

PPEs like Ear Plugs and Ear Muffs will be provided to workers. Acoustic barriers like green belt development will be

implemented.

Water Environment

Covered trenches are provided in the periphery of every plant as well as total plot, whatever the waste water

generated from spillage, leakage, equipment washing etc. will be disposed into trenches and all these trenches are

connected by a collection pit and then waste water is to be treated in proposed ETP with other streams.

Management Plan for Effluent generated (spillage, leakages, vessel washing etc.)

Underground trenches will be provided on the periphery of every plant as well as total plot, whatever the waste

water generated from spillage, leakage, equipment washing etc. will be directed into trenches and all these

trenches are connected by a collection pit which is pumped to ETP for treatment.

Measures proposed for preventing Effluent discharge during unforeseen circumstances

Adequate capacity of ETPs units are already being provided to handle the effluent generated during washing, used

container washing and also for the unforeseen circumstances.

Secondary containment i.e. dyke will be provided around all the chemical storage tanks. Outlet of dyke area will be

connected to ETPs equalization tank. Sump is provided outside the dyke area of the tanks to collect the

spilled/leaked material.

Proper process drainage system & sumps will be provided in production and storage area for collection and disposal

of waste streams generated from the spillage, leakages, vessel washing, used container washing etc.

Adequate storage capacity, well covered & segregated area with RCC flooring arrangement for the Hazardous waste

storage. Disposal Permission from different approved waste disposal agencies is taken.

There will be separate provision of storm water drain in order to handle rain water/flood water. No effluent will be

discharged to storm water drainage which leads to go outside the site premises.

Land Environment

On completion of works (in phases), all temporary structures, surplus materials and wastes will be completely

removed from the surface;

Existing roads will be used wherever possible for movement of personnel as well as materials and machineries,

all transportation of hazardous materials will be done as per applicable laws and using drivers qualified to

transfer such materials safely and with suitable permits and training including spill control training.

Optimization of land requirement through proper site lay out design will be some basic criteria at the design

phase.

Solid & Hazardous Waste Management

Management of Solid Hazardous Waste will be ensured as per the Hazardous waste rules as amended till date.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



MANAGEMENT PLAN


Environmental Monitoring Plan for suggested mitigation measures and monitoring plan will include:

Proper hazardous waste inventory accounting by HSE department;

Monthly review by plant head in the production meeting;

Monitoring for reduction in generation of hazardous waste quantity by director;

Internal audit of hazardous waste storage area as per ISO system;

Compliance of statutory conditions & reporting in environmental audit report;

Reviewing time bound action plan for imparting training to drivers and availability of TREM cards.

10.1.2 Energy Conservation Measures

Energy efficient machineries will be used during operation phase.

Enough care will be taken to prevent/minimize energy losses at each stage.

Energy audit will be used as a tool for monitoring purpose.

External lights will be controlled through timers for auto on/off function based on timings.

The cable size will be selected so as to minimize the power losses.

The power factor improvement capacitors will be provided individually for AC loads.

Efficient lamps and ballasts.

Occupancy Sensors.

Installation of improved insulation over the High Pressure (HP) steam line to reduce the heat loss.

Impeller coating on all chilling, cooling & brine pumps of utilities.

Energy efficient lubricant oil for planetary gear boxes.

Gravity flow will be preferred wherever possible to save pumping energy.

10.1.3 Rainwater Harvesting

Rainwater Collecting & Harvesting Scheme

Rainwater harvesting is a mechanism involved in collecting, storing and using rainwater which is most essential.

All the rain water from the terraces will be brought at ground level through vertical down-take pipes and

through surfaces and it will be collected in surface/sub surface tank.

Rainwater harvesting scheme will provide a suitable stilt chamber to remove the pollutants such as sand,

leaves, weeds, etc. before the storm water is collect in infiltration well.

All pre-monsoon and post monsoon steps will be taken to minimize the pollution of the collected storm water.

General Design Features

Rooftop method can provide good quality of potable water, if following design features are adapted.

Non corrosive rooftops.

Roof surface smooth, hard and dense.

Roof painting-not advisable.

No over-charging of trees near/over roof

Remove/prevent nesting of birds

Gutter needs to be fitted with wire/steel mesh.

First rains to be flushed out by detaching the down pipe.

Maintenance of System

Periodic maintenance required for reliable and higher quality water supply.

During raining season, the entire system to be checked before and after rains and cleaned after every dry

period.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



MANAGEMENT PLAN


Rainwater Harvesting Potential

For Rainwater Storage through available rain water is consider from the Clean Roof Top, Paved Road area, Open

Land, Green-belt source area.

As per IMD Station of New Kandla, the long-term average rainfall is 407.4 mm/annum (0.407 m/annum) and 235.5

mm/day (0.235 m/day) for the period of 1981-2010 is considered.

The estimated run-off quantum using different run-off co-efficient is computed below in Table 10-9.

Table 10-9: Rain Water Harvesting Potential**

Area Consider for RWH

(A)

Run off

Coefficient

(B)

Average

Rainfall

Intensity

per annum

(C)

Maximum

Rainfall

Intensity per

day

(D)

Rainwater

available

for harvesting

per annum

(A x B x C)

Maximum

Rainwater

available

for harvesting

per day

(A x B x D)

Area Type m2 - m m m3 m3

Roof-top 2,358 0.85 0.407 0.235 815.75 471.01

Road/Paved Area

36,000 0.65 0.407 0.235 9523.8 5499

Open Land 1,64,567 0.20 0.407 0.235 13395.75 7734.65

Greenbelt 1,48,000 0.15 0.407 0.235 9035.4 5217

Total Quantum of available run-off 32,770.70 18,921.66

** Source: Manual of Artificial Recharge of Ground Water (CGWB, 2007)

Note: Total area for Rain Water Harvesting includes Existing and Proposed area as consideration.

From the above calculations, the maximum rain water available for harvesting annually is ~32,770.70 m3/annum

and for maximum one day it is 18,921.66 m3/day.

Table 10-10: Summary

Sr. No. Content Quantity unit

A Maximum rainwater available for recharge will be 32,770.70 m3/annum

B Number of Rainy Days per annum are 17.3 days

C Average rain water available per rainy day (A/B) 1894.26 m3/day

D Max number of Rainy days/in month 6.5 July

E Max rainwater received in month of July (C*D) 12,312.69 m3

The rainwater availability calculations show 12,312.69 m3 rainwater will be available in month of July and for one-

day maximum value will be ~1894.26 m3. A surface or subsurface storage tank will be created depending upon

availability and convenience of area. These tanks can also be created below parking area, green belt and gardens,

roads etc. Stored water can directly be used for domestic, Green belt purposes.

Filtration Chamber for Sedimentation Tank

It is proposed that, a subsurface storage tank with filtration module will be utilized for restore and reuse of rain

water to be constructed at suitable location.

In plant premises, necessary infrastructure will be created to divert run-off water into storage tank using conduits

or pipes.

Also, this sedimentation tank and conduits or pipes will be kept clean and only rain water mean of harvesting to be

adopted.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



MANAGEMENT PLAN


10.1.4 Natural Resource Conservation

Adopting Rainwater harvesting method

Development of Greenbelt

10.1.5 Recycle / Reuse and Resource Recovery

Water Conservation Steps

Adequate measures are taken to reduce fresh water demand by following measures:

Promote awareness on water conservation and reducing water wastage through Water conservation committee

meetings and its campaign on educating employees about the importance of water conservation.

Repairing of leaking lines, valves and water faucets; Turn off water that is not being used.

Installation of flow restrictors or flow control valves to process tanks.

Installation of timers and pedals to use water only when needed.

Use conductivity meters to activate flow only when needed.

Use of high-pressure washing systems to reduce wastewater generation. Accordingly, Installation of high-

pressure, low-volume nozzles on spray washers.

Accurate accounting and good record keeping of every stage of water consumption.

As a part of water conservation, excess service water taps will not be provided in the plant premises.

Mopping will be done for floor cleaning.

High Pressure Jet Pump is used for the cleaning of equipment, vessel & rector etc.

Water sprinkler system and drip irrigation are used instead of hose pipe for the green belt development.

Reduce toilet cistern volume in single flush models.

Reduce water delivery in taps and showers, through the installation of low flow devices like aerators on shower

heads, Spring-loaded taps.

10.1.6 Ecology and Biodiversity

Status of Greenbelt in Plant Premises

In the Adani Wilmar limited project the existing green belt area is 56,302 sq.m. (= ~19.9% of total plot area) in

which more than 10,000 trees have been already planted in the greenbelt area and additional greenbelt has been

suggested to be developed in the new adjacent plot of land of 92500 sq.m totalling to 1,48,802 sq.m (~ 33.3 % of

total plot area of 4,47,183 sq.m). So, total 33.3% greenbelt area will be developed as green belt after proposed

expansion. In project site premises of existing greenbelt area is well development and maintained. Details are

tabulated below with trees, shrubs and herbs species:

Table 10-11: Trees and Shrubs Species Used for Plantation at various locations of the project site

Sr. No. Common Name Scientific Name

1. Kharek Fishtail palm

2. Saru Casurina

3. Table palm Livistona Rotundifolia

4. Areca palm Dypsis lutescens

5. Nilgiri Eucalyptus spp.

6. Sapota, Chikoo Manilkara zapota

7. Yellow elder Tecoma stans

8. Golden trumpet Almanda Dwarf

9. Neem Azadirachta indica

10. Jungle geranium Ixora coccinea

11. Washington fan palm Washingtonia robusta

12. Lilly/ Paper flower Lilium, Bougnvallia/Euphorbia Milli

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



MANAGEMENT PLAN


Sr. No. Common Name Scientific Name

13. Vanjai, Vilayati Mehendi clerodendrum inerme

14. oleander Nerium oleander

15. Coconut Cocos nucifera

16. Pomegranate Punica granatum

17. Yellow-flamboyant, yellow flametree Peltophorum pterocarpum

18. Date Palm Phoenix dactylifera

19. Lanceleaf Buttonwood, Damas tree. Conocarpus erectus

Budget Allocation for Greenbelt within Project Site

Greenbelt within plant premises shall be maintained and outside plant premises shall be developed within five

years. Detailed budget break-up is presented in Table 10-12.

Table 10-12: Budget for Proposed Greenbelt Development outside Project Site

S. No Work or

Activity 1st year 2nd Year 3rd Year 4th Year 5th Year Budget (INR)

Capital Cost

Within study area and immediate vicinity of plant premises and nearby villages (Rs. 200/sapling)

Saplings Required 600 600 600 600 600

Amount 1,20,000 1,20,000 1,20,000 1,20,000 1,20,000 6,00,000/-

Recurring cost

Maintenance cost of existing greenbelt in plant premises

Amount 1,00,000/- PER YEAR

Total Budget 2,00,000/-

Plantation Technique & Care

Plantation Technique

Following basic procedures need to be followed for greening the area

Since the project area having good quality land / well developed green area, plantation of tree species required

approx. 1 m3 pit for soil enrichment.

Pit should be filled with imported soil with 3:1:1 the ratio of sand, silt and form yard manure.

Procure well grown saplings of recommended species from the nearby Forest Department nursery.

Make 1 m diameter ring bund around the planted saplings for water retention.

Watering of sapling is species specific, therefore watering need to be done daily in monsoon and once in 2 days

in other seasons for a period of two years.

Monitoring Protocol/ Maintenance

The plantations need to be maintained by regular watering, soil enrichment work, applying manure, weeding

and provide proper protection.

Replacement of sapling (replanting) required whenever mortality occurs in the plantation during the growth

stage.

Plantation requires after care for a period of minimum five years till the saplings attain matured tree stage.

Any damage to the developed greenbelt due to any natural or cattle activity should be redeveloped and

maintained by the agency.

Survey of the area to identify the locations for causality replace.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



MANAGEMENT PLAN


10.2 Conservation Plan for Schedule – I Species

10.2.1 Details of Indian Peafowl

Indian Peafowl or Indian peafowl (Pavo cristatus) is a familiar and universally known large pheasant. It is a National

Bird of India, belongs to Schedule I of the Wildlife (Protection) Act 1972 was reported from some villages of the

study area. The male has a spectacular glossy green long tail feathers that may be more than 60 percent of the

bird’s total body length. These feathers have blue, golden green and copper colored celli (eyes). The long tail

feathers are used for mating rituals like courtship displays. The feathers are arched into a magnificent fan shaped

form across the back of the bird and almost touching the found on both sides. Females do not have these graceful

tail feathers. They have the fan like crest with whitish face and throat, chestnut brown crown and hind neck,

metallic green upper breast and mantle, white belly and brown back rump and tail. Their primaries are dark brown.

Indian Peafowl Survey

Buffer zone of the study area has been reported as a habitat of Schedule I species Pavo cristatus commonly known

as Indian Peafowl, more effort was made to assess their status in term of movements and habitat use in and

around the study area. At first, a detailed biological survey of the core zone and buffer zone (10 km radius from

periphery of the mining site) was carried out to understand the status distribution of the species in the study area.

Also, questionnaire survey was carried out to understand the recent status of Indian Peafowl sightings and their

movements. Overall, 15 people from three villages were interviewed randomly. The conclusion of the survey

discussed the potential sightings & habitat use, and movement and food habits of Indian Peafowl in the study area.

Habitats in the Study Area

No Indian Peafowl was sighted in the core zone. All the direct sightings of the Indian Peafowl were located near the

human dominated and forest areas. This species is well adapted to natural village environment setting. According to

the villagers, Indian Peafowl is present in both, village and forest areas. Day time they temporarily move towards

the surrounding agriculture areas for feeding while during night time they roost on the trees present in the village.

General Food Habits

Peafowls are omnivores, eating plant parts, flower petals, seed heads, insects and other arthropods, reptiles and

amphibians. In the study area, dense tree canopy cover supports good insect diversity which is very common food

for peafowl.

Study Area as Indian Peafowl Habitat (Buffer Zone) - Conclusion

Present survey of the peafowl in the buffer zone of the project site cleared that peafowl use both, village adjacent

habitats and forest habitats within the buffer zone.

Status of threat in the study area

No perceptible threats were indentified in the villages surveyed. Village residents are against hunting or poaching of

the peafowl, as per our understanding.

Conservation through Habitat Improvement and Awareness

Habitat improvement programme will be undertaken through plantation of suitable tree species. Saplings of

Azadirachta indica (Limdo), Mangifera indica (Aam), Tamarindus indica (Imli), Ficus benghalensis (Vad), Butea

monosperma (Palas), Aegle marmelos (Bel), Ficus religiosa (Pipal), Thespesia populnea (Paras Pipal) will be

distributed in the nearest five villages (as per year wise schedule). Species recommended by local forest

department will also be added in the present plantation program. In consultation of the forest department,

following Conservation Measures will be adapted for Peacock conservation:

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



MANAGEMENT PLAN


Habitat improvement programme in the different villages will be undertaken in the buffer zone area for shelter

and roosting of peacocks. This will be achieved by plantation of locally adapted species near villages in buffer

area.

School level and Panchayat level awareness programmes will be conducted for conservation of wild life.

For above mentioned activities, proponent has proposed a sum of Rs. 5,00,000/- for the “Wild Life” conservation

plan under the following heads up to five years in consultation with local forest department.

Table 10-13: Budget for Additional Greenbelt and Biodiversity Conservation

Activity Village Location

in village

1st Year

Capital

Cost

2nd

Year

3rd

Year

4th

Year

5th

Year

Grand

Total Total

Budget

INR (in

RS.)

Maintenance cost considering 10% of

incremental rate

Considering water, manure, protection, up

keeping and other cost

Plantation approximately 250 Trees in 2 acre of land

In imeediate vicinity of

the project

Dhrab village

75,000 (considering

300Rs/ sampling)

25,000 27,500 30,000 33,000 1,90,500

Capital budget INR. RS. 75,000/-

Recurring Budget INR. Rs 1,15,500/ for 4 years

Awareness programme

for “Wild Life” conservation

Education Program

Dhrab

In school and Gram Panchayat

25,000 25,000

INR Rs. 1,51,500/-

Toda 27,500 27,500

Baraia 30,000 30,000

Borana 33,000 33,000

Lakhanpar 36,000 36,000

Artificial concrete

water pond of 1000 lit

capacity to provide

drining water facility to wild

animals

Near Project

Site

Dhrab

village 25,000 Rs. 10,000/Year for 4 years

Captital Budget INR. RS. 25,000/-

Recurring Budget INR Rs. 10,000/- per Year for

4 years

10.2.2 Social Management Plan

The social management plan proposes to improve the quality of life of inhabitants of potentially affected villages

directly.

The goal is “a pollution free area with improved quality of life and empowered community “and the three key pillars

on which this would be developed are – social, health, infrastructure improvements with efforts on minimal

disruptions present life style and any ensuing negative impacts.

Social – Awareness on project benefits, gender empowerment, increases livelihood opportunities during

implementation of technical and social remediation plans and generating community participation.

Health - Awareness on health, hygiene, environmental sanitation and generic issues related to improving quality of

life with specific emphasis on potable drinking water, HIV/AIDS/STI mitigation)

Infrastructure - Developing prioritized infrastructure facilities which are related to the continuum of project benefits

to the local communities and area.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



MANAGEMENT PLAN


Implementation Arrangement

The social management plan and its activities will be implemented by NGO under the close supervision and

monitoring of the CSR division of the company or any consultant appointed by the company.

Monitoring and Evaluation

Two-time (Mid-term and after completion of the work) monitoring will be done by the third party appointed by the

company.

10.2.3 Existing CSR Activities

Village wise Overall Expenditure Done by Adani Foundation, Mundra from 2010 to July, 2021 presented in Table

10-14.

Table 10-14: Village wise Overall Expenditure Done by Adani Foundation, Mundra

Sr. No Village Name Infrastructure Support Health LIVELIHOOD PROJECTS Education Total

1 LAKHAPAR 0.00 4.95 7.20 0.00 12.15

2 VIRANIYA 0.00 4.74 4.04 0.00 8.78

3 TODA 0.18 7.74 3.94 0.00 11.85

4 BARAYA 0.00 4.87 3.75 0.00 8.62

5 NANA KANDAGARA 0.00 0.76 1.26 0.00 2.02

6 SAMAGHOGHA 51.44 3.63 5.22 0.00 60.29

7 PRAGPAR 21.02 11.96 4.76 0.00 37.74

8 BHORARA 1.85 4.75 17.33 0.00 23.93

9 MOTA KAPAYA 180.32 29.87 15.16 0.00 225.35

10 NANA KAPAYA 201.74 54.62 33.01 27.58 316.95

11 BORANA 1.16 6.91 7.26 0.00 15.33

12 ZARAPARA 247.09 63.18 268.63 69.42 648.32

13 DHRAB 97.27 34.87 80.93 56.09 269.16

14 Ahinsadham 0.00 0.00 11.97 0.00 11.97

TOTAL 802.06 232.85 464.46 153.09 1652.47

M/S. ADANI WILMAR LTD, DHRAB EIA REPORT FOR PROPOSED EXPANSION OF SYNTHETIC ORGANIC CHEMICALS IN EXISTING FACILITY AT VILLAGE DHRAB & MUNDRA, KUTCH ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN


Table 10-15: Overall Expenditure by AWL from 2010 to July 2021 in Dhrab Village

Sr. No Project Name Up to 2017-18 2018-19 2019-20 2020-21 2021-22 Total

A Infrastructure Support

1 Panchavati Development 3.26 3.26

2 Construction of Community Hall 11.51 11.51

3 Cricket Ground 8.08 8.08

4 Bus Stand 1.10 1.10

5 Construction of RO Plant 0.66 0.66

7 Construction of Toilets - 8 Nos 3.57 3.57

8 Basic facility at Labour Colony : toilet-18, balwadi-1,

rural clinic-1 and rest bhunga-1 13.74 13.74 27.48

9 Pond deepening 6.81 6.81

10 river cleaning by JCB 1.22 0.5 1.72

11 Infra asupoort to Common Garhering 3.68 3.68

12 Support to Dhrab Hospital 22 22.00

13 Bore Recharge 6 6.00

14 Well Recharge 1.4 1.40

Total 48.73 14.96 7.90 25.68 0.00 97.27

B Health

1 Sr. Citizen 20.34 1.96 1.72 0.46 0 24.48

2 Medical Supports 1.58 - 0.01 0 0 1.59

3 Mobile Van 7.40 0.23 0.21 0.18 0.02 8.04

4 Rural Clinic 0.04 - 0 0 0 0.04

5 Physio 0.02 - 0 0 0 0.02

6 General Health camp 0.06 0.12 0.2 0 0.01 0.39

7 Gaynec Camp 0.01 - 0 0 0 0.01

8 Eye Camp 0.01 - 0 0 0 0.01

9 Kidney stone Camp 0.23 - 0 0 0 0.23

10 Super specialty Camp 0.00 - 0.02 0 0 0.02

11 Diaylsis 0.00 - 0 0 0.05 0.05

M/S. ADANI WILMAR LTD, DHRAB EIA REPORT FOR PROPOSED EXPANSION OF SYNTHETIC ORGANIC CHEMICALS IN EXISTING FACILITY AT VILLAGE DHRAB & MUNDRA, KUTCH ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN


Sr. No Project Name Up to 2017-18 2018-19 2019-20 2020-21 2021-22 Total

Total 29.68 2.31 2.16 0.64 0.08 34.87

C LIVELIHOOD PROJECTS

1 Fodder Support 47.92 13.10 9.17 70.19

2 Drip Irrigation 0.00 0.27 0.00 1.63 0.00 1.90

3 Tree plantation 0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.73

4 IG Support 0.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.30

5 Beti Vadhavo 0.41 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.41

6 Tissue Culture 0.00 0.00 1.30 0.00 0.00 1.30

7 Home Bio Gas 0.40 0.00 4.50 1.20 0.00 6.10

Total 49.76 13.37 14.97 2.83 0.00 80.93

D Education 0.00

1 Uthhan Education 0.00 14.18 18.99 12.24 10.68 56.09

2 2 Kw Solar Panel in School 0.00 0.00 4.41 0.00 0.00 4.41

Total 0.00 14.18 23.40 12.24 10.68 60.50

Grand total 128.17 44.82 48.43 41.39 10.76 273.57

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



MANAGEMENT PLAN


The social management plan therefore concentrates on mitigation of perceived impacts during the running of plant.

The plan emphasizes on health, hygiene, drinking water, Public infrastructure like (Community hall, Toilets, school

infrastructure etc.) and education and includes awareness generation amongst the community on fire hazard and

leakage of chemicals during the running of plants.

The SMP encourages community participation through formation of a Grievance Redressal Group to minimize and

mitigate any grievance that may arise during the period of ESC projects implementation. An NGO would be appointed

by the company to ensure community participation, mitigate potential adverse impacts and help in resolving any

disputes and grievances that may arise. It would also engage in awareness programs with community and encourage

selected community members specifically the poorer sections and women to get employed in the Contractor’s

activities. This is expected to accrue several benefits - the Contractor would gain from local wisdom and knowledge

and nuances that need to be taken care of and the community would get access to gainful employment closer to

home.

Overall, the project would improve quality of life of the surrounding villages in study area.

10.2.4 Occupational Health & Safety Management Plan

Noise

Noise will be regularly monitored at plant boundary for checking compliance against environmental noise parameters

as per GPCB norms. It will also be monitored near noise generating equipment to ensure that all noise generating

equipment do not emit noise in excess of the statutory norms.

All workmen will be provided with required set of PPEs like ear plug, ear muff etc. where noise levels in excess of 80

db (A) are regularly generated.

Preventive maintenance of noise generating equipment shall be regularly carried out to ensure that noise levels are

minimized to the extent possible. To the extent feasible, equipment will be purchased considering noise generation

as one of the parameters.

Heat

The project does not envisage conditions that could lead to excess heating. Consequently, special requirements for

protection against heat stress are not anticipated. However, the following shall be carried out:

Ventilation shall be provided to take care of heat evacuation.

Drinking water availability shall be ensured at several locations within the plant to ensure workers have easy

access to the same.

In case of occasional handling of heated equipment or materials, suitable PPEs such as heat resistant gloves will

be used.

Dust and other Chemicals being suspended in the Environment

The possibility of suspended particles going into the body of the workmen, either in the form of inhalation, ingestion

or through skin absorption are least and negligible as because the entire operation at the plant will be performed

under closed loop condition, right from charging till discharging, hence it’s a rare possibility that the workmen will

come in direct contact with raw material or final goods.

At the same time the level of SPM and RPM will definitely be of least and nominal value. But even though the same

will be under closed monitoring and periodical surveillance as per EIA norms and applicable legislations and any minor

deviation from the same will be dealt immediately and will be corrected.

Further to this all of the workmen will be provided with complete set of appropriate PPEs, like nose mask / nose

respirator, gloves, helmet, protective uniform and clothing, eye protections etc.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



MANAGEMENT PLAN


Pre-placement and Periodic Health Monitoring

As per policy and norms all of the workmen are put to medical examination and testing periodically and at set

interval and based on the medical report actions are taken, if at all anything is necessary and required. Even based

on the medical examination report/feedback, workmen are counselled and put in different area /job rotation kind of

activities. The indicative periodic tests to be conducted by AWL includes the following:

Physical Examination

Vision

Color vision

Audiometry

Chest X-ray

ECG

Pulmonary function test

CBC

ESR

Blood sugar

Creatinine

Uric acid

Blood urea nitrogen

SGOT, SGPT, serum bilirubin,

Serum cholesterol

Urine routine microscopic

Copy of pre-medical check-up report and periodic medical check-up report of the existing employees is attached as

Annexure 25.

PPE List provided by AWL in the existing and as well as will be provided by AWL for proposed plant are listed as

Table 10-16.

Table 10-16: PPE List

S. No. PPE Pic Specification

1 Helmet

(Different Colors)

Fixed ratchet system to maximum stability. Inner rib designed to get impact strength

Better Head clearance provides more suspension Universal size slots for clip on accessories like earmuff & face shield

2 Cotton Gloves SGC

101 23cm +/-1

Material - Cotton Safe use for normal operation to avoid direct contact with heat chemical and other material , Used in general operations

3 Latex coated

gloves LT700 S

All type of general application like material handling, mid-level cut-resistant and gripping.

4 Welding Gloves 2001005001 L

Padded long and insulated cuff for comfort and protection against heat. Reinforced palm for extra durability. Electro welding, Gas Welding, Brazing,

Tin Soldering, Gas Cutting, Factory, Construction etc.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



MANAGEMENT PLAN



5 Safety Electrical

Hand Gloves

Sub Type : Electrical Gloves Capacity : 11 KV

Type of Product : Shock proof

6 Acid Proof glove

1. Flexible, consistent film coating Protection against a wide range of chemicals, including acids, caustics, solvents, grease and oil

2. Prevents irritation 3.Tactile non-slip grip

4.Length: 14 in. (355 mm)

7 Ear Plug PU

Corded Orange

SNR 37dB Â· NRR 32dB Corded PU Earplug

Highest SNR and NRR

8 Welding Face

Shield

Headgear- made of High strength Nylon Ratchet Adjustment

Size of Window : 10cm x 4.4cm Polypropylene Impact Resistant Shell

Liftable Welding Lens to allow clear view, while restricting harmful dust particles.

Protective Lens made of Clear high impact Resistant Polycarbonate. Conforming to EN 166 and ANSI Z 87.1

Conforming to EN 175 F CC and EN 175:1994 ES 04/5: is an IR 5 lens

ES 04/11: is an IR 11 lens

9

Shelmet Attachable Face Shield With Clear

Polycarbonate Visor

High quality product provides protection against impacts from the front and side

The KARAM Face Shield is economical and suitable for the followning industries

Metal cutting operation Spray painting Carpentering

Petroleum industry Chemical industry

Grinding Processing

Electric welding Iron and steel industry, etc.

10 Encapsulated Level B Suits

Encapsulated design provides protection from liquid splash exposure for both the wearer and respiratory equipment

Also provides coverage from overhead liquid splash (does not provide vapor protection)

Taped seams provide strong chemical resistance against heavy liquid splashes. A sewn seam is covered with a strip of compatible chemical-

resistant material through heat sealing. Standard 20 mil PVC faceshield

Rear entry design keeps closure away from direct contact with frontal chemical exposure and provides ability to change air bottle on SCBA without

removing the entire garment Expanded back to accommodate self-contained air breathing apparatus

(SCBA) Storm flap covers zipper which can be secured by the wearer with rugged

hook and loop material to prevent intrusion at zipper Elastic opening for tighter fit at wrist

Integrated socks composed of garment material Attached flaps are designed to cover boot tops to help reduce potential for

liquid intrusion

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



MANAGEMENT PLAN



11 Safety Goggles

Goggles Welder SAFETY SPECTACLE ECO CLEAR Safety Goggles

12 Cut Resistant Hand Safety

Protection Glove

High cut-resistant knitted gloves with latex coating on palm and all around the fingers.

Seamless 10 gauge shells. Crinkle rubber coating.

Knit wrist. Cut level 4.

13 Nose Mask Dust

Mask

Cup Shaped Polyisoprene Head Band

Electrets Media FFP1 protection level

Protection against fine particulate

14 Full Body Harnesses

Anchor point One dorsal D-ring and Two textile chest attachment loop Special features Ideal use for explosive atmosphere when the risk of an

eletrostatic build up and sudden discharge, igniting Materials Anti-static webbing to prevent the risk of build up charge.

Stitching High-strength polyester thread stitching Adjustability Size adjustment strap only at chest & thighs.

Standard EN 361:2002, webbing tested for EN 1149-1:2006 & EN 1149-5:2008

15 Retractable Fall

Arrester

Webbing type retractable fall arrester. Compact and lightweight.

30 mm wide webbing. With shock absorber and snap hook.

Swivel steel snap hook with fall indicator. Maximum load capacity 100 kg.

Conforms to EN 360:2002.

16 Over the Spectacle

Over the spectacle polycarbonate safety eyewear. Lenses are impact resistant to level F.

Integral ventilated side shield protection. Scratch resistant coating on lens.

10.3 Hierarchical System for Environment Management Cell (EMC) for AWL

An environment management cell shall be created which shall perform the following functions:

Achieve objectives of the ‘Environment Protection Policy’ of the management.

Collect information from regular monitoring and create a database.

Analyze the data and decide thrust area.

Based on the data collected, decide target for each thrust area.

Carry out ‘Projects’ in each thrust area to arrive at practical solutions to environmental problems.

Discuss the reports of study on environment and disseminate the information.

Work out ‘Action plan’ for implementation of the recommendations made in the reports.

Prepare Management Information System (MIS) reports and budget for environment management program.

Generic hierarchy of Environment Management Cell is shown in Figure 10-1.

10.3.1 Responsibilities of Environment Management Cell

Monitoring Safety & Environment System on Day-To-Day Basis;

Ensure Compliance to Various Govt. Regulations;

Approval & Provision of Safety Gadgets for Employees;

Maintenance of Fire Protection Systems;

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



MANAGEMENT PLAN


Training of Employees On Safety & Environment Systems;

Conduct Performance Drills for Fire & Environment Protection Systems;

Organize Training Programs On Safety & Environment in Co-ordination with HR Department;

Safety & Environment Promotional Activities to Create Awareness among Employees;

Suggestions for Continuous Improvement of Work Environment;

Accident Investigation and Prevention Steps Initiation;

ETP Operation as per GPCB norms.

Table 10-17: Environment Management Cell

S. No. Designation Proposed Responsibility

1 Managing Director / Director Environmental Policy and directions

2 Works Manager Overall responsibility for environmental management and decision making for

all environmental issues.

3 Plant Manager Overall in-charge of operation of environmental management facilities of

respective sections.

4 Deputy Manager (Engineering) Secondary responsibility for environmental management and decision making

for all environmental issues.

5 EHS in-charge

Ensure environmental monitoring as per appropriate procedures

Ensure correct records of generation, handling, storage, transportation and disposal of solid hazardous wastes.

Ensuring legal compliance by properly undertaking activities as laid down by various regulatory agencies from time to time and interacting with the same

and arranging awareness program among the workers.

Figure 10-1: Organogram of Environment, Health & Safety Management Cell (EHSMC)

10.3.2 Reporting Mechanism of NC / Violations of Environmental Norms

An internal Monthly Compliance report for AWL, Mundra will be prepared and submitted to the Top Management.

Environmental violations, if any, will be reported to the Top Management in this report. The reporting mechanism

for Non-Compliance / Violations of Environmental Norms to the Board of Directors is as per Figure 10-2.

Managing DirectorEnvironment Management

Cell (Head - Environment,

Health & Safety)

Manager Environment

Sr. Executive / Executive / Officers

Staff and Workmen

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



MANAGEMENT PLAN


Figure 10-2: Reporting Mechanism

10.4 Expenditure on Environmental Matters

The expenditure to be incurred by M/s. AWL, Dhrab on environmental matters is presented in Table 10-18.

Table 10-18: Expenditure on Environmental Matters

S. No Head

Approximate

Capital cost (In

Lacs)

Approximate

recurring cost

per annum (In

Lacs)

Basis for Cost Estimates

1 Air Pollution Control 195 19.5

Capital Cost

Cost of stack + ESP installation along with water scrubber + Cost of online monitoring system =

1,50,00,000 (for 1 new boiler stack) + 45,00,000 Online monitoring system = 1,95,00,000 /-

Recurring Cost

Ambient Air, Stacks and Workplace monitoring as elaborated in the Environmental Monitoring Plan

Table 6-1 is 4,50,000/-

Cost of Operation & Maintenance of ESP & water scrubber APCM = 15,00,000/-

2 Water Pollution

Control 0.0

5.12 + 52.92 = 58.94

Capital Cost

There is no Capex investment since all ETPs are already existing and of adequate capacity

Recurring Cost

Details for recurring cost in the Environmental Monitoring Plan Table 6-1: 5,12,000 /- + Costs for Operation and Maintenance of additional 58

KLD waste water – 58 x 250 x 365 = 52,92,500/-

Functional Compliance Officers

Strategic Business Unit

Compliance office

Unit Head

Business Head

Whole time Director EHS

Board of Directors

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



MANAGEMENT PLAN


S. No Head

Approximate

Capital cost (In

Lacs)

Approximate

recurring cost

per annum (In

Lacs)

Basis for Cost Estimates

3 Noise Pollution

Monitoring 0.0 0.9

Recurring Cost

Rs. 90,000 (Consider Rs. 5000 Per Quarter x 3 times x 6 location)

4 Solid and Hazardous Waste Management

36 5.0 + 165 = 170

Capital Cost

As per Monitoring Plan the Capex investment for construction of additional waste storage area – Rs

36 Lacs

Recurring Cost

Recurring costs will be for records keeping and sludge disposal – Rs 5 Lacs + (550 x 1000 x 2.5

x 12) Rs 165 Lacs

5 Soil 0.0 0.2

Recurring Cost

Soil sample analysis – Rs. 20,000 (Consider Rs. 5000*4 sample) – As per Environmental

Monitoring Plan

6 Ground Water

Monitoring 18 3.6

Capital Cost

As per Monitoring Plan the Capex investment for construction of piezometricl wells – Rs 18 Lacs

Recurring Cost

Sampling and testing from piezometric wells – Rs 3.6 Lacs

7 Greenbelt 6.0 5.0

Capital Cost

Green Belt Development – Rs 6 Lacs + 1.25 Lacs

Recurring Cost

Maintenance of Green Belt – Rs 2 Lacs + Rs 1.15 + 1.51 + 0.1

8 Occupational Health

& Safety 0.0 6.0

Recurring Cost

Onsite Mockdrill, Offsite Mockdrill & OHS

9 Conservation Plan for Schedule 1 Species

25 10 Capex and Opex as per Conservation Plan for

Schedule 1 Species

Total 280 274.14

M/S. ADANI WILMAR


FACILITY AT VILLAGE DHRAB & MUNDRA, KUTCH SUMMARY AND

CONCLUSIONS


11 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS

11.1 Introduction of AWL

Adani Wilmar Limited (AWL) is a joint venture incorporated in January 1999 between Adani Group- the leaders in

private infrastructure and Wilmar International Limited - Singapore, Asia's leading Agri business group. It is one of

the fastest growing food FMCG companies in India.

The company has the largest range of edible oils spanning across the categories of Soya, Sun, Mustard, Rice bran,

Groundnut, Cottonseed and the company has extended its basket of offering with the introduction of Vivo, functional

oil which helps in managing the blood sugar. Besides oil, AWL has also forayed into packed Basmati Rice, Pulses,

Soya Chunks, Besan, Fortune Chakki Fresh Atta and the recently launched superfood Khichdi.

AWL also caters to institutional demand through its industry essential range which includes bulk packs of consumer

essentials as well as Lauric & Bakery fats, Castor Oil derivatives, Oleo chemicals and Soya value added products. A

state-of-the-art Oleo chemical plant at Mundra gives an unmatched output of 400 TPD and it is one of the largest

single location facilities in India. The extensive array of products includes fatty acids, soap noodles and refined

glycerin. The company also has a combined processing capacity of 1,200 MT of castor seeds per day with solvent

and refining units. The castor oil manufacturing facilities are equipped with cutting-edge technology to manufacture

different grades of castor oil such as cold pressed, pharma grade and low moisture oil.

AWL has associated with Adani Foundation, the CSR arm of Adani Group in the quest against malnutrition and anaemia

among communities living in remote areas of the country as a part of ‘Corporate Social Responsibility’ initiatives.

The ‘SuPoshan’ project has adopted a life cycle approach with a strong component on Community based management

and focussing on children of 0-5 years’ age group, adolescent girls as well as reproductive age women in general.

Sangini, a village health volunteer plays a pivotal role in spreading awareness and promoting behaviour change at

community and family level.

11.2 The Project

This project is for expansion in existing facility by adding synthetic organic chemicals at Dhrab by adding a parcel of

additional land and products.

Details of Existing and proposed products is presented as below:

Details of existing and proposed products

Sr.

No. Name of the Products

Quantity (MT/Month)

Existing Proposed Total

1 For Solvent Plant

(i) De-Oiled Cakes

(A) Soyabeans 24,600 0 24,600

(B) Rapeseed/Mustard/Sunflower etc. 18,000 0 18,000

(II) Solvent Extracted Oil

(A) Soyabeans 5,400 0 5,400

(B) Rapeseed/Mustard/Sunflower etc. 12,000 0 12,000

2 For Refinery

(A) Refined vegetable oil such as Soyabean,

Rapeseed/Mustard, Palm, Sunflower. Palm Kernel/ Cotton Seed etc.

95,725 0 95,725

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



CONCLUSIONS


Sr.


Quantity (MT/Month)


(B) Acid Oil 1,750 0 1,750

(C) Wax Oil 220 0 220

(D) Soya Fatty Acid 180 0 180

3 For Physical Refinery

(A) Refined Oils 57,010 0 57,010

(B) PFAD 5,837 0 5,837

(C) PKFAD 160 0 160

4 For Vanaspati Plant

Vanaspati Ghee, Bakery Shortening; Margarine; Other Fat

Derivatives 12,750 0 12,750

5 Interesterification

Interesterified oil and fats 3,000 0 3,000

6 Chilling & Filtration

Refined Palm Oil 48,000 0 48,000

7 Soap Noodles 11,520 0 11,520

8 Finished Soaps 3,750 0 3,750

9 Fatty Acids 22,209 0 22,209

10 Hydrogenated Castor Oil 4,650 0 4,650

11 Refined Glycerine 3,900 0 3,900

12 Betains

(i) Coco Amido Propyl Betain (CAPB) 0 1274.6 1274.6

(ii) Coco Betaine (CB)

13 Benzol Quats

(i) Benzyl Conium Chloride 50 % (BK 50) 0 383.63 383.63

(ii) Benzyl Conium Chloride 80 % (BK 80)

14 Glycol Esters

(i) Ethylene Glycol Mono Stearate (EGMS) 0 310.8 310.8

(ii) Ethylene Glycol Di Stearate (EGDS)

15 Fatty Acid Ester

(i) IPM/ IPP/IPL

0 330.0 330.0

(ii) GMO/GMS/ GML/DMG

(iii) PETS (Penta erythritol tetrastearate)

(iva) 2EHP (2 ethyl hexanol palmitate) (ivb) 2EHS (2 ethyl hexanol stearate)

(v) Medium Chain Triglyceride (MCT)

16 Amino Oxide

(i) Lauryl Amine Oxide (LAO) 0 216.70 216.70

(ii) Coco Aamido Propyl Amine Oxide (CAPAO)

17 Sorbitan Ester

(i) Sorbitol Mono Oleate (SMO)

0 330.0 330.0 (ii) Sorbitol Mono Laurate (SML)

(iii) Sorbitol Mono Stearate (SMS)

(iv) Sorbitol Tri Stearate (STS)

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



CONCLUSIONS


Sr.


Quantity (MT/Month)


(v) Sorbitol Mono Palmitate (SMP)

18 Fatty Amide

(i) Coco Mono Etanol Amide (CMEA) 0 265.10 265.10

(ii) Coco Di Etanol Amide (CDEA)

19 Fatty Acid Amides

(i) EBS ( NN ethylene bis steramide )

0 247.5 247.5 (ii) EBO ( NN ethylene bis oleamide )

(iii) Oleamide, Erucamide

20 Mild Surfactants

(i) Glycinates/ Sarcosinates 0 198.0 198.0

(ii) Sulfosuccinate/ Glucosides

21 OMC / Preservatives

(i) Octyl Methyl Cinnaminate (OMC) 0 123.8 123.8

(ii) Phenoxy Ethanol

22 Surfactant Blend

(i) Hand Wash Formulation 0 123.8 123.8

(ii) Shampoo Formulation

23 Soap Blend

(i) Soap Flakes 0 268.13 268.13

(ii) Soap Synded

BY PRODUCTS

1 Heavy End Fatty Acids 1,762 0 1,762

2 Sodium Sulphate (Salts) 500 0 500

11.3 Regulatory Framework

This EIA report has been prepared for obtaining prior Environmental Clearance (EC) for proposed expansion in

Existing facility by adding synthetic organic chemicals and is covered under Category – 5 (f) as per EIA notification

vide gazette no. S.O. 1533 dated 14th September 2006, as amended till date. This project shall be treated as

Category “A”, as the project site is located outside the notified industrial area/ estate.

The EIA Report is prepared as per the Terms of References (TORs) issued by MoEF&CC, in their File No. IA-J-

11011/44/2021-IA-II(I), proposal number IA/GJ/IND3/195225/2021 dated 09.02.2021.

11.4 Project Details

11.4.1 Cost of the Project

The estimated cost of the proposed project is ~ INR 202 Crores. Capital budget on Environmental matters is ~ INR

280 lacs and recurring cost is ~ INR 274.14 lacs per annum.

11.4.2 Area Statement

Total processing area is 42,552 sq.m, non processing area is 33,484 sq.m, storage areas is 40,262 sq.m, ETP areas

is 9,400 sq.m, Hazardous Waste Storage area is 570 sq.m, Utility areas are 9,650 sq.m, Roads are 36,000 sq.m,

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



CONCLUSIONS


Open area of 1,26,463 sq.m and Greenbelt area of 1,48,802 m2 (33.3% of total plot area (two plots) of 4,47,183

sq.m.).

11.4.3 Power Requirement

Source: PGVCL

Total power requirement will be increased from 17.75 MW to 19.75 MW (additional ~ 2 MW).

DG Sets: There are existing 4 DG Sets (two of 1250 KVA and two of 1500 KVA). Additional 1 DG set of 1,500 kVA

will be provided for the proposed project. All the DG sets will be operated during emergency of power failure only.

11.4.4 Water & Wastewater Management

Source of Water Supply

Water is presently sourced from APSEZL by AWL.

The existing source of APSEZL will be continued for total fresh water requirement (existing (6862 KLD) + proposed

additional (428 KLD)) of 7290 KLD after proposed expansion.

Total Water requirement: Increased from 9,632 KLD to 10,172 KLD (additional 540 KLD)

Total Fresh Water requirement after Expansion: Increased from 6,862 KLD to 7,290 KLD (additional 428

KLD)

Recycled water: Total is 2882 KLD - 1155 KLD Boiler Blowdown, DM Blowdown and CT Blowdown is recycled

back to raw water treatment (WTP), Reycle Water from ETP - 1, 3 and 4 is 1563 KLD utilised in CT Make up &

Treated Water of ETP - 2 of 164 KLD is utilised in gardening.

Total Industrial & Domestic Waste Water generation: 1,741 KLD.

Industrial: Increased from 1,540 KLD to 1,598 KLD (Additional 58 KLD)

Domestic: Increased from 137 KLD to 143 KLD (Additional 6 KLD)

11.4.5 Air Emissions

There are 20 flue gas stacks attached to Boilers, Thermic Fluid Heaters & DG Sets in existing plant. Additional 2

stacks attached to 1 Boiler & 1 DG Set are added in the new proposed plant.

Imported Coal, NG, NG/LSHS & HSD are being used as fuel in existing plant and Imported Coal & HSD will be used

in proposed plant.

Mechanical Dust Collector, Bag filter, Electrostatic precipitator (ESP) & Water Scrubbers are provided as APCM in

existing plant. Electrostatic precipitator (ESP) & Water Scrubber will be provided for proposed plant stacks.

Adequate stack height will be provided to all stacks.

The stack emissions are and will be maintained as per GPCB/CPCB norms.

There is 1 process vent in existing plant & two new process vents will be provided in the proposed plant. All process

vents have adequate height with Alkali Scrubber & Water Scrubber as APCM control measures etc.

11.4.6 Solid & Hazardous Waste Generation & Disposal

All types of solid / Hazardous Waste will be collected and temporarily stored in Hazardous Waste Storage Area as

per hazardous waste rules within the plant premises.

The hazardous waste storage area will be doubled in order to store sufficient quantity considering existing and

proposed expansion requirements. The Hazardous waste storage area is provided with proper concrete

floor/impervious floor to avoid any leakage.

M/S. ADANI WILMAR



CONCLUSIONS


The Hazardous Wastes will be disposed of at TSDF site of M/s. Ecocare Infrastructure Private Limited located at

Survey No. 127, Village: Ghaspur, Tal: Dasada, Dist. Surendranagar. The ETP sludges are disposed and will be

continued to be disposed to ICHWMF of M/s. Detox India Private Limited which was formerly known as Ankleshwar

Cleaner Process Technology Centre Private Limited located at R.S.No. 418, Village: Juna Kataria, behind Gail Pump

Station, Samakhiali-Radhanpur Highway, Tal: Bhachau, Dist: Kutch - 370150. The high calorific value hazardous

wastes such as Distillation Process Residues, Spent Solvent, Waste Residue Containing Oil, Filter & Filter Cleaning

material, spent carbon etc are also being disposed to SEPPL, Bhachau for incineration / sending to co processing to

Cement Plants.

Other solid wastes generated from AWL premises will be collected, stored and disposed as per relevant guidelines

and rules for MSW, Biomedical, Battery, Electronic, C & D, Plastics and Scrap materials.

Fly ash generated from Boilers will be disposed of to authorised vendors for recycling as per MOUs signed with

them.

11.5 Description of Environment

11.5.1 Study Area & Study Period

The study area is considered within 10 km radius of the project site. Baseline environmental study was carried out

in Winter & Summer season from January to April, 2021.

11.5.2 Land Use

Present and proposed land use of the site is industrial. There will be change in land use/cover pattern for proposed

additional plot i.e. from Scrub/land to built-up land i.e. industrial area.

Overall landuse in the study area comprises of Built up Land- Residential 2.92 %, Built up Land- Industrial area 5.08 %,

Build up- Level Raised 6.47 %, Plantation 4.44 %, Reserved Forests 2.21 %, Reservoir / Lakes / Ponds / Tank 0.84 %,

Rivers/ Creek 3.81 %, Gulf/Sea 8.85 %, Canals 0.14 %, Cultivable Land 14.67 %, Airport 0.15 %, Salt Pans 1.53 %,

Intertidal Zone / Tidal Flats 14.96%, Land with Scrub / Without Scrub 25.19% & Mangroves 8.77%.

11.5.3 Climatology

Site specific meteorological data shows that average wind speed for 12 weeks’ period from 05th January to 04th

April, 2021 is 2.46 m/s.

It can be observed that for 12 weeks’ period from 05th January to 04th April, 2021, wind blows from N direction.

Calm wind contributes to about 30.97%.

Average temperature recorded was 26.1°C with maximum temperature of 41.3°C and minimum temperature of

9.5°C.

The average relative humidity was 47.9% with maximum humidity is 99.5% and minimum humidity is 8.0%.

11.5.4 Ambient Air Quality

Ambient air monitoring was carried out at 8 locations in the study area. The results on concentration of different air

quality parameters as observed at the selected locations in the study area are as under:

Average concentration of PM10 was recorded in range from minimum 57 µg/m3 to maximum 87 µg/m3;

Average concentration of PM2.5 was recorded in range from minimum 16 µg/m3 to maximum 26 µg/m3;

Average concentration of SO2 was recorded in range from minimum 7.8 µg/m3 to maximum 9.0 µg/m3,

Average concentration of NOX was recorded in range from minimum 14.1 µg/m3 to maximum 18.3 µg/m3;

Average concentration of Cl2 levels were recorded in range of 0.9 µg/m3 to 1.3 µg/m3 at various locations which


M/S. ADANI WILMAR



CONCLUSIONS


Average concentration of CO levels were recorded in range of 0.74 mg/m3 to 0.89 mg/m3 at various locations


Average concentration of HCl levels were recorded in range of 0.2 µg/m3 to 0.5 µg/m3 at various locations


Average concentration of HC levels were recorded in range of 926 µg/m3 to 1023 µg/m3 at various locations


Average concentration of O3 levels were recorded in range of 5.2 µg/m3 to 6 µg/m3 at various locations which


At all the locations, average concentration of HBr, NH3, H2S, HF, Pb, As, Ni, Ba(P), NMHC, Benzene & VOC were

found below detection limit

It is observed that average results of all the parameters at all the locations were within the specified limits of CPCB.

11.5.5 Noise

Noise monitoring was carried out at 8 locations in the study area. The results are presented in the following table:

Ambient Noise Monitoring Results

Loc.

Code Location Date Category

CPCB Limits in dB

(A)

Average Noise levels

in dB (A)

Day

Time

Night

Time

Day

Time

Night

Time

NL01 Near Main Gate (At Site) 26/05/21 Industrial 75.0 70.0 67.9 61.2

NL02 Near South Corner Boundary

of the Site 26/05/21 Industrial 75.0 70.0 65.6 61.2

NL03 Proposed Expansion Site 24/05/21 Industrial 75.0 70.0 65.1 62.4

NL04 Near North Boundary of the

Site 24/05/21 Industrial 75.0 70.0 64.7 60.7

NL05 Sukhpar Habitation (Mundra) 29/05/21 Residential 55.0 45.0 54.2 44.7

NL06 Jhulelal Park 1 Habitation

(Mundra) 30/05/21 Residential 55.0 45.0 54.1 44.2

NL07 Dhrab village 30/05/21 Residential 55.0 45.0 54.8 44.7

NL08 Adani Township Gate 30/05/21 Residential 55.0 45.0 54.9 44.1

Observations

Noise level during day time & night time, in Industrial & Residential (habitation) areas were observed within the

permissible limits of CPCB Standards.

11.5.6 Surface Water

Surface water sampling was carried out at 8 locations within the study area as shown in following table:

Details of Surface Water Sampling Locations

Sample

Code Location

Sampling

Date Latitude Longitude

Source

of Water

Distance

from

Project

site (Km)

Direction

from

project

site

SW 01 Bhukhi River

(Near Mundra) 12.04.2021 22°50'16.0008"N 69°42'40.9644"E River 1.78 NNE

SW 02 Phot River

(Near Dhrab) 13.04.2021 22°50'19.3632"N 69°40'43.9284"E River 2.58 NNW

SW 03 Phot River

(Upstream Side) 13.04.2021 22°48'52.8984"N 69°42'16.0092"E River 1.38 SW

Date post:	27-Feb-2023
Category:	Documents
Upload:	khangminh22
View:	0 times
Download:	0 times

5530-D (23rd Edition), Direct photometric Method 0.001

Documents